Handleiding Hyundai Elantra 2015 (pagina 667 van 668) (Engels)

604400

667

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/668

Pagina verder

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-

lication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at

any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may

be carried out.

This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descrip-

tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.

As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply

to your specific vehicle.

OOWWNNEERR''SS MMAANNUUAALL

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp 6/23/2014 2:59 PM Page 1

Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect

the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate condi-

tions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in vio-

lation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal

or state agencies.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is

possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely

affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio

manufacturer's instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or

special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp 6/23/2014 2:59 PM Page 2

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

✽✽

NOTICE

This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

WARNING

This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you

or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the

warning.

CAUTION

This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equip-

ment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp 6/23/2014 2:59 PM Page 3

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing HYUNDAI.We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who

drive HYUNDAI. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each HYUNDAI we build is something of

which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. It is suggested that you

read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new

car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance

that may be required.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this HYUNDAI, please

leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI

Motor America.

CAUTION

Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do

not meet HYUNDAI specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the spec-

ifications listed on Page 8-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp 6/23/2014 2:59 PM Page 4

1. What are HYUNDAI Genuine

Parts?

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the

same parts used by HYUNDAI

Motor Company to manufacture

vehicles. They are designed and

tested for the optimum safety, per-

formance, and reliability to our

customers.

2. Why should you use genuine

parts?

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are

engineered and built to meet rigid

manufacturing requirements.

Using imitation, counterfeit or

used salvage parts is not covered

under the HYUNDAI New Vehicle

Limited Warranty or any other

HYUNDAI warranty.

In addition, any damage to or fail-

ure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts

caused by the installation or fail-

ure of an imitation, counterfeit or

used salvage part is not covered

by any HYUNDAI Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are pur-

chasing HYUNDAI Genuine

Parts?

Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine

Parts Logo on the package (see

below).

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts export-

ed to the U.S. are packaged with

labels written only in English.

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only

sold through authorized HYUNDAI

Dealerships.

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp 6/23/2014 2:59 PM Page 5

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp 6/23/2014 2:59 PM Page 6

Introduction

How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process / Vehicle data collection and event

data recorders

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment

Safety features of your vehicle

Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag

Features of your vehicle

Keys / Door locks / Trunk / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors /

Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Audio system / Etc.

Driving your vehicle

Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / Brake system / Cruise control system /

Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.

What to do in an emergency

Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.

Maintenance

Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid /

Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

table of contents

UD(FL) HMA foreword.qxp 6/23/2014 2:59 PM Page 7

Introduction

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3

• Other fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Gasoline containing MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . 1-6

UD(FL) HMA 1.QXP 8/28/2014 5:02 PM Page 1

Introduction

We want to help you get the greatest

possible driving pleasure from your

vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can

assist you in many ways. We strongly

recommend that you read the entire

manual. In order to minimize the

chance of death or injury, you must

read the WARNING and CAUTION

sections in this manual.

Illustrations complement the words

in this manual to best explain how to

enjoy your vehicle. By reading your

manual, you will learn about fea-

tures, important safety information,

and driving tips under various road

conditions.

The general layout of the manual is

provided in the Table of Contents. A

good place to start is the index; it has

an alphabetical listing of all informa-

tion in your manual.

Sections: This manual has eight

chapters plus an index. Each chapter

begins with a brief list of contents so

you can tell at a glance if that chap-

ter has the information you want.

You will find various WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this

manual.These WARNINGs were pre-

pared to enhance your personal safe-

ty. You should carefully read and fol-

low ALL procedures and recommen-

dations provided in these WARN-

INGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.

✽✽

NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or

helpful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situa-

tion in which harm, serious bod-

ily injury, or death could result if

the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation

in which damage to your vehicle

could result if the caution is

ignored.

UD(FL) HMA 1.QXP 8/28/2014 5:02 PM Page 2

Introduction

Your new vehicle is designed to use

only unleaded fuel having a pump

octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87 or

higher. (Do not use methanol blend-

ed fuels.)

Your new vehicle is designed to

obtain maximum performance with

UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-

mize exhaust emissions and spark

plug fouling.

Gasoline containing alcohol and

methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and

ethanol (also known as grain alco-

hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-

taining methanol (also known as

wood alcohol) are being marketed

along with or instead of leaded or

unleaded gasoline.

Do not use gasohol containing more

than 10% ethanol, and do not use

gasoline or gasohol containing any

methanol. Either of these fuels may

cause drivability problems and dam-

age to the fuel system, engine con-

trol system and emission control sys-

tem.

Discontinue using gasohol of any

kind if drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or drivability prob-

lems may not be covered by the

manufacturer’s warranty if they result

from the use of:

1. Gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol.

2. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.

3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-

prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15

percent gasoline, and is manufac-

tured exclusively for use in Flexible

Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-

ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”

may result in poor engine perform-

ance and damage to your vehicle's

engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI

recommends that customers do not

use fuel with an ethanol content

exceeding 10 percent.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION

Never add any fuel system

cleaning agents to the fuel tank

other than what has been speci-

fied. (Consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for details.)

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty does not cover dam-

age to the fuel system or any

performance problems caused

by the use of “E85” fuel.

CAUTION

Never use gasohol which con-

tains methanol. Discontinue use

of any gasohol product which

impairs driveability.

WARNING

• Do not "top off" after the noz-

zle automatically shuts off

when refueling.

• Always check that the fuel cap

is installed securely to pre-

vent fuel spillage in the event

of an accident.

UD(FL) HMA 1.QXP 8/28/2014 5:02 PM Page 3

Introduction

Other fuels

Using fuels such as,

- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,

- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and

- Other metallic additives contained

fuels,

may cause vehicle and engine dam-

age. Also the Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL) may illuminate or cause

plugging, misfiring, poor accelera-

tion, engine stalling, catalyst melting,

abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduc-

tion, etc.

✽✽

NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or per-

formance problem caused by the use

of these fuels may not be covered by

your New Vehicle Limited

Warrenty.

Gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains harmful man-

ganese-based fuel additives such as

MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Man-

ganese Tricarbonyl).

HYUNDAI does not recommend the

use of gasoline containing MMT.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle

performance and affect your emis-

sion control system.

The malfunction indicator lamp on

the cluster may come on.

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood

alcohol) should not be used in your

vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce

vehicle performance and damage

components of the fuel system,

engine control system and emission

control system.

Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use

good quality gasolines treated with

detergent additives such as TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline, which help

prevent deposit formation in the

engine. These gasolines will help the

engine run cleaner and enhance per-

formance of the Emission Control

System. For more information on TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go

to the website (www.toptiergas.com).

For customers who do not use TOP

Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly,

and have problems starting or the

engine does not run smoothly, addi-

tives that you can buy separately

may be added to the gasoline. If TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline is not avail-

able, one bottle of additive added to

the fuel tank at every 7,500 miles or

every engine oil change is recom-

mended. Additives are available from

your authorized HYUNDAI dealer

along with information on how to use

them. Do not mix other additives.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty may not cover damage

to the fuel system and any per-

formance problems that are

caused by the use of fuels con-

taining methanol.

UD(FL) HMA 1.QXP 8/28/2014 5:02 PM Page 4

Introduction

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle

in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding

registration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is

available.

No special break-in period is needed.

By following a few simple precautions

for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you

may add to the performance, econo-

my and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• While driving, keep your engine

speed (rpm, or revolutions per

minute) between 2,000 rpm and

4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for

long periods of time, either fast or

slow. Varying engine speed is

needed to properly break-in the

engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-

gencies, to allow the brakes to seat

properly.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

CALIFORNIA PROPO-

SITION 65 WARNING

Items contained in motor vehi-

cles or emitted from them are

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and birth

defects or reproductive harm.

These include:

• Gasoline and its vapors

• Engine exhaust

• Used engine oil

• Interior passenger compart-

ment components and materi-

als

• Component parts which are

subject to heat and wear

In addition, battery posts, termi-

nals and related accessories

contain lead, lead compounds

and other chemicals known to

the State of California to cause

cancer and reproductive harm.

UD(FL) HMA 1.QXP 8/28/2014 5:02 PM Page 5

Introduction

This vehicle is equipped with an

event data recorder (EDR). The

main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an

air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist

in understanding how a vehicle's

systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety sys-

tems for a short period of time,

typically 30 seconds or less. The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

• How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or

brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was travel-

ing.

These data can help provide a bet-

ter understanding of the circum-

stances in which crashes and

injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are

recorded by your vehicle only if a

non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR

under normal driving conditions

and no personal data (e.g., name,

gender, age, and crash location)

are recorded. However, other par-

ties, such as law enforcement,

could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a

crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,

special equipment is required, and

access to the vehicle or the EDR is

needed. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the

special equipment, can read the

information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR.

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

UD(FL) HMA 1.QXP 8/28/2014 5:02 PM Page 6

Exterior overview I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Exterior overview II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Exterior overview (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Your vehicle at a glance

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW I

1. Hood......................................................4-29

2. Windows................................................4-24

3. Sunroof* ................................................4-34

4. Removable towing hook* ......................6-29

5. Wiper blade ..........................................7-41

6. Tires and wheels ..................................7-47

7. Headlight ..............................................7-76

8. Fog light* ..............................................7-80

9. Side repeater light*................................7-80

*: if equipped

OMD014005N

■■

Front

Your vehicle at a glance

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW II

1. Door lock ..............................................4-14

2. Trunk......................................................4-21

3. Fuel filler lid ..........................................4-31

4. Outside rearview mirror ........................4-48

5. Antenna ..............................................4-120

6. Rear combination lamp ........................7-81

OMD014006N

■■

Rear

Your vehicle at a glance

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

OMD014001N

1. Inside door handle.............................4-16

2. Outside rearview mirror control

switch* ...............................................4-49

3. Central door lock switch ....................4-17

4. Power window lock switch*................4-27

5. Power window switches.....................4-24

6. Hood release lever ............................4-29

7. Active ECO........................................5-41

8. Instrument panel illumination.............4-52

9. ESC (Electronic Stability Control)

OFF button ........................................5-34

10. Fuse box...........................................7-64

11. Brake pedal .....................................5-29

12. Accelerator pedal .....................5-8, 5-15

13. Trunk lid release lever......................4-21

14. Fuel filler door opener .....................4-31

15. Steering wheel.................................4-38

16. Steering wheel tilt lever ...................4-39

17. Inside rearview mirror......................4-42

*: if equipped

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

OMD014002N

1. Instrument cluster..............................4-51

2. Horn...................................................4-41

3. Driver’s front air bag ..........................3-47

4. Light control/Turn signals .........4-72, 4-75

5. Wiper/Washer....................................4-81

6. Key ignition switch*/

Engine start/stop button*..............5-5, 5-9

7. Cruise control switch*........................5-43

8. Audio remote control*......................4-121

9. Digital clock .....................................4-113

10. Audio controls*...................4-135, 4-187

11. Hazard warning flasher switch ..........6-2

12. Climate control system...........4-84, 4-94

13. Shift lever ...............................5-18, 5-22

14. Parking brake ..................................5-30

15. Passenger’s front air bag.................3-47

16. Glove box.......................................4-111

17. Seat warmer*...................................3-19

18. Cup holder.....................................4-115

* : if equipped

❈ The actual instrument panel in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Your vehicle at a glance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OMD070047N

❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine oil filler cap............................7-31

2. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-30

3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir................7-35

4. Positive battery terminal....................7-43

5. Negative battery terminal ..................7-43

6. Fuse box............................................7-66

7. Air cleaner .........................................7-37

8. Radiator cap......................................7-32

9. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-33

10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir....7-36

Safety features of your vehicle

Important safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

• Always wear your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

• Restrain all children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

• Air bag hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

• Driver distraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

• Control your speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

• Keep your vehicle in safe condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

• Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

• Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

• Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

• Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

• Seat warmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

• Seat belt safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

• Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

• Additional seat belt safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Child restraint system (CRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

• Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) . . . . . . . . 3-35

• Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS). . . . . . . . 3-37

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint

system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

• Where are the air bags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

• What to expect after an air bag inflates . . . . . . . . . 3-54

• Occupant Classification System (OCS) . . . . . . . . 3-55

• Why Didn’t My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? . . . 3-60

• SRS care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65

• Additional safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66

• Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

You will find many safety precautions

and recommendations throughout

this section, and throughout this man-

ual.The safety precautions in this sec-

tion are among the most important.

Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in

all types of accidents. Air bags are

designed to supplement seat belts,

not replace them. So even though

your vehicle is equipped with air bags,

ALWAYS make sure you and your

passengers wear your seat belts, and

wear them properly.

Restrain all children

All children under age 13 should ride

in your vehicle properly restrained in

a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants

and small children should be

restrained in an appropriate child

restraint. Larger children should use

a booster seat with the lap/shoulder

belt until they can use the seat belt

properly without a booster seat.

Air bag hazards

While air bags can save lives, they

can also cause serious or fatal

injuries to occupants who sit too

close to them, or who are not prop-

erly restrained. Infants, young chil-

dren, and shorter adults are at the

greatest risk of being injured by an

inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-

tions and warnings in this manual.

Driver distraction

Driver distraction presents a serious

and potentially deadly danger, espe-

cially for inexperienced drivers. Safety

should be the first concern when

behind the wheel and drivers need to

be aware of the wide array of potential

distractions, such as drowsiness,

reaching for objects, eating, personal

grooming, other passengers, and

using cellular phones, to name a few.

Drivers can become distracted when

they take their eyes and attention off

the road or their hands off the wheel

to focus on activities other than driv-

ing. To reduce your risk of distraction

or getting into an accident:

• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices

(i.e., MP3 players, phones, naviga-

tion units, etc.) when your vehicle is

parked or safely stopped.

• ONLY use your mobile device when

allowed by laws and when conditions

permit safe use. NEVER text or

email while driving. Most states have

laws prohibiting drivers from texting.

Some states and cities also prohibit

drivers from using handheld phones.

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Safety features of your vehicle

• NEVER let the use of a mobile

device distract you from driving. You

have a responsibility to your passen-

gers and others on the road to

always drive safely, with your hands

on the wheel as well as your eyes

and attention on the road.

Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in

crash injuries and deaths. Generally,

the higher the speed, the greater the

risk, but serious injuries can also

occur at lower speeds. Never drive

faster than is safe for current condi-

tions, regardless of the maximum

speed posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe condi-

tion

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical

failure can be extremely hazardous.To

reduce the possibility of such prob-

lems, check your tire pressures and

condition frequently, and perform all

regularly scheduled maintenance.

Safety features of your vehicle

SEATS

Safety features of your vehicle

Driver’s seat

(1) Seat adjustment, forward/rearward

(2) Seatback recliner

(3) Seat adjustment, height

(4) Lumbar support*

(5) Seat warmer*

(6) Headrest adjustment

Front passenger seat

(7) Seat adjustment, forward/rearward

(8) Seatback recliner

(9) Seat warmer*

(10) Headrest adjustment

Rear seat

(11) Seat warmer*

(12) Armrest

(13) Headrest adjustment

(14) Seat back folding knob (trunk)*

* : if equipped

OUD034001N

■ Manual seat

■ Power seat

■ Type A

■ Type B

Safety precautions

Adjusting the seats so that you are sit-

ting in a safe, comfortable position

plays an important role in driver and

passenger safety together with the

seat belts and air bags in an accident.

Air bags

You can take steps to reduce the risk

of being injured by an inflating air

bag. Sitting too close to an air bag

greatly increases the risk of injury in

the event the air bag inflates.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) recom-

mends that drivers allow at least 10

inches (25 cm) between the center of

the steering wheel and their chest.

Seat belts

Always fasten your seat belt before

starting any trip.

At all times, passengers should sit

upright and be properly restrained.

Infants and small children must be

restrained in appropriate child

restraint systems. Children who have

outgrown a booster seat and adults

must be restrained using the seat

belts.

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

Do not use a cushion that

reduces friction between the seat

and the passenger. The passen-

ger's hips may slide under the

lap portion of the seat belt during

an accident or a sudden stop.

Serious or fatal internal injuries

could result because the seat

belt cannot operate normally.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

air bag, take the following pre-

cautions:

• Adjust the driver’s seat as far to

the rear as possible while main-

taining the ability to maintain

full control of the vehicle.

• Adjust the front passenger seat

as far to the rear as possible.

• Hold the steering wheel by the

rim with hands at the 9 o’clock

and 3 o’clock positions to mini-

mize the risk of injuries to your

hands and arms.

• NEVER place anything or any-

one between the steering wheel

and the air bag.

• Do not allow the front passen-

ger to place feet or legs on the

dashboard to minimize the risk

of leg injuries.

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seats

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when adjusting your seat belt:

• NEVER use one seat belt for

more than one occupant.

• Always position the seatback

upright with the lap portion of

the seat belt snug and low

across the hips.

• NEVER allow children or small

infants to ride in a passenger’s

lap.

• Do not route the seat belt

across your neck, across sharp

edges, or reroute the shoulder

strap away from your body.

• Do not allow the seat belt to

become caught or jammed.

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when adjusting your seat:

• NEVER attempt to adjust the

seat while the vehicle is mov-

ing. The seat could respond

with unexpected movement

and may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an acci-

dent.

• Do not place anything under

the front seats. Loose objects

in the driver’s foot area could

interfere with the operation of

the foot pedals, causing an

accident.

• Do not allow anything to inter-

fere with the normal position

and proper locking of the seat-

back.

• Do not place a cigarette lighter

on the floor or seat. When you

operate the seat, gas may exit

out of the lighter causing a fire.

WARNING

To prevent injury:

• Do not adjust your seat while

wearing your seat belt.

Moving the seat cushion for-

ward may cause strong pres-

sure on your abdomen.

• Do not allow your hands or

fingers to get caught in the

seat mechanisms while the

seat is moving.

Safety features of your vehicle

Manual adjustment

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment

lever and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure

the seat is locked in place. Move

forward and rearward without using

the lever. If the seat moves, it is not

locked properly.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat

and adjust the seatback to the

position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure

the seatback is locked in place.

(The lever MUST return to its orig-

inal position for the seatback to

lock.)

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when

the vehicle is in motion can be dan-

gerous. Even when buckled up, the

protection of your restraint system

(seat belts and air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seatback.

OMD030002

OMD030003

WARNING

NEVER ride with a reclined

seatback when the vehicle is

moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of seri-

ous or fatal injuries in the event

of a collision or sudden stop.

Drivers and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their

seats, properly belted, and with

the seatbacks upright.

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belts must be snug against your

hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the

shoulder belt cannot do its job

because it will not be snug against

your chest. Instead, it will be in front

of you. During an accident, you could

be thrown into the seat belt, causing

neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined,

the greater chance the passenger’s

hips will slide under the lap belt or

the passenger’s neck will strike the

shoulder belt.

Seat cushion height

(for driver’s seat)

To change the height of the seat

cushion:

• Push down on the lever several

times, to lower the seat cushion.

• Pull up on the lever several times,

to raise the seat cushion.

Power adjustment

The front seat can be adjusted by

using the control switches located on

the outside of the seat cushion. Before

driving, adjust the seat to the proper

position so that you can easily control

the steering wheel, foot pedals and

controls on the instrument panel.

OMD030004

WARNING

NEVER allow children in the

vehicle unattended. The power

seats are operable when the

engine is turned off.

Safety features of your vehicle

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Push the control switch forward or

rearward.

2. Release the switch once the seat

reaches the desired position.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Push the control switch forward or

rearward.

2. Release the switch once the seat-

back reaches the desired position.

WARNING

To prevent damage to the seats:

• Always stop adjusting the

seats when the seat has been

adjusted as far forward or

rearward as possible.

• Do not adjust the seats longer

than necessary when the

engine is turned off. This may

result in unnecessary battery

drain.

• Do not operate two or more

seats at the same time. This

may result in an electrical mal-

function.

OMD030006 OMD030007

Safety features of your vehicle

103

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when

the vehicle is in motion can be dan-

gerous. Even when buckled up, the

protections of your restraint system

(seat belts and air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seatback.

Seat belts must be snug against your

hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the

shoulder belt cannot do its job

because it will not be snug against

your chest. Instead, it will be in front

of you. During an accident, you could

be thrown into the seat belt, causing

neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined,

the greater chance the passenger’s

hips will slide under the lap belt or

the passenger’s neck will strike the

shoulder belt.

Seat cushion height

(for driver’s seat)

To change the height of the seat

cushion:

1. Pull the front portion of the control

switch up to raise or push down to

lower the front part of the seat

cushion. Pull the rear portion of

the control switch up to raise or

push down to lower the rear part of

the seat cushion.

2. Release the switch once the seat

reaches the desired position.

WARNING

NEVER ride with a reclined seat-

back when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of serious

or fatal injuries in the event of a

collision or sudden stop.

Drivers and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their

seats, properly belted, and with

the seatbacks upright.

OMD030008

Safety features of your vehicle

311

Lumbar support

(for driver’s seat, if equipped)

To adjust the lumbar support:

1. Press the front portion of the

switch to increase support or the

rear portion of the switch to

decrease support.

2. Release the switch once it reach-

es the desired position.

Seatback pocket

The seatback pocket is provided on

the back of the front seatbacks.

OMD030009

OMD030013

WARNING

To prevent the occupant classi-

fication system from malfunc-

tioning:

• Do not place any items total

weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) in

the seatback pocket on the

passenger’s seat.

• Do not hang onto the front

passenger’s seatback.

WARNING

Do not put heavy or sharp

objects in the seatback pockets.

In an accident they could come

loose from the pocket and

injure occupants.

Safety features of your vehicle

123

Rear seats

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to

facilitate carrying long items or to

increase the luggage capacity of the

vehicle.

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Set the front seatback to the

upright position and if necessary,

slide the front seat forward.

2.Lower the rear headrests to the

lowest position.

3.Pull on the seatback folding lever

located in the trunk.

WARNING

• Never allow passengers to sit

on top of the folded down

seatback while the vehicle is

moving. This is not a proper

seating position and no seat

belts are available for use.

This could result in serious

injury or death in case of an

accident or sudden stop.

• Objects carried on the folded

down seatback should not

extend higher than the top of

the front seatbacks. This

could allow cargo to slide for-

ward and cause injury or dam-

age during sudden stops.

OMD030026

Safety features of your vehicle

313

4.Fold the seatback toward the front

of the vehicle.

5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull

the seatback rearward. Pull the

seatback firmly until it clicks into

place. Make sure the seatback is

locked in place.

When you return the seatback to

its upright position, always be sure

it has locked into position by push-

ing on the top of the seatback.

6. Return the rear seat belt to the

proper position.

OMD031028N

WARNING

When returning the rear seat-

back from a folded to an upright

position, hold the seatback and

return it slowly. Ensure that the

seatback is completely locked

into its upright position by

pushing on the top of the seat-

back. In an accident or sudden

stop, the unlocked seatback

could allow cargo to move for-

ward with great force and enter

the passenger compartment,

which could result in serious

injury or death.

WARNING

Do not place objects in the rear

seats, since they cannot be

properly secured and may hit

vehicle occupants in a collision

causing serious injury or death.

WARNING

Make sure the engine is off, the

shift lever is in P (Park), and the

parking brake is securely

applied whenever loading or

unloading cargo. Failure to take

these steps may allow the vehi-

cle to move if the shift lever is

inadvertently moved to another

position.

Safety features of your vehicle

143

Armrest

The armrest is located in the center

of the rear seat. Pull the armrest

down from the seatback to use it.

You will find cup holders on the cen-

ter armrest.

Carrying long/narrow cargo

(if equipped)

Pull the armrest down using the strap

provided on the armrest. Pull the

cover down while pushing the release

lever (1) down. Additional cargo

space is provided to accommodate

long/narrow cargo (skis, poles, lum-

ber, etc.) not able to fit properly in the

trunk when closed.

OMD030029N

OMD030031

CAUTION

• Make sure the engine is off,

the transaxle is in P and the

parking brake is applied

whenever loading or unload-

ing cargo.Vehicle may move if

shift lever is inadvertently

moved to another position.

• Be careful when loading cargo

through the rear passenger

seats to prevent damage to

the vehicle interior.

• When cargo is loaded through

the rear passenger seats,

ensure the cargo is properly

secured to prevent it from

moving while driving.

Unsecured cargo in the pas-

senger compartment can

cause damage to the vehicle

or injury to it’s occupants.

Safety features of your vehicle

315

Headrest

The vehicle’s front and rear seats

have adjustable headrests.The head-

rests provide comfort for passengers,

but more importantly they are

designed to help protect passengers

from whiplash and other neck and

spinal injuries during an accident,

especially in a rear impact collision.

Front seat headrest

The driver’s and front passenger’s

seats are equipped with adjustable

headrests for the passengers safety

and comfort.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death in an accident,

take the following precautions

when adjusting your headrests:

• Always properly adjust the

headrests for all passengers

BEFORE starting the vehicle.

• NEVER let anyone ride in a seat

with the headrest removed.

(Continued)

• Adjust the headrests so the

middle of the headrests is at

the same height as the height

of the top of the eyes.

• NEVER adjust the headrest

position of the driver’s seat

when the vehicle is in motion.

• Adjust the headrest as close

to the passenger’s head as

possible. Do not use a seat

cushion that holds the body

away from the seatback.

• Make sure the headrest locks

into position after adjusting it.

WARNING

To prevent damage, NEVER hit

or pull on the headrests.

OMG038400

Safety features of your vehicle

163

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the headrest:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the headrest support.

2. Lower the headrest to the desired

position (3).

Removal/Reinstall

To remove the headrest:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with the

recline lever or switch (1).

2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.

3. Press the headrest release button

(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).

OMD030010

OMD034062

OMD034011

■ Type A

■ Type B

CAUTION

If you recline the seatback

towards the front with the head-

rest and seat cushion raised,

the headrest may come in con-

tact with the sunvisor or other

parts of the vehicle.

OYFH034205

Safety features of your vehicle

317

To reinstall the headrest :

1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the

holes while pressing the release

button (1).

2. Recline the seatback (4) with the

recline lever or switch (3).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-

priate height.

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a

seat with the headrest removed.

WARNING

Always make sure the headrest

locks into position after rein-

stalling and adjusting it properly.

OMD034063

OMD034012

■ Type A

■ Type B

Safety features of your vehicle

183

Rear seat headrest

The rear seats are equipped with

headrests in all the seating positions

for the passenger’s safety and com-

fort.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the headrest:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the headrest support.

2. Lower the headrest to the desired

position (3).

Removal/Reinstall

To remove the headrest:

1. Raise the headrest as far as it can

go.

2. Press the release button (1) while

pulling the headrest up (2).

ONF039401

OMD030016OMD030015

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a

seat with the headrest removed.

Safety features of your vehicle

319

To reinstall the headrest:

1. Recline the seatback.

2. Put the headrest poles (3) into the

holes while pressing the release

button (1).

3. Adjust the headrest to the appropri-

ate height.

Seat warmers

Seat warmers are provided to warm

the seats during cold weather.

WARNING

Always make sure the headrest

locks into position after rein-

stalling and adjusting it to prop-

erly protect the occupants.

WARNING

The seat warmers can cause a

SERIOUS BURN, even at low

temperatures and especially if

used for long periods of time.

Passengers must be able to feel

if the seat is becoming too warm

so they can turn it off, if needed.

People who cannot detect tem-

perature change or pain to the

skin should use extreme cau-

tion, especially the following

types of passengers:

• Infants, children, elderly or

disabled persons, or hospital

outpatients.

• People with sensitive skin or

who burn easily.

• Fatigued individuals.

• Intoxicated individuals.

• People taking medication that

can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness.

WARNING

NEVER place anything on the

seat that insulates against heat

when the seat warmer is in oper-

ation, such as a blanket or seat

cushion. This may cause the

seat warmer to overheat, caus-

ing a burn or damage to the seat.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the seat

warmers and seats:

•

Never use a solvent such as

paint thinner, benzene, alco-

hol or gasoline to clean the

seats.

•

Do not place heavy or sharp

objects on seats equipped

with seat warmers.

Safety features of your vehicle

203

Front seat warmers (if equipped)

While the engine is running, push

either of the switches to warm the dri-

ver's seat or front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under condi-

tions where the operation of the seat

warmer is not needed, keep the

switches in the OFF position.

Each time you push the switch, the

temperature setting of the seat is

changed as follows :

The seat warmer defaults to the OFF

position whenever the ignition switch

is placed in the ON position.

✽✽

NOTICE

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in

the seat turns off or on automatical-

ly depending on the seat tempera-

ture.

Rear seat warmers (if equipped)

While the engine is running, push

either switch to warm the rear seat.

During mild weather or under condi-

tions where the operation of the seat

warmer is not needed, keep the

switches in the "OFF" position.

✽✽

NOTICE

With the seat warmer switch in ON

position, the heating system in the

seat turns off or on automatically

depending on the seat temperature.

OMD034014

OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )

→

OMD030025

■ Left ■ Right

Safety features of your vehicle

321

This section describes how to use the

seat belts properly. It also describes

some of the things not to do when

using seat belts.

Seat belt safety precautions

Always fasten your seat belt and

make sure all passengers have fas-

tened their seat belts before starting

any trip. Air bags are designed to

supplement the seat belt as an addi-

tional safety device, but they are not a

substitute. Most states require all

occupants of a vehicle to wear seat

belts.

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

Seat belts must be used by ALL

passengers whenever the vehi-

cle is moving.Take the following

precautions when adjusting and

wearing seat belts:

• ALWAYS properly restrain

children under age 13 in the

rear seats.

• NEVER allow children to ride

in the front passenger seat. If

a child age 13 or older must be

seated in the front seat, move

the seat as far back as possi-

ble and properly restrain them

in the seat belt.

• NEVER allow an infant or child

to be carried on an occupant’s

lap.

• NEVER ride with the seatback

reclined when the vehicle is

moving.

• Do not allow children to share

a seat or seat belt.

• Do not wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behind your

back.

(Continued)

• Do not use the seat belt if it is

twisted. A twisted seat belt

will not protect you properly

in an accident.

• Do not use a seat belt if the

webbing or hardware is dam-

aged.

• Do not latch the seat belt into

the buckles of other seats.

• NEVER unfasten the seat belt

while driving. This may cause

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident.

• Make sure there is nothing in

the buckle interfering with the

seat belt latch mechanism.

This may prevent the seat belt

from fastening securely.

• No modifications or additions

should be made by the user

which will either prevent the

seat belt adjusting devices

from operating to remove

slack, or prevent the seat belt

assembly from being adjusted

to remove slack.

Safety features of your vehicle

223

Seat belt warning light

(for driver’s seat)

The driver’s seat belt warning light

and chime will come on according to

the following table when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

: The Warning Pattern repeats 11 times with

an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's

seat belt is buckled, the light will stop with-

in 6 seconds and chime will stop immedi-

ately.

: The light will stop within 6 seconds and

chime will stop immediately.

OLMB033022

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt

Vehicle

Speed

Light (Blink) Chime

Unbuckled 6 seconds

Buckled 6 seconds None

Buckled →

Unbuckled

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds None

3 mph~

6 mph

6 seconds

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

6 sec. ON / 24 sec. OFF

(11 times)

Unbuckled

Above 6 mph

(10 km/h)

↓

Below 3 mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds *

↓

Stop *

WARNING

Damaged seat belts and seat

belt assemblies will not operate

properly. Always replace:

• Frayed, contaminated, or dam-

aged webbing

• Damaged hardware

• The entire seat belt assembly

after it has been worn in an

accident, even if damage to

webbing or assembly is not

apparent

Safety features of your vehicle

323

Seat belt restraint system

Seat Belt-Driver’s 3-point system

with emergency locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the metal tab (1) into the

buckle (2). There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the

buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to

the proper length after the lap belt

portion is adjusted manually so that it

fits snugly around your hips. If you

lean forward in a slow, easy motion,

the belt will extend and move with

you. If there is a sudden stop or

impact, the belt will lock into position.

It will also lock if you try to lean for-

ward too quickly.

✽✽

NOTICE

If you are not able to smoothly pull

enough of the seat belt out from the

retractor, firmly pull the seat belt out

and release it. After release, you will

be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the

shoulder belt anchor to one of the

four different positions for maximum

comfort and safety.

The shoulder portion should be

adjusted so it lies across your chest

and midway over your shoulder near-

est the door, not over your neck.

B180A01NF-1

Safety features of your vehicle

243

To adjust the height of the seat belt

anchor, lower or raise the height

adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while

pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor

into position. Try sliding the height

adjuster to make sure that it has

locked into position.

OHD036019

■ Front seat

WARNING

• Verify the shoulder belt

anchor is locked into position

at the appropriate height.

Never position the shoulder

belt across your neck or face.

Improperly positioned seat

belts can cause serious

injuries in an accident.

• Failure to replace seat belts

after an accident could leave

you with damaged seat belts

that will not provide protec-

tion in the event of another

collision leading to personal

injury or death. Replace your

seat belts after being in an

accident as soon as possible.

OLMB033025

WARNING

Improperly positioned seat belts

may increase the risk of serious

injury in an accident.Take the fol-

lowing precautions when adjust-

ing the seat belt:

• Position the lap portion of the

seat belt as low as possible

across your hips, not on your

waist, so that it fits snugly.

(Continued)

Seat Belt – Passenger’s 3-point

system with combination locking

retractor

This type of seat belt combines the

features of both an emergency lock-

ing retractor seat belt and an auto-

matic locking retractor seat belt.

Combination retractor type seat belts

are installed in the rear seat positions

to help accommodate the installation

of child restraint systems. Although a

combination retractor is also installed

in the front passenger seat position,

NEVER place any infant restraint sys-

tem in the front seat of the vehicle.

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the metal tab into the

buckle. There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the

buckle. When not securing a child

restraint, the seat belt operates in the

same way as the driver's seat belt

(Emergency Locking Retractor

Type). It automatically adjusts to the

proper length only after the lap belt

portion of the seat belt is adjusted

manually so that it fits snugly across

your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extended

from the retractor to allow the instal-

lation of a child restraint system, the

seat belt operation changes to allow

the belt to retract, but not to extend

(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).

Refer to “Using a Child Restraint

System” in this chapter.

Safety features of your vehicle

325

(Continued)

• Position one arm under the

shoulder belt and the other over

the belt, as shown in the illus-

tration.

• Always position the shoulder

belt anchor into the locked

position at the appropriate

height.

• Never position the shoulder

belt across your neck or face.

✽✽

NOTICE

Although the seat belt retractor pro-

vides the same level of protection for

seated passengers in either emer-

gency or automatic locking modes,

the emergency locking mode allows

seated passengers to move freely in

their seat while keeping some tension

on the belt. During a collision or sud-

den stop, the retractor automatically

locks the belt to help restrain your

body. To deactivate the automatic

locking mode, allow the unbuckled

seat belt to fully retract.

When using the rear center seat belt,

the buckle with the “CENTER” mark

must be used.

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the

locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should

automatically draw back into the

retractor. If this does not happen,

check the belt to be sure it is not twist-

ed, then try again.

Safety features of your vehicle

263

B180A01NF-1OMD030018N

Safety features of your vehicle

327

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Retractor Pre-tensioner

The retractor pre-tensioner, which is

a supplement system of the seat

belts and airbags, helps the driver

and front passenger's upper body to

be fastened surely to the seat by

pulling the shoulder back instantly in

certain frontal collisions.

The retractor pre-tensioner may be

activated in crashes where the

frontal collision is severe enough.

The retractor pre-tensioner will be

activated with the airbags.

Emergency Fastening Device

(EFD)

Emergency Fastening Device(EFD),

which is a supplement system of the

seat belts, protects the driver and

front passenger's lower body by

pulling the pelvis back instantly in

certain frontal collisions.

The EFD may be activated in crash-

es where the frontal collision is

severe enough.

✽✽

NOTICE

The pre-tensioner will activate not

only in a frontal collision but also in

a side collision, if the vehicle is

equipped with a side or curtain air

bag.

OED030300

WARNING

Pre-Tensioner Seat Belts that

malfunction may not protect you

properly during an accident.

Take the following precautions:

• Always wear your seat belt

and sit properly in your seat.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is

loose or twisted. A loose or

twisted seat belt will not pro-

tect you properly in an acci-

dent.

• Do not place anything near the

buckle. This may adversely

affect the buckle and cause it

to function improperly.

• Always replace your pre-ten-

sioners after activation or an

accident.

• NEVER inspect, service, repair

or replace the pre-tensioners

yourself.This must be done by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not hit the seat belt assem-

blies.

Safety features of your vehicle

283

The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System

consists mainly of the following com-

ponents.Their locations are shown in

the illustration above:

1. SRS air bag warning light

2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly

3. SRS control module

4. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly

✽✽

NOTICE

The sensor that activates the SRS air

bag is connected with the pre–ten-

sioner seat belts. The SRS air bag

warning light on the instrument panel

will illuminate for approximately 6

seconds after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position, and then it

should turn off.

If the pre-tensioner is not working

properly, the warning light will illu-

minate even if the SRS air bag is not

malfunctioning. If the warning light

does not illuminate, stays illuminated

or illuminates when the vehicle is

being driven, have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre-

tensioner seat belts and SRS air bags

as soon as possible.

WARNING

Do not touch the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies for several

minutes after they have been

activated. When the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt mechanism

fires during a collision the pre-

tensioner becomes hot and can

burn you.

1LDE3100/Q

Safety features of your vehicle

329

✽✽

NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front pas-

senger's pre-tensioner seat belts

may be activated in certain frontal

or side collisions.

• The pre-tensioners will not be acti-

vated if the seat belts are not worn

at the time of the collision.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts

are activated, a loud noise may be

heard and fine dust, which may

appear to be smoke, may be visible

in the passenger compartment.

These are normal operating condi-

tions and are not hazardous.

• Although it is non-toxic, the fine

dust may cause skin irritation and

should not be breathed for pro-

longed periods. Wash all exposed

skin areas thoroughly after an

accident in which the pre-tension-

er seat belts were activated.

Additional seat belt safety pre-

cautions

Seat belt use during pregnancy

The seat belt should always be used

during pregnancy. The best way to

protect your unborn child is to protect

yourself by always wearing the seat

belt.

Pregnant women should always wear

a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the

shoulder belt across your chest, rout-

ed between your breasts and away

from your neck. Place the shoulder

belt across the chest, routed away

from the neck.Place the lap belt below

the belt line so that it fits snugly and as

low as possible across the hips, not

across the abdomen.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death to an unborn

child during an accident, preg-

nant women should NEVER

place the lap portion of the seat

belt above or over the area of

the abdomen where the unborn

child is located.

Safety features of your vehicle

303

Seat belt use and children

Infant and small children

All 50 states have child restraint laws

which require children to travel in

approved child restraint devices,

including booster seats. The age at

which seat belts can be used instead

of child restraints differs among

states, so you should be aware of the

specific requirements in your state,

and where you are travelling. Infant

and child restraints must be properly

placed and installed in a rear seat.

For more information refer to the

“Child Restraint Systems” in this

chapter.

Small children are best protected

from injury in an accident when prop-

erly restrained in the rear seat by a

child restraint system that meets the

requirements of the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards. Before

buying any child restraint system,

make sure that it has a label certify-

ing that it meets Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The

restraint must be appropriate for your

child's height and weight. Check the

label on the child restraint for this

information. Refer to “Child Restraint

Systems” in this chapter.

WARNING

ALWAYS properly restrain infants

and small children in a child

restraint appropriate for the

child’s height and weight.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death to a child and

other passengers, NEVER hold a

child in your lap or arms when

the vehicle is moving.The violent

forces created during an acci-

dent will tear the child from your

arms and throw the child against

the interior of the vehicle.

Safety features of your vehicle

331

Larger children

Children under age 13 and who are

too large for a booster seat must

always occupy the rear seat and use

the available lap/shoulder belts. A

seat belt should lie across the upper

thighs and be snug across the shoul-

der and chest to restrain the child

safely. Check belt fit periodically. A

child's squirming could put the belt

out of position. Always have the

LATCH system inspected by your

authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an

accident. An accident can damage

the LATCH system and may not

properly secure the child restraint.

If a larger child over age 13 must be

seated in the front seat, the child

must be securely restrained by the

available lap/shoulder belt and the

seat should be placed in the rear-

most position.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly

touches the child’s neck or face, try

placing the child closer to the center

of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still

touches their face or neck they need

to be returned to an appropriate

booster seat.

Transporting an injured person

A seat belt should be used when an

injured person is being transported.

Consult a physician for specific rec-

ommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should

never attempt to use a single seat belt.

This could increase the severity of

injuries in case of an accident.

WARNING

• Always make sure children

are wearing their seat belts

and that they are properly

adjusted before driving.

• NEVER allow the shoulder

belt to contact the child’s

neck or face.

• Do not allow more than one

child to use a single seat belt.

Safety features of your vehicle

323

Do not lie down

Sitting in a reclined position when

the vehicle is in motion can be dan-

gerous. Even when buckled up, the

protections of your restraint system

(seat belts and air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seatback.

To reduce the chance of injuries in

the event of an accident and to

achieve the maximum effectiveness

of the restraint system, all passen-

gers should be sitting up and the

front and rear seats should be in an

upright position when the car is mov-

ing. A seat belt cannot provide prop-

er protection if the person is lying

down in the rear seat or if the front or

rear seats are in a reclined position.

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be

disassembled or modified. In addi-

tion, care should be taken to assure

that seat belts and belt hardware are

not damaged by seat hinges, doors

or other abuse.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected

periodically for wear or damage of

any kind. Any damaged parts should

be replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and

dry. If belts become dirty, they can be

cleaned by using a mild soap solu-

tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,

strong detergents or abrasives

should not be used because they

may damage and weaken the fabric.

WARNING

• NEVER ride with a reclined

seatback when the vehicle is

moving.

• Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of seri-

ous or fatal injuries in the event

of a collision or sudden stop.

• Drivers and passengers should

always sit well back in their

seats, properly belted, and with

the seatbacks upright.

Safety features of your vehicle

333

When to replace seat belts

The entire seat belt assembly or

assemblies should be replaced if the

vehicle has been involved in an acci-

dent. This should be done even if no

damage is visible. Additional ques-

tions concerning seat belt operation

should be directed to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Safety features of your vehicle

343

Children under age 13 must always

ride in the rear seats and must

always be properly restrained to min-

imize the risk of injury in an accident,

sudden stop or sudden maneuver.

According to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seats than in

the front seat. Even with air bags,

children can be seriously injured

or killed. Children too large for a

child restraint must use the seat belts

provided.

All 50 states have child restraint laws

which require children to travel in

approved child restraint devices. The

laws governing the age or

height/weight restrictions at which

seat belts can be used instead of

child restraints differs among states,

so you should be aware of the spe-

cific requirements in your state, and

where you are travelling.

Child restraint systems must be

properly placed and installed in the

rear seat. You must use a commer-

cially available child restraint system

that meets the requirements of the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS).

Child restraint systems are generally

designed to be secured in a vehicle

seat by lap belt portion of a

lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys-

tem in the rear seats of the vehicle.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)

WARNING

Always properly restrain chil-

dren in the rear seats of the

vehicle.

Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front pas-

senger seat can be forcefully

struck by an inflating air bag

resulting in SERIOUS INJURY

or DEATH.

Safety features of your vehicle

335

Child restraint system (CRS)

Infants and younger children must be

restrained in an appropriate rear-fac-

ing or forward-facing CRS that has

first been properly secured to the

rear seat of the vehicle. Read and

comply with the instructions for

installation and use provided by the

manufacturer of the child restraint.

Selecting a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

When selecting a CRS for your child,

always:

• Make sure the CRS has a label

certifying that it meets applicable

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS 213).

• Select a child restraint based on

your child’s height and weight. The

required label or the instructions

for use typically provide this infor-

mation.

• Select a child restraint that fits the

vehicle seating position where it

will be used.

• Read and comply with the warn-

ings and instructions for installation

and use provided with the child

restraint system.

WARNING

An improperly secured child

restraint can increase the risk

of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH

in an accident. Always take the

following precautions when

using a child restraint system:

• NEVER install a child or infant

restraint in the front passen-

ger’s seat.

• Always properly secure the

child restraint to a rear seat of

the vehicle.

(Continued)

• Always follow the child

restraint system manufactur-

er’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

• Always properly restrain your

child in the child restraint.

• Do not use an infant carrier or

a child safety seat that

“hooks” over a seatback, it

may not provide adequate

protection in an accident.

• After an accident, have a

HYUNDAI dealer check the

child restraint system, seat

belts, tether anchors and

lower anchors.

Safety features of your vehicle

363

Child restraint system types

There are three main types of child

restraint systems: rear-facing seats,

forward-facing seats, and booster

seats. They are classified according

to the child’s age, height and weight.

Rear-facing child seats

A rear-facing child seat provides

restraint with the seating surface

against the back of the child.The har-

ness system holds the child in place,

and in an accident, acts to keep the

child positioned in the seat and

reduce the stress to the neck and

spinal cord.

All children under age one must

always ride in a rear-facing infant child

restraint.

Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typ-

ically have higher height and weight

limits for the rear-facing position,

allowing you to keep your child rear-

facing for a longer period of time.

Continue to use a rear-facing child

seat for as long as your child will fit

within the height and weight limits

allowed by the child seat manufactur-

er. It’s the best way to keep them

safe. Once your child has outgrown

the rear-facing child restraint, your

child is ready for a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness.

CRS09

WARNING

NEVER install a child or infant

restraint in the front passen-

ger’s seat.

Placing a rear-facing child

restraint in the front seat can

result in SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH if the child restraint is

struck by an inflating air bag.

■ Rearward-facing child restraint system

WARNING

If the vehicle headrest prevents

proper installation of a child

seat, the headrest of the respec-

tive seating position shall be

readjusted or entirely removed.

Safety features of your vehicle

337

Forward-facing child restraints

A forward-facing child seat provides

restraint for the child’s body with a

harness. Keep children in a forward-

facing child seat with a harness until

they reach the top height or weight

limit allowed by your child restraint’s

manufacturer.

Once your child outgrows the forward-

facing child restraint, your child is

ready for a booster seat.

Booster seats

A booster seat is a restraint designed

to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat

belt system. A booster seat positions

the seat belt so that it fits properly

over the lap of your child. Keep your

child in a booster seat until they are

big enough to sit in the seat without a

booster and still have the seat belt fit

properly.

For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap

belt must lie snugly across the upper

thighs, not the stomach.The shoulder

belt should lie snug across the shoul-

der and chest and not across the neck

or face. Children under age 13 must

always ride in the rear seats and must

always be properly restrained to mini-

mize the risk of injury.

Installing a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

OMD030019

WARNING

Before installing your child

restraint system always:

• Read and follow the instruc-

tions provided by the manu-

facturer of the child restraint.

• Read and follow the instruc-

tions regarding child restraint

systems in this manual.

Failure to follow all warnings

and instructions could increase

the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY

or DEATH if an accident occurs.

Safety features of your vehicle

383

After selecting a proper child seat for

your child, check to make sure it fits

properly in your vehicle. Follow the

instructions provided by the manu-

facturer when installing the child

seat. Note these general steps when

installing the seat to your vehicle:

•

Properly secure the child restraint

to the vehicle.

All child restraints

must be secured to the vehicle with

the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or

with the LATCH system.

• Make sure the child restraint is

firmly secured. After installing a

child restraint to the vehicle, push

and pull the seat forward and from

side-to-side to verify that it is

securely attached to the seat. A

child restraint secured with a seat

belt should be installed as firmly as

possible. However, some side-to-

side movement can be expected.

Lower Anchors and Tether for

Children (LATCH) System

The LATCH system holds a child

restraint during driving and in an acci-

dent. This system is designed to

make installation of the child restraint

easier and reduce the possibility of

improperly installing your child

restraint. The LATCH system uses

anchors in the vehicle and attach-

ments on the child restraint. The

LATCH system eliminates the need

to use seat belts to secure the child

restraint to the rear seats.

Lower anchors are metal bars built

into the vehicle. There are two lower

anchors for each LATCH seating

position that will accommodate a

child restraint with lower attachments.

To use the LATCH system in your

vehicle, you must have a child

restraint with LATCH attachments.

The child seat manufacturer will pro-

vide you with instructions on how to

use the child seat with its attachments

for the LATCH lower anchors.

WARNING

A child restraint in a closed

vehicle can become very hot.To

prevent burns, check the seat-

ing surface and buckles before

placing your child in the child

restraint.

Safety features of your vehicle

339

LATCH anchors have been provided

in the left and right outboard rear

seating positions. Their locations are

shown in the illustration.There are no

LATCH anchors provided for the cen-

ter rear seating position.

The lower anchor position indicator

symbols are located on the left and

right rear seat backs to identify the

position of the lower anchors in your

vehicle (see arrows in illustration).

The LATCH anchors are located

between the seatback and the seat

cushion of the rear seat left and right

outboard seating positions.

B230D01NF

WARNING

Do not attempt to install a child

restraint system using LATCH

anchors in the rear center seat-

ing position.There are no LATCH

anchors provided for this seat.

Using the outboard seat anchors

can damage the anchors which

may break or fail in a collision

resulting in serious injury or

death.

OMD030022N

ISOFIX Anchor

Position Indicator

Safety features of your vehicle

403

Securing a child restraint with

the LATCH anchors system

To install a LATCH-compatible child

restraint in either of the rear outboard

seating positions:

1. Move the seat belt buckle away from

the lower anchors.

2. Move any other objects away from

the anchors that could prevent a

secure connection between the child

restraint and the lower anchors.

3. Place the child restraint on the vehi-

cle seat, then attach the seat to the

lower anchors according to the

instructions provided by the child

restraint manufacturer.

4. Follow the child restraint instructions

for properly adjusting and tightening

the lower attachments on the child

restraint to the lower anchors.

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when using the LATCH system:

• Read and follow all installation

instructions provided with

your child restraint system.

• To prevent the child from

reaching and taking hold of

unretracted seat belts, buckle

all unused rear seat belts and

retract the seat belt webbing

behind the child. Children can

be strangled if a shoulder belt

becomes wrapped around

their neck and the seat belt

tightens.

• NEVER attach more than one

child restraint to a single

anchor. This could cause the

anchor or attachment to come

loose or break.

(Continued)

• Always have the LATCH sys-

tem inspected by your author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer after an

accident. An accident can

damage the LATCH system

and may not properly secure

the child restraint.

WARNING - Weight for

LATCH system

The recommended weight for

the LATCH system is under 65lb

(30kg).

How to calculate the child

restraint weight :

Child restraint weight =

65lb (30kg) - Child weight

Safety features of your vehicle

341

Securing a child restraint seat

with “Tether Anchor” system

First, secure the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchors or the seat

belt. If the child seat manufacturer

recommends that the tether strap be

attached, attach and tighten the

tether strap to the tether anchor.

Tether anchors are located on the

back of the rear seats.

To install the tether strap:

1. Route the child restraint tether

strap over the child restraint seat-

back. Route the tether strap under

the headrest and between the

headrest posts, or route the tether

strap over the top of the vehicle

seatback. Make sure the strap is

not twisted.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to

the tether anchor, then tighten the

tether strap according to the child

seat manufacturer’s instructions to

firmly secure the child restraint to

the seat.

OMD030021N

OMD030030N

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when installing the tether strap:

• Read and follow all installation

instructions provided with

your child restraint system.

• NEVER attach more than one

child restraint to a single teth-

er anchor. This could cause

the anchor or attachment to

come loose or break.

• Do not attach the tether strap

to anything other than the cor-

rect tether anchor. It may not

work properly if attached to

something else.

• Do not use the tether anchors

for adult seat belts or harness-

es, or for attaching other items

or equipment to the vehicle.

Safety features of your vehicle

423

3. Check that the child restraint is

securely attached to the seat by

pushing and pulling the seat for-

ward and from side-to-side.

Securing a child restraint with a

lap belt or lap/shoulder belt

When not using the LATCH system,

all child restraints must be secured to

a vehicle rear seat with the lap part

of a lap/shoulder belt.

Automatic lock mode

Since all passenger seat belts move

freely under normal conditions and

only lock under extreme or emer-

gency conditions (emergency locking

mode), you must manually pull the

seat belt all the way out to shift the

retractor to the “Automatic Locking”

mode to secure a child restraint.

The “Automatic Locking” mode will

help prevent the normal movement

of the child in the vehicle from caus-

ing the seat belt to loosen and com-

promise the child restraint system.To

secure a child restraint system, use

the following procedure.

OLMB033044

WARNING

ALWAYS place a rear-facing

child restraint in the rear seat of

the vehicle.

Placing a rear-facing child

restraint in the front seat can

result in serious injury or death

if the child restraint is struck by

an inflating air bag.

Safety features of your vehicle

343

To install a child restraint system on

the rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the child restraint system on

a rear seat and route the lap/shoul-

der belt around or through the child

restraint, following the restraint

manufacturer’s instructions.

Be sure the seat belt webbing is

not twisted.

✽✽

NOTICE

When using the rear center seat belt,

you should also refer to “3-point Rear

Center Seat Belt” in this chapter.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch

into the buckle. Listen for the dis-

tinct “click” sound.

✽✽

NOTICE

Position the release button so that it

is easy to access in case of an emer-

gency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the

seat belt all the way out. When the

shoulder portion of the seat belt is

fully extended, it will shift the

retractor to the “Automatic

Locking” (child restraint) mode.

OLMB033045

OMD030054A

Safety features of your vehicle

443

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion

of the seat belt to retract and listen

for an audible “clicking” or “ratchet-

ing” sound. This indicates that the

retractor is in the “Automatic

Locking” mode. If no distinct sound

is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from the

belt as possible by pushing down

on the child restraint system while

feeding the shoulder belt back into

the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint

system to confirm that the seat

belt is holding it firmly in place. If it

is not, release the seat belt and

repeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is

in the “Automatic Locking” mode

by attempting to pull more of the

seat belt out of the retractor. If you

cannot, the retractor is in the

“Automatic Locking” mode.

If your CRS manufacturer instructs or

recommends you to use a tether

anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,

refer to the previous pages for more

information.

✽✽

NOTICE

When the seat belt is allowed to

retract to its fully stowed position, the

retractor will automatically switch

from the “Automatic Locking” mode

to the emergency lock mode for nor-

mal adult usage.

To remove the child restraint, press

the release button on the buckle and

then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of

the restraint and allow the seat belt

to retract fully.

OMD030055A

WARNING

If the retractor is not in the

“Automatic Locking” mode, the

child restraint can move when

your vehicle turns or stops sud-

denly. A child can be seriously

injured or killed if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

in the car, including manually

pulling the seat belt all the way

out to shift the rectractor to the

“Automatic Locking” mode.

Safety features of your vehicle

345

(1) Driver’s front air bag

(2) Passenger’s front air bag

(3) Side impact air bag

(4) Curtain air bag

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

OJK032032

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Safety features of your vehicle

463

This vehicle is equipped with an

Advanced Supplemental Air Bag

System for the driver’s seat and front

passenger’s seats.

The front air bags are designed to

supplement the three-point seat

belts. For these air bags to provide

protection, the seat belts must be

worn at all times when driving.

You can be severely injured or killed

in an accident if you are not wearing

a seat belt. Air bags are designed to

supplement seat belts, but do not

replace them. Also, air bags are not

designed to deploy in every collision.

In some accidents, the seat belts are

the only restraint protecting you.

WARNING

AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time,

everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in

a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt

when the air bag inflates.

NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front

passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant

or child causing serious or fatal injuries.

ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the

safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older

must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted

and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi-

tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-

fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked

and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during

an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the

occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.

You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.

Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still

maintaining control of the vehicle. NHTSA recommends that drivers

allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering

wheel and the chest.

Safety features of your vehicle

347

Where are the air bags?

Driver’s and passenger’s front air

bags

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Advanced Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts

at both the driver and passenger

seating positions.

The SRS consists of air bags which

are located in the center of the steer-

ing wheel and the passenger's side

front panel pad above the glove box.

The air bags are labeled with the let-

ters “AIR BAG” embossed on the pad

covers.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide

the vehicle's driver and front passen-

gers with additional protection than

that offered by the seat belt system

alone. The SRS uses sensors to

gather information about the driver's

seat position, the driver's and front

passenger's seat belt usage and

impact severity.

OMD030033

OMD030034A

■ Driver’s front air bag

■ Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

front air bags, take the following

precautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all

times to help keep occupants

positioned properly.

• Move your seat as far back as

possible from front air bags,

while still maintaining control

of the vehicle.

• Never lean against the door or

center console.

• Do not allow the front passen-

ger to place their feet or legs on

the dashboard.

• No objects should be placed

over or near the air bag mod-

ules on the steering wheel,

instrument panel, and the front

passenger's panel above the

glove box. Such objects could

cause harm if the vehicle is in a

crash severe enough to cause

the air bags to deploy.

Safety features of your vehicle

483

Side impact air bags

Your vehicle is equipped with a side

impact air bag in each seat. The pur-

pose of the air bag is to provide the

vehicle's driver and the front passen-

ger with additional protection than that

offered by the seat belt alone.

The side impact air bags are

designed to deploy only during certain

side impact collisions, depending on

the crash severity, angle, speed and

point of impact.

The side impact air bags are not

designed to deploy in all side impact.

OMD030035

OJK032063

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

side impact air bag, take the fol-

lowing precautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all

times to help keep occupants

positioned properly.

• Do not allow passengers to

lean their heads or bodies onto

doors, put their arms on the

doors, stretch their arms out of

the window, or place objects

between the doors and seats.

• Hold the steering wheel at the 9

o’clock and 3 o’clock positions,

to minimize the risk of injuries

to your hands and arms.

• Do not use any accessory

seat covers.This could reduce

or prevent the effectiveness

of the system.

• Do not place any objects over

the air bag or between the air

bag and yourself.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

349

Curtain air bags

Curtain air bags are located along

both sides of the roof rails above the

front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the

heads of the front seat occupants

and the rear outboard seat occupants

in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to

deploy only during certain side

impact collisions, depending on the

crash severity, angle, speed and

impact.

The curtain air bags are not designed

to deploy in all side impact.

(Continued)

• Do not place any objects

between the door and the

seat. They may become dan-

gerous projectiles if the side

impact air bag inflates.

• Do not install any accessories

on the side or near the side

impact air bags.

• Do not cause impact to the

doors when the ignition

switch is in the ON position or

this may cause the side air

bags to inflate.

• If the seat or seat cover is

damaged, have the vehicle

checked and repaired by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OMD030042

OJK032066

Safety features of your vehicle

503

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following

components:

1. Driver's front air bag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3. Side impact air bag modules

4. Curtain air bag modules

5. Retractor pre-tensioner assem-

blies

6. Air bag warning light

7. SRS control module (SRSCM)

8. Front impact sensors

9. Side impact sensors

10. PASS AIR BAG “OFF” indicator

(Front passenger’s seat only)

11. Occupant classification system

(Front passenger’s seat only)

12. Driver’s and front passenger’s

seat belt buckle sensors

13. Anchor pre-tensioner

14. Side pressure sensor

The SRSCM continually monitors all

SRS components while the ignition

switch is ON to determine if a crash

impact is severe enough to require

air bag deployment or pre-tensioner

seat belt deployment.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

curtain air bags, take the follow-

ing precautions:

• All seat occupants must wear

seat belts at all times to help

keep occupants positioned

properly.

• Properly secure child restraints

as far away from the door as

possible.

• Do not allow passengers to

lean their heads or bodies

onto doors, put their arms on

the doors, stretch their arms

out of the window, or place

objects between the doors

and seats.

• Do not open or repair the side

curtain air bags.

OMD030050N

Safety features of your vehicle

351

SRS warning light

The SRS (Supplement Restraint

System) air bag warning light on the

instrument panel displays the air bag

symbol depicted in the illustration.The

system checks the air bag electrical

system for malfunctions.The light indi-

cates that there is a potential problem

with your air bag system.

During a moderate to severe frontal

collision, sensors will detect the vehi-

cle’s rapid deceleration. If the rate of

deceleration is high enough, the con-

trol unit will inflate the front air bags.

The front air bags help protect the

driver and front passenger by

responding to frontal impacts in

which seat belts alone cannot provide

adequate restraint.

• Air bags are activated (able to

inflate if necessary) only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

• Air bags inflate in the event of a

severe frontal or side collision to

help protect the occupants from

serious physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which

the air bags will inflate. Generally,

air bags are designed to inflate

based upon the severity of a colli-

sion and its direction. These two

factors determine whether the sen-

sors produce an electronic deploy-

ment/inflation signal.

WARNING

If your SRS malfunctions, the

air bag may not inflate properly

during an accident increasing

the risk of serious injury or

death.

If any of the following condi-

tions occur, your SRS is mal-

functioning:

• The light does not turn on for

approximately six seconds

when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

• The light stays on after illumi-

nating for approximately six

seconds.

• The light comes on while the

vehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the

engine is running.

Have an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer inspect the SRS as soon

as possible if any of these con-

ditions occur.

Safety features of your vehicle

523

• Air bag deployment depends on a

number of factors including vehicle

speed, angles of impact and the

density and stiffness of the vehicles

or objects which your vehicle

impacts during a collision. The

determining factors are not limited

to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely

inflate and deflate in an instant. It is

virtually impossible for you to see

the air bags inflate during an acci-

dent. It is much more likely that you

will simply see the deflated air bags

hanging out of their storage com-

partments after the collision.

• To help provide protection, the air

bags must inflate rapidly. The

speed of air bag inflation is a con-

sequence of extremely short time

in which to inflate the air bag

between the occupant and the

vehicle structures before the occu-

pant impacts those structures.This

speed of inflation reduces the risk

of serious or life-threatening

injuries and is thus a necessary

part of air bag design.

However, the rapid air bag inflation

can also cause injuries which can

include facial abrasions, bruises

and broken bones because the

inflation speed also causes the air

bags to expand with a great deal of

force.

• There are even circumstances

under which contact with the air

bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-

cially if the occupant is positioned

excessively close to the air bag.

You can take steps to reduce the risk

of being injured by an inflating air

bag. The greatest risk is sitting too

close to the air bag. An air bag needs

about 10 inches (25 cm) of space to

inflate. NHTSA recommends that

drivers allow at least 10 inches

(25 cm) between the center of the

steering wheel and the chest.

Safety features of your vehicle

353

When the SRSCM detects a suffi-

ciently severe impact to the front of

the vehicle, it will automatically

deploy the front air bags.

Upon deployment, tear seams mold-

ed directly into the pad covers will

separate under pressure from the

expansion of the air bags. Further

opening of the covers allows full

inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combina-

tion with a properly worn seat belt,

slows the driver's or the passenger's

forward motion, reducing the risk of

head and chest injury.

OLMB033054

■ Driver’s front air bag (1)

OLMB033055

■ Driver’s front air bag (2)

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

air bag, take the following pre-

cautions:

• NEVER place a child restraint

in the front passenger seat.

Always properly restrain chil-

dren under age 13 in the rear

seats of the vehicle.

• Adjust the front passenger’s

and driver’s seats as far to the

rear as possible while allow-

ing you to maintain full con-

trol of the vehicle.

• Hold the steering wheel with

hands at the 9 o’clock and 3

o’clock positions.

• Never place anything or any-

one between the air bag and

the seat occupant.

• Do not allow the front passen-

ger to place their feet or legs

on the dashboard.

Safety features of your vehicle

543

After complete inflation, the air bag

immediately starts deflating, enabling

the driver to maintain forward visibili-

ty and the ability to steer or operate

other controls.

What to expect after an air bag

inflates

After a frontal or side air bag inflates,

it will deflate very quickly. Air bag

inflation will not prevent the driver

from seeing out of the windshield or

being able to steer. Curtain air bags

may remain partially inflated for

some time after they deploy.

OLMB033056

■ Driver’s front air bag (3)

OLMB033057

■ Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING

To prevent objects from becom-

ing dangerous projectiles when

the passenger's air bag inflates:

• Do not install or place any

objects (drink holder, CD

holder, stickers, etc.) on the

front passenger's panel above

the glove box where the pas-

senger's air bag is located.

• Do not install a container of

liquid air freshener near the

instrument cluster or on the

instrument panel surface.

WARNING

After an air bag inflates, take

the following precautions:

• Open your windows and

doors as soon as possible

after impact to reduce pro-

longed exposure to the smoke

and powder released by the

inflating air bag.

• Do not touch the air bag stor-

age area’s internal compo-

nents immediately after an air

bag has inflated. The parts

that come into contact with an

inflating air bag may be very

hot.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

355

Noise and smoke from inflating

air bag

When the air bags inflate, they make

a loud noise and they leave smoke

and powder in the air inside of the

vehicle.This is normal and is a result

of the ignition of the air bag inflator.

After the air bag inflates, you may

feel substantial discomfort in breath-

ing because of the contact of your

chest with both the seat belt and the

air bag, as well as from breathing the

smoke and powder. The powder may

aggravate asthma for some people. If

you experience breathing problems

after an air bag deployment, seek

medical attention immediately.

Though the smoke and powder are

nontoxic, they may cause irritation to

the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If

this is the case, wash and rinse with

cold water immediately and seek

medical attention if the symptoms

persist.

Occupant Classification

System (OCS)

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) in the front passenger's seat.

The OCS is designed to detect the

presence of a properly-seated front

passenger and determine if the pas-

senger's front air bag should be

enabled (may inflate) or not. The dri-

ver's front air bag is not affected or

controlled by the OCS.

OMD030047N

(Continued)

• Always wash exposed skin

areas thoroughly with luke-

warm water and mild soap.

• Always have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer replace the air

bag immediately after deploy-

ment. Air bags are designed to

be used only once.

Safety features of your vehicle

563

Main components of the

Occupant Classification System

• A detection device located within

the front passenger seat.

• Electronic system to determine

whether the passenger air bag

should be activated or deactivated.

• An indicator light located on the

instrument panel which illuminates

the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF" indicating the front passen-

ger air bag system is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag indi-

cator light is interconnected with

the OCS.

Front passenger seat adult occu-

pants who are properly seated and

wearing the seat belt properly,

should not cause the passenger air

bag to be automatically turned OFF.

However, if the occupant does not sit

in the seat properly (for example, by

not sitting upright, by sitting on the

edge of the seat, or by otherwise

being out of position), this could

cause the sensor to turn the air bag

OFF.

You will find the "PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator on the center

facia panel. This system detects the

conditions 1-4 in the following table

and activates or deactivates the front

passenger air bag based on these

conditions.

Always be sure that you and all vehi-

cle occupants are seated properly

and wearing the seat belt properly for

the most effective protection by the

air bag and the seat belt.

The OCS may not function properly if

the passenger takes actions which

can affect the classification system.

These include:

• Failing to sit in an upright position.

• Leaning against the door or center

console.

• Sitting towards the sides of the

front of the seat.

• Putting their legs on the dashboard

or resting them on other locations

which reduce the passenger

weight on the front seat.

• Wearing the seat belt improperly.

• Reclining the seatback.

Safety features of your vehicle

357

Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System

Condition detected by the

occupant classification system

Indicator/Warning light Devices

“PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF”

indicator light

SRS

warning light

Front passenger

air bag

1. Adult*

Off Off Activated

2. Infant*

or child restraint sys-

tem with 12 months old*

On Off Deactivated

3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated

4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated

The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front

passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her

physique and posture.

Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has out-

grown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize

him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.

Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

Safety features of your vehicle

583

WARNING

Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger's seat when it is unoccupied by a

passenger adversely affects the OCS. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

OVQ036013N

OVQ036014N

1KMN3663

1KMN3662

1KMN3664

• NEVER put a heavy load in

the front seat or seatback

pocket.

• NEVER place your feet on

the front passenger seat-

back.

• NEVER sit with your hips

shifted towards the front

of the seat.

• NEVER ride with the seat-

back reclined when the

vehicle is moving.

• NEVER place your feet or

legs on the dashboard.

• NEVER lean on the door or

center console or sit on

one side of the front pas-

senger seat.

1KMN3665

Safety features of your vehicle

359

Proper seated position for OCS

If the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”

indicator is on when an adult is seat-

ed in the front passenger seat, place

the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF

position and ask the passenger to sit

properly (sitting upright with the seat

back in an upright position, centered

on the seat cushion with their seat

belt on, legs comfortably extended

and their feet on the floor). Restart

the engine and have the person

remain in that position.This will allow

the system to detect the person and

to enable the passenger air bag. If

the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"

indicator is still on, ask the passen-

ger to move to the rear seat.

✽✽

NOTICE

The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"

indicator illuminates for approxi-

mately 4 seconds after the ignition

switch is in the ON position or after

the engine is started. If the front

passenger seat is occupied, the OCS

will then classify the front passenger

after several more seconds.

B990A01O

WARNING

Never allow an adult passenger

to ride in the front passenger

seat when the “PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF” indicator is illuminat-

ed. During a collision, the air bag

will not inflate if the indicator is

illuminated. Have your passen-

ger move to the rear seat.

Safety features of your vehicle

603

Do Not Install a Child Restraint in

the Front Passenger’s Seat

Even though your vehicle is equipped

with the OCS, never install a child

restraint in the front passenger’s seat.

An inflating air bag can forcefully

strike a child or restraint resulting in

serious or fatal injury.

Why Didn’t My Air Bag Go Off

in a Collision? (Air bags are

not designed to inflate in

every collision.)

There are certain types of accidents

in which the air bag would not be

expected to provide additional protec-

tion. These include rear impacts, sec-

ond or third collisions in multiple

impact accidents, as well as low

speed impacts.Damage to the vehicle

indicates a collision energy absorp-

tion, and is not an indicator of whether

or not an air bag should have inflated.

1JBH3051

WARNING

• NEVER place a rear-facing or

front-facing child restraint in

the front passenger’s seat of

the vehicle.

• An inflating frontal air bag

could forcefully strike a child

resulting in serious injury or

death.

• Always properly restrain chil-

dren in an appropriate child

restraint in the rear seat of the

vehicle.

Safety features of your vehicle

361

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module/Rollover sensor

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor

WARNING

To reduce the risk of an air bag

deploying unexpectedly and

causing serious injury or death:

•

Do not hit or allow any objects

to impact the locations where air

bags or sensors are installed.

• Do not perform maintenance

on or around the air bag sen-

sors. If the location or angle of

the sensors is altered, the air

bags may deploy when they

should not or may not deploy

when they should.

• Do not install bumper guards

or replace the bumper with a

non-genuine HYUNDAI parts.

This may adversely affect the

collision and air bag deploy-

ment performance.

• Have all repairs conducted by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OMD030036/OMD030037/OMD030038N/OMD030039

Safety features of your vehicle

623

Air bag deployment conditions

Front air bag

Front air bags are designed to inflate

in a frontal collision depending on

the intensity, speed, or angles of

impact of the front collision.

Side impact and curtain air bags

Side impact and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate when an impact is

detected by side collision sensors

depending on the strength, speed, or

angles of impact resulting from a

side impact collision.

Although the driver’s and front pas-

senger’s air bags are designed to

inflate only in frontal collisions, they

also may inflate in other types of col-

lisions if the front impact sensors

detect a sufficient impact. Side

impact and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate only in side

impact collisions, but they may inflate

in other collisions if the side impact

sensors detect a sufficient impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unimproved

roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive

carefully on unimproved roads or on

surfaces not designed for vehicle

traffic to prevent unintended air bag

deployment.

1JBA3513

1JBA3514

OJK032067

Safety features of your vehicle

363

Air bag non-deployment condi-

tions

In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags

are designed not to deploy in such

cases because they may not provide

benefits beyond the protection of the

seat belts.

Front air bags are not designed to

inflate in rear collisions, because

occupants are moved backward by

the force of the impact. In this case,

inflated air bags would not provide

any additional benefit.

Front air bags may not inflate in side

impact collisions, because occupants

move in the direction of the collision,

and thus in side impacts, front air bag

deployment would not provide addi-

tional occupant protection.

However, side impact and curtain air

bags may inflate depending on the

intensity, vehicle speed and angles

of impact.

1JBA3515

OBH038058 1JBA3516

Safety features of your vehicle

643

In an angled collision, the force of

impact may direct the occupants in a

direction where the air bags would

not be able to provide any additional

benefit, and thus the sensors may

not deploy any air bags.

Just before impact, drivers often

brake heavily. Such heavy braking

lowers the front portion of the vehicle

causing it to “ride” under a vehicle

with a higher ground clearance. Air

bags may not inflate in this "under-

ride" situation because deceleration

forces that are detected by sensors

may be significantly reduced by such

“underride” collisions.

Air bags do not inflate in rollover

accidents because vehicle can not

detect rollover accident.

However, side and curtain air bags

may inflate when the vehicle is rolled

over after a side impact collision.

OBH038060

1JBA3517 1JBA3522

Safety features of your vehicle

365

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle

collides with objects such as utility

poles or trees, where the point of

impact is concentrated and the colli-

sion energy is absorbed by the vehi-

cle structure.

SRS care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-

free and there are no parts you can

safely service by yourself. If the SRS

air bag warning light does not illumi-

nate when the ignition switch is in the

ON position, or continuously remains

on, have your vehicle immediately

inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such

as removing, installing, repairing, or

any work on the steering wheel, the

front passenger's panel, front seats

and roof rails must be performed by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Improper handling of the SRS system

may result in serious personal injury.

1JBA3518

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death, take the follow-

ing precautions:

• Do not attempt to modify or

disconnect the SRS compo-

nents or wiring, including the

addition of any kind of badges

to the pad covers or modifica-

tions to the body structure.

• Do not place objects over or

near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, or the front passen-

ger's panel above the glove

box.

• Clean the air bag pad covers

with a soft cloth moistened

with plain water. Solvents or

cleaners could adversely

affect the air bag covers and

proper deployment of the sys-

tem.

• Always have inflated air bags

replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

663

Additional safety precautions

Passengers should not move out of

or change seats while the vehicle is

moving. A passenger who is not

wearing a seat belt during a crash or

emergency stop can be thrown

against the inside of the vehicle,

against other occupants, or be ejected

from the vehicle.

Do not use any accessories on seat

belts. Devices claiming to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the

seat belt can reduce the protection

provided by the seat belt and increase

the chance of serious injury in a crash

Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could

interfere with the operation of the sup-

plemental restraint system sensing

components or side air bags.

Do not place items under the front

seats. Placing items under the front

seats could interfere with the opera-

tion of the supplemental restraint sys-

tem sensing components and wiring

harnesses.

Do not cause impact to the doors.

Impact to the doors when the ignition

switch is in the ON position may cause

the air bags to inflate.

Modifications to accommodate

disabilities. If you require modifica-

tion to your vehicle to accommodate

a disability, contact the HYUNDAI

Customer Connect Center at 1-877-

378-8727.

Adding equipment to or modifying

your air bag equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing

your vehicle's frame, bumper system,

front end or side sheet metal or ride

height, this may affect the operation of

your vehicle's air bag system.

(Continued)

• If components of the air bag

system must be discarded, or if

the vehicle must be scrapped,

certain safety precautions

must be observed. Consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for

the necessary information.

Failure to follow these precau-

tions could increase the risk of

personal injury.

Safety features of your vehicle

367

Air bag warning labels

Air bag warning labels, required by

the U.S. National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA), are

attached to alert the driver and pas-

sengers of potential risks of the air

bag system.

Be sure to read all of the information

about the air bags that are installed

on your vehicle in this Owners

Manual.

OMD030040

OMD030040L

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

Accessing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

• Remote key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

• Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

• Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

• Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

• Auto door lock/unlock features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

• Child-protector rear door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

• Opening the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

• Closing the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

• Emergency trunk safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

• Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

• Opening the fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

• Closing the fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

• Sunroof opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

• Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

• Tilt steering / Telescope steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

• Driver selectable steering mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

• Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

• Transaxle shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

• Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

• Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

• Exterior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

• Interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78

Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

• Windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

Windshield defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . . 4-105

• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105

• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110

• Sliding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111

• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111

• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112

Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

• Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113

• Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114

• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116

• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116

• Clothes hanger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117

• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118

• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119

Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120

• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120

• Steering wheel audio control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

• Aux, USB and iPod

port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

• How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122

• Caring for disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125

Features of your vehicle

Remote key

Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,

which you can use to lock or unlock

a door (and trunk).

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3. Trunk Unlock

4. Panic

Locking

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine hood and

trunk.

2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on

the remote key.

3. The hazard warning lights will

blink and the chime will sound

once if the lock button is pressed

once more within four seconds.

4. Make sure the doors are locked by

checking the position of the door

lock button inside the vehicle.

✽✽

NOTICE

After locking the doors, if you press

the Door Lock button again within

four seconds, the hazard warning

lights will blink and the horn will

sound one time to confirm that the

doors are locked.

ACCESSING YOUR VEHICLE

ONF048011

WARNING

Do not leave the keys in your

vehicle with unsupervised chil-

dren. Unattended children

could place the key in the igni-

tion switch and may operate

power windows or other con-

trols, or even make the vehicle

move, which could result in

serious injury or death.

Features of your vehicle

Unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Door Unlock button (2)

on the remote key.

2. The driver’s door will unlock. The

hazard warning lights will blink two

times.

If you press the Door Unlock button

again within four seconds, then all

the doors will unlock.

✽✽

NOTICE

After unlocking the doors, the doors

will lock automatically after 30 sec-

onds unless a door is opened.

Trunk unlocking

To unlock:

1. Press the Trunk Unlock button (3)

on the remote key for more than

one second.

2. The hazard warning lights will

blink two times. Once the trunk is

opened and then closed, the trunk

will lock automatically.

✽✽

NOTICE

• After unlocking the trunk, the

trunk will lock automatically.

• The word "HOLD" is written on

the button to inform you that you

must press and hold the button for

more than one second.

Panic button

Press the Panic button (4) for more

than one second. The horn sounds

and hazard warning lights flash for

about 30 seconds.

To cancel the panic mode, press any

button on the remote key.

Start-up

For detailed information refer to “Key

Ignition Switch” in chapter 5.

CAUTION

To prevent damaging the remote

key:

• Keep the remote key away

from water or any liquid. If the

remote key is inoperative due

to exposure to water or other

liquids, it will not be covered

by your manufacturer’s vehi-

cle warranty.

• Avoid dropping or throwing

the remote key.

• Protect the remote key from

extreme temperatures.

Features of your vehicle

Mechanical key

If the remote key does not operate

normally, you can lock or unlock the

door by using the mechanical key.

Remote key precautions

The remote key will not work if any of

the following occur:

• The key is in the ignition switch.

• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).

• The remote key battery is weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

• The remote key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station

or an airport which can interfere

with normal operation of the

remote key.

When the remote key does not work

correctly, open and close the door

with the mechanical key. If you have

a problem with the remote key con-

tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continue)

If the remote key is in close proximi-

ty to your mobile phone, the signal

could be blocked by your mobile

phones normal operational signals.

This is especially important when the

phone is active such as making and

receiving calls, text messaging,

and/or sending/receiving emails.

Avoid placing the remote key and

your mobile phone in the same pants

or jacket pocket and always try to

maintain an adequate distance

between the two devices.

OYDDCO2231/OYDECO2231

■ Type A ■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

This device complies with Part 15

of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired

operation.

✽✽

NOTICE

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the device.

Battery replacement

If the remote key is not working prop-

erly, try replacing the battery with a

new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and

gently pry open the cover.

2. Remove the old battery and insert

the new battery. Make sure the

battery position is correct.

3. Reinstall the rear cover of the

remote key.

If you suspect your remote key might

have sustained some damage, or

you feel your remote key is not work-

ing correctly contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to

the environment and human

health. Dispose the battery

according to your local

law(s) and regulation.

OLM049200

CAUTION

Keep the remote key away from

electromagnetic materials that

blocks electromagnetic waves

to the key surface.

Features of your vehicle

Smart key

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,

which you can use to lock or unlock

a door (and trunk) and even start the

engine.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3. Trunk Unlock

4. Panic

Locking

To lock :

1. Close all doors, engine hood and

trunk.

2. Either press the door handle but-

ton or press the Door Lock button

(1) on the smart key.

3. The hazard warning lights will blink

and the chime will sound one time.

4. Make sure the doors are locked by

checking the position of the door

lock button inside the vehicle.

✽✽

NOTICE

The door handle button will only

operate when the smart key is with-

in 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the out-

side door handle.

OMD044008

OMD044708

Features of your vehicle

Even though you press the outside

door handle button, the doors will not

lock and the chime will sound for

three seconds if any of the following

occur:

• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.

• The Engine Start/Stop button is in

ACC or ON position.

• Any door except the trunk is open.

Unlocking

To unlock:

1. Carry the Smart Key.

2. Either press the door handle but-

ton or press the Door Unlock but-

ton (2) on the smart key.

3. The driver’s door will unlock. The

hazard warning lights will blink

and the chime will sound two

times.

If you press the Door Unlock button

again within four seconds, then all

the doors will unlock.

✽✽

NOTICE

• The door handle button will only

operate when the smart key is

within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the

outside door handle. Other people

can also open the doors without the

smart key in possession.

• After unlocking the doors, the

doors will lock automatically after

30 seconds unless a door is opened.

OMD044008

■ Driver side

WARNING

Do not leave the Smart Key in

your vehicle with unsupervised

children. Unattended children

could press the Engine Start/

Stop button and may operate

power windows or other con-

trols, or even make the vehicle

move, which could result in

serious injury or death.

Features of your vehicle

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Either press the door handle but-

ton or press the Door Unlock but-

ton (2) on the smart key.

3. The doors will unlock. The hazard

warning lights will blink and the

chime will sound two times.

Trunk unlocking

To unlock:

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Either press the trunk handle but-

ton or press the Trunk Unlock but-

ton (3) on the smart key for more

than one second.

3. The hazard warning lights will

blink two times.

Once the trunk is opened and then

closed, the trunk will lock automati-

cally.

✽✽

NOTICE

After unlocking the trunk, the trunk

will lock automatically after 30 sec-

onds unless the trunk is opened.

Panic button

Press the Panic button (4) for more

than one second. The horn sounds

and hazard warning lights flash for

about 30 seconds.

To cancel the panic mode, press any

button on the smart key.

OMD044008/H

■ Passenger’s side

Features of your vehicle

104

Start-up

You can start the engine without

inserting the key. For detailed infor-

mation refer to the Engine Start/Stop

button in chapter 5.

Mechanical key

If the Smart Key does not operate

normally, you can lock or unlock the

door by using the mechanical key.

Press and hold the release button (1)

and remove the mechanical key (2).

Insert the mechanical key into the

key hole on the door.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put

the key into the hole and push it until

a click sound is heard.

Loss of a smart key

A maximum of two smart keys can be

registered to a single vehicle. If you

happen to lose your smart key, it is

recommanded that you should imme-

diately take the vehicle and remaining

key to your authorized HYUNDAI

dealer or tow the vehicle, if necessary.

OMD044710N

CAUTION

To prevent damaging the smart

key:

• Keep the smart key away from

water or any liquid. If the

smart key is inoperative due

to exposure to water or other

liquids, it will not be covered

by your manufacturer’s vehi-

cle warranty.

• Avoid dropping or throwing

the smart key.

• Protect the smart key from

extreme temperatures.

411

Features of your vehicle

Smart key precautions

The smart key will not work if any of

the following occur:

• The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station

or an airport which can interfere

with normal operation of the trans-

mitter.

• The smart key is near a mobile two

way radio system or a cellular

phone.

• Another vehicle’s smart key is being

operated close to your vehicle.

When the smart key does not work

correctly, open and close the door

with the mechanical key. If you have

a problem with the smart key, contact

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continue)

If the smart key is in close proximity

to your mobile phone, the signal

could be blocked by your mobile

phones normal operational signals.

This is especially important when the

phone is active such as making and

receiving calls, text messaging,

and/or sending/receiving emails.

Avoid placing the smart key and your

mobile phone in the same pants or

jacket pocket and always try to main-

tain an adequate distance between

the two devices.

This device complies with Part 15

of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired

operation.

✽✽

NOTICE

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the device.

CAUTION

Keep the smart key away from

electromagnetic materials that

blocks electromagnetic waves

to the key surface.

Features of your vehicle

124

Battery replacement

If the Smart Key is not working prop-

erly, try replacing the battery with a

new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Pry open the rear cover of the

smart key.

2. Remove the old battery and insert

the new battery. Make sure the

battery position is correct.

3. Reinstall the rear cover of the

smart key.

If you suspect your smart key might

have sustained some damage, or

you feel your smart key is not work-

ing correctly, contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to

the environment and human

health. Dispose the battery

according to your local

law(s) and regulation.

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system protects your

vehicle from theft. If an improperly

coded key (or other device) is used,

the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, the immobilizer sys-

tem indicator should come on briefly,

then go off. If the indicator starts to

blink, the system does not recognize

the coding of the key.

Place the ignition switch to the

LOCK/OFF position, then place the

ignition switch to the ON position

again.

The system may not recognize your

key’s coding if another immobilizer

key or other metal object (i.e., key

chain) is near the key. The engine

may not start because the metal may

interrupt the transponder signal from

transmitting normally.

If the system repeatedly does not

recognize the coding of the key, con-

tact your HYUNDAI dealer.

OLM043439

413

Features of your vehicle

Do not attempt to alter this system or

add other devices to it. Electrical

problems could result that may make

your vehicle inoperable.

This device complies with Part 15

of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired

operation.

✽✽

NOTICE

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the device.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your

vehicle, do not leave spare keys

anywhere in your vehicle. Your

immobilizer password is a cus-

tomer unique password and

should be kept confidential.

CAUTION

The transponder in your key is

an important part of the immobi-

lizer system. It is designed to

give years of trouble-free serv-

ice, however you should avoid

exposure to moisture, static

electricity and rough handling.

Immobilizer system malfunction

could occur.

Features of your vehicle

144

Operating door locks from

outside the vehicle

Mechanical key

Turn the key toward the rear of the

vehicle to unlock and toward the front

of the vehicle to lock.

If you lock the door with a key, all

vehicle doors will lock automatically.

(if equipped with the central door

lock system)

From the driver’s door, turn the key to

the right once to unlock the driver’s

door and once more within 4 seconds

to unlock all doors. (if equipped with

the central door lock system)

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the

door by hand. Make sure that doors

are closed securely.

Remote key

To lock the doors, press the Door

Lock button (1) on the remote key.

Press the Door Unlock button (2) on

the remote key, the driver’s door will

unlock. If you press the Door Unlock

button on the remote key again with-

in four seconds, then all the doors

will unlock.

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the

door by hand. Make sure that doors

are closed securely.

DOOR LOCKS

OMD044711N

OMD044010N

Lock

Unlock

■ Type A ■ Type B

415

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not

work properly due to freezing con-

ditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked

multiple times in rapid succession

with either the vehicle key or door

lock switch, the system may stop

operating temporarily in order to

protect the circuit and prevent

damage to system components.

Smart key

To lock the doors, press the button on

the outside door handle while carry-

ing the smart key with you or press

the door lock button on the smart key.

Press the button on the outside door

handle while carrying the smart key

with you or press the door unlock

button on the smart key, the driver’s

door will unlock. If you press the

Door Unlock button on the smart key

again within four seconds, then all

the doors will unlock.

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the

door by hand. Make sure that doors

are closed securely.

✽✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not

work properly due to freezing con-

ditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked

multiple times in rapid succession

with either the vehicle key or door

lock switch, the system may stop

operating temporarily in order to

protect the circuit and prevent

damage to system components.

OMD044709

Lock / Unlock

OMD040008

Features of your vehicle

164

Operating door locks from

inside the vehicle

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the door

lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-

tion. The red mark (2) on the door

lock button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the “Lock” position. If

the door is locked properly, the red

mark (2) on the door lock button

will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door han-

dle (3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the dri-

ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is

pulled when the door lock button is

in the lock position, the button is

unlocked and door opens.

• Front doors cannot be locked if the

key is in the ignition switch and any

front door is open.

• Doors cannot be locked if the

smart key is in the vehicle and any

door is open.

✽✽

NOTICE

If a power door lock ever fails to

function while you are in the vehicle

try one or more of the following

techniques to exit:

Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic and

manual) while simultaneously

pulling on the door handle.

Operate the other door locks and

handles, front and rear.

Lower a front window and use the

mechanical key to unlock the door

from outside.

OMD040011

Lock

Unlock

417

Features of your vehicle

With the central door lock switch

(if equipped)

When pressing the ( ) portion (1) of

the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

•

If the key is in the ignition switch

and any door is opened, the doors

will not lock even though the lock

button (1) of the central door lock

switch is pressed.

•

If the smart key is in the vehicle and

any door is opened, the doors will

not lock even though the lock button

(1) of the central door lock switch is

pressed.

When pressing the ( ) portion (2) of

the switch, all vehicle doors will

unlock.

WARNING

The doors should always be

fully closed and locked while

the vehicle is in motion. If the

doors are unlocked, the risk of

being thrown from the vehicle in

a crash is increased.

WARNING

Do not leave children or animals

unattended in your vehicle. An

enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death or

serious injury to unattended

children or animals who cannot

escape the vehicle. Children

might operate features of the

vehicle that could injure them,

or they could encounter other

harm, possibly from someone

gaining entry to the vehicle.

■ Driver’s door

OMD040192N

■ Passenger’s door

OMD040012A

Features of your vehicle

184

Auto door lock/unlock features

Impact sensing door unlock sys-

tem (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically

unlocked when an impact causes the

air bags to deploy.

Speed sensing door lock system

(if equipped)

All doors will be automatically locked

when vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph

(15 km/h).

WARNING - Always

secure your vehicle

Leaving your vehicle unlocked

increases the potential risk to

you or others from someone

hiding in your vehicle.

To secure your vehicle, while

depressing the brake, move the

shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion (for automatic transaxle) or

first gear or R (Reverse, for

manual transaxle), engage the

parking brake, and place the

ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF

position, close all windows,

lock all doors, and always take

the key with you.

WARNING

Opening a door when something

is approaching may cause dam-

age or injury. Be careful when

opening doors and watch for

vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles

or pedestrians approaching the

vehicle in the path of the door.

419

Features of your vehicle

Child-safety rear door locks

The child safety lock is provided to

help prevent children seated in the

rear from accidentally opening the

rear doors.The rear door safety locks

should be used whenever children

are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock is located on

the edge of each rear door.When the

child safety lock is in the lock position

( ), the rear door will not open if

the inner door handle is pulled.

To utilize the child safety lock, insert a

key (or screwdriver) into the hole (1)

and turn it to the lock ( ) position.

To allow a rear door to be opened

from inside the vehicle, unlock the

child safety lock.

WARNING

If children accidently open the

rear doors while the vehicle is in

motion, they could fall out of the

vehicle.The rear door safety locks

should always be used whenever

children are in the vehicle.

OMD044007

Features of your vehicle

204

This system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables. The horn will

sound and the hazard warning lights

will blink continuously if any of the

following occurs:

- A door is opened without using the

remote key or smart key.

- The trunk is opened without using

the remote key or smart key.

- The engine hood is opened.

The alarm continues for 30 seconds,

then the system resets. To turn off

the alarm, unlock the doors with the

remote key or smart key.

The Theft Alarm System automati-

cally sets 30 seconds after you lock

the doors and the trunk. For the sys-

tem to activate, you must lock the

doors and the trunk from outside the

vehicle with the remote key or smart

key or by pressing the button on the

outside of the door handles with the

smart key in your possession.

The hazard warning lights will blink

and the chime will sound once to

indicate the system is armed.

Once the security system is set, open-

ing any door, the trunk, or the hood

without using the remote key or smart

key will cause the alarm to activate.

The Theft Alarm System will not set if

the hood, the trunk, or any door is

not fully closed. If the system will not

set, check the hood, the trunk, or the

doors are fully closed.

Do not attempt to alter this system or

add other devices to it.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Do not lock the doors until all pas-

sengers have left the vehicle. If the

remaining passenger leaves the

vehicle when the system is armed,

the alarm will be activated.

• If the vehicle is not disarmed with

the remote key or smart key, open

the doors by using the mechanical

key and place the ignition switch in

the ON position (for remote key)

or start the engine (for smart key)

by directly pressing the Engine

Start/Stop button with the smart

key.

• When the system is disarmed but a

door or trunk is not opened within

30 seconds, the system will be

rearmed.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

421

Features of your vehicle

Opening the trunk

1. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park, for automatic transaxle) or first

gear or R (Reverse, for manual

transaxle) and set the parking brake.

2. Perform one of the following:

- Press the remote key or smart

key Trunk Unlock button for more

than one second.

- Press the button on the trunk

itself with the smart key in your

possession.

- Press the button on the trunk

itself when all doors are unlocked.

- Use the mechanical key.

- Use the trunk release lever.

Closing the trunk

Lower the trunk lid and press down

until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid

is securely fastened, always check

by trying to pull it up again.

✽✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, trunk locks

and trunk mechanisms may not

work properly due to freezing condi-

tions.

TRUNK

OMD040013A

■ Outside

WARNING

Make sure there are no people

or objects around the trunk

before opening or closing the

trunk.

OMD040014

■ Inside

Features of your vehicle

224

Emergency trunk safety

release

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Emergency Trunk Safety Release

lever located inside the trunk. When

someone is inadvertently locked in

the trunk, the trunk can be opened by

moving the lever in the direction of the

arrow and pushing the trunk open.

CAUTION

Make certain that you close the

trunk before driving your vehi-

cle. Possible damage may occur

to the trunk lift cylinders and

attached hardware if the trunk is

not closed prior to driving.

WARNING

The trunk lid should be always

kept completely closed while

the vehicle is in motion. If it is

left open or ajar, poisonous

exhaust gases may enter the

vehicle and serious illness or

death may result.

OMD040015

423

Features of your vehicle

WARNING

• You and your passengers

must be aware of the location

of the Emergency Trunk

Safety Release lever in this

vehicle and how to open the

trunk in case you are acciden-

tally locked in the trunk.

• NEVER allow anyone to occu-

py the trunk of the vehicle at

any time. If the trunk is partial-

ly or totally latched and the per-

son is unable to get out, seri-

ous injury or death could occur

due to lack of ventilation,

exhaust fumes and rapid heat

build-up, or because of expo-

sure to cold weather condi-

tions.The trunk is also a highly

dangerous location in the

event of a crash because it is

not a protected occupant

space but is a part of the vehi-

cle’s crush zone.

(Continued)

• Your vehicle should be kept

locked and the key should be

kept out of the reach of chil-

dren. Parents should teach

their children about the dan-

gers of playing in the trunk.

• Use the release lever for

emergencies only.

Features of your vehicle

244

Power windows

(1) Driver’s door power window

switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power

window switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window

switch

(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window*

(7) Power window lock switch

* : if equipped

WINDOWS

OMD040016N

425

Features of your vehicle

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to be able to raise or lower

the windows. Each door has a Power

Window switch to control that door's

window. The driver has a Power

Window Lock switch which can block

the operation of passenger windows.

The power windows will operate for

approximately 30 seconds after the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC

or LOCK/OFF position. However, if

the front doors are opened, the

Power Windows cannot be operated

even within the 30 second period.

✽✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, power

windows may not work properly

due to freezing conditions.

• While driving with the rear win-

dows down or with the sunroof (if

equipped) opened (or partially

opened), your vehicle may demon-

strate a wind buffeting or pulsation

noise. This noise is normal and can

be reduced or eliminated by taking

the following actions. If the noise

occurs with one or both of the rear

windows down, partially lower

both front windows approximately

one inch. If you experience the

noise with the sunroof open, slight-

ly close the sunroof.

Window opening and closing

To open or close a window, press

down or pull up the front portion of

the corresponding switch to the first

detent position (5).

OMD040017

Features of your vehicle

264

Auto down window (if equipped)

Pressing the power window switch

momentarily to the second detent

position (6) completely lowers the

window even when the switch is

released. To stop the window at the

desired position while the window is

in operation, pull up or press down

and release the switch.

Auto up/down window (if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power win-

dow switch momentarily to the sec-

ond detent position (6) completely

lowers or lifts the window even when

the switch is released. To stop the

window at the desired position while

the window is in operation, pull up or

press down and release the switch.

To reset the power windows

If the power windows do not operate

normally, the automatic power win-

dow system must be reset as follows:

1. Place the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Close the window and continue

pulling up on the power window

switch for at least one second.

If the power windows do not operate

properly after resetting, have the

system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

OMD040019 OMD040018

427

Features of your vehicle

Automatic reversal (if equipped)

If a window senses any obstacle while

it is closing automatically, it will stop

and lower approximately 12 inches

(30 cm) to allow the object to be

cleared.

If the window detects the resistance

while the power window switch is

pulled up continuously, the window will

stop upward movement then lower

approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).

If the power window switch is pulled

up continuously again within 5 sec-

onds after the window is lowered by

the automatic window reversal fea-

ture, the automatic window reversal

will not operate.

✽✽

NOTICE

The automatic reverse feature is

only active when the “auto up” fea-

ture is used by fully pulling up the

switch to the second detent.

Power window lock switch

The driver can disable the power

window switches on the passengers’

doors by pressing the power window

lock switch.

• The driver’s control can operate

the driver’s power window.

• The front passenger’s control can-

not operate the front passenger’s

power window.

• The rear passenger’s control can-

not operate the rear passenger’s

power window.

OMD040020N

WARNING

• Make sure body parts or other

objects are safely out of the

way before closing the win-

dows to avoid injuries or vehi-

cle damage.

• Objects less than 0.16 inch

(4 mm) in diameter caught

between the window glass

and the upper window chan-

nel may not be detected by

the automatic reverse window

and the window will not stop

and reverse direction.

OUN026013

Features of your vehicle

284

WARNING - Windows

• NEVER leave the keys in your

vehicle with unsupervised

children, when the engine is

running.

• NEVER leave any child unat-

tended in the vehicle. Even

very young children may inad-

vertently cause the vehicle to

move, entangle themselves in

the windows, or otherwise

injure themselves or others.

• Always double check to make

sure all arms, hands, head

and other obstructions are

safely out of the way before

closing a window.

• Do not allow children to play

with the power windows. Keep

the driver’s door power window

lock switch in the LOCK posi-

tion (pressed). Serious injury

can result from unintentional

window operation by the child.

• Do not extend your head,

arms or body outside the win-

dows while driving.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage

to the power window system,

do not open or close two win-

dows or more at the same

time. This will also ensure the

longevity of the fuse.

• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver's door

and the individual door win-

dow switch in opposite direc-

tions at the same time. If this is

done, the window will stop and

cannot be opened or closed.

429

Features of your vehicle

Opening the hood

1. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park, for automatic transaxle) or

first gear or R (Reverse, for manual

transaxle) and set the parking

brake.

2. Pull the release lever to unlatch

the hood. The hood should pop

open slightly.

3. Raise the hood slightly, pull the

secondary latch up (1) inside of

the hood center until it releases

the hood and lift the hood (2).

4. Pull out the support rod (3).

5. Hold the hood opened with the

support rod (4).

HOOD

OMD040021

OMD041204L

OMD040023

OMD044022

Features of your vehicle

304

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the

following:

• All filler caps in engine compart-

ment must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removed

from the engine compartment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip to

prevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the hood halfway and push

down to securely lock in place.

Then double check to be sure the

hood is secure.

WARNING

• Before closing the hood,

ensure that all obstructions

are removed from the hood

opening.

• Always double check to be

sure that the hood is firmly

latched before driving away. If

it is not latched, the hood

could open while the vehicle

is being driven, causing a

total loss of visibility, which

might result in an accident.

• Do not move the vehicle with

the hood in the raised posi-

tion, as vision is obstructed,

which might result in an acci-

dent, and the hood could fall

or be damaged.

WARNING - Support rod

• Grasp the support rod in the

area wrapped in rubber. The

rubber will help prevent you

from being burned by hot

metal when the engine is hot.

• The support rod must be

inserted completely into the

hole provided whenever you

inspect the engine compart-

ment. This will prevent the

hood from falling and possi-

bly injuring you.

431

Features of your vehicle

Opening the fuel filler door

The fuel filler door must be opened

from inside the vehicle by pulling up

the fuel filler door opener.

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Pull the fuel filler door opener up

located on the floor, left side of the

driver’s seat.

3. Pull the fuel filler door out (1) to

fully open.

4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),

turn it counterclockwise. You may

hear a hissing noise as the pres-

sure inside the tank equalizes.

5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.

✽✽

NOTICE

If the fuel filler door does not open

because ice has formed around it,

tap lightly or push on the door to

break the ice and release the door.

Do not pry on the door. If necessary,

spray around the door with an

approved de-icer fluid (do not use

radiator anti-freeze) or move the

vehicle to a warm place and allow

the ice to melt.

Closing the fuel filler door

1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it

clockwise until it “clicks” one time.

2. Close the fuel filler door until it is

latched securely.

FUEL FILLER DOOR

OMD044025

OMD040024

Features of your vehicle

324

(Continued)

• Do not use cellular phones

while refueling. Electric cur-

rent and/or electronic interfer-

ence from cellular phones can

potentially ignite fuel vapors

and cause a fire.

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuel-

ing. You can generate a build-

up of static electricity by touch-

ing, rubbing or sliding against

any item or fabric capable of

producing static electricity.

Static electricity discharge can

ignite fuel vapors causing a

fire. If you must re-enter the

vehicle, you should once again

eliminate potentially danger-

ous static electricity discharge

by touching a metal part of the

vehicle, away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle or other gasoline

source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

WARNING

Gasoline is highly flammable

and explosive. Failure to follow

these guidelines may result in

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station.

• Before refueling, note the

location of the Emergency

Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,

at the gas station.

• Before touching the fuel noz-

zle, you should eliminate the

potential build-up of static

electricity by touching a metal

part of the vehicle, a safe dis-

tance away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle, or other gas

source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be

sure to place the container on

the ground prior to refueling.

Static electricity discharge

from the container can ignite

fuel vapors causing a fire.

Once refueling has begun,

contact between your bare

hand and the vehicle should

be maintained until the filling

is complete.

• Use only approved portable

plastic fuel containers designed

to carry and store gasoline.

(Continued)

433

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

• Make sure to refuel your

vehicle according to the "Fuel

Requirements" suggested in chap-

ter 1.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of

fuel spilled on painted surfaces

may damage the paint.

(Continued)

• When refueling, always move

the shift lever to the P (Park)

position (for automatic

transaxle) or first gear or R

(Reverse, for manual transaxle),

set the parking brake, and place

the ignition switch to the

LOCK/OFF position. Sparks

produced by electrical compo-

nents related to the engine can

ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

• Do not use matches or a

lighter and do not smoke or

leave a lit cigarette in your

vehicle while at a gas station,

especially during refueling.

• Do not over-fill or top-off your

vehicle tank, which can cause

gasoline spillage.

(Continued)

• If a fire breaks out during refu-

eling, leave the vicinity of the

vehicle, and immediately con-

tact the manager of the gas

station and then contact the

local fire department. Follow

any safety instructions they

provide.

• If pressurized fuel sprays out,

it can cover your clothes or

skin and thus subject you to

the risk of fire and burns.

Always remove the fuel cap

carefully and slowly. If the cap

is venting fuel or if you hear a

hissing sound, wait until the

condition stops before com-

pletely removing the cap.

• Always check that the fuel cap

is installed securely to pre-

vent fuel spillage in the event

of an accident.

CAUTION

If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuine

HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent

specified for your vehicle. An

incorrect fuel filler cap can

result in a serious malfunction

of the fuel system or emission

control system.

Features of your vehicle

344

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position before you can open or

close the sunroof.

Sunroof opening and closing

To open:

Press the sunroof control lever back-

ward to the first detent position.

Release the switch when you want

the sunroof to stop.

To close:

Press the sunroof control lever back-

ward to the first detent position.

Release the switch when you want

the sunroof to stop.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

OMDC043026

OMDC043027

WARNING

Make sure heads, other body

parts or other objects are safely

out of the way before closing

the windows to avoid injuries or

vehicle damage.

Objects less than 0.16inch (4mm)

in diameter caught between the

sunroof glass and the front win-

dow channel may not be detect-

ed by the automatic reverse win-

dow and the window will not stop

and reverse direction.

435

Features of your vehicle

Sliding the sunroof

Pressing the sunroof control lever

backward or forward momentarily to

the second detent position complete-

ly opens or closes the sunroof even

when the switch is released. To stop

the sunroof at the desired position

while the sunroof is in operation,

press the sunroof control lever back-

ward or forward and release the

switch.

✽✽

NOTICE

To reduce wind noise while driving, it

is recommended that you drive with

the sunroof slightly closed (stop the

sunroof about 2 inches (5 cm) before

the maximum slide open position).

Automatic reversal

If the sunroof senses any obstacle

while it is closing automatically, it will

reverse direction then stop to allow

the object to be cleared.

Tilting the sunroof

Tilt the sunroof open:

Push the sunroof control lever

upward until the sunroof moves to

the desired position.

To close the sunroof:

Pull the sunroof lever downward until

the sunroof moves to the desired

position.

OMDC043028OBK049018

Features of your vehicle

364

✽✽

NOTICE

After washing the vehicle or after a

rain, be sure to wipe off the water on

the sunroof before operating the

sunroof.

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automatical-

ly with the sunroof when the glass

panel moves. If you want it closed,

move the sunshade manually.

CAUTION

The sunroof is made to slide

together with the sunshade. Do

not leave the sunshade closed

while the sunroof is open.

OBK049019

CAUTION

• Periodically remove any dirt

that may accumulate on the

sunroof guide rail or between

the sunroof and roof panel,

which can make a noise.

• Do not try to open the sunroof

when the temperature is below

freezing or when the sunroof is

covered with snow or ice, the

motor could be damaged.

• To prevent damage to the sun-

roof and the motor, do not

continue to press the sunroof

control lever after the sunroof

is in the fully open, closed or

tilt position(s).

WARNING

• Make sure heads, other body

parts or other objects are

safely out of the way before

closing the sunroof to avoid

injuries or vehicle damage.

• Never adjust the sunroof or

sunshade while driving. This

may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

• To avoid serious injury or

death, do not extend your

head, arms or body outside

the sunroof while driving.

437

Features of your vehicle

To reset the sunroof

Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the

followings)

- Battery is discharged or discon-

nected or the related fuse has been

replaced or disconnected

- The one-touch sliding function of

the sunroof does not normally oper-

ate

1. The ignition switch must be in the

ON position.

2. Close the sunroof completely.

3. Release the control lever.

4. Push the control lever forward until

the sunroof tilts and slightly moves

up and down. Then, release the

lever.

5. Push the control lever forward until

the sunroof is operated as follows:

TILT OPEN → SLIDE OPEN →

SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the control lever.

If the sunroof does not operate prop-

erly after resetting, have the system

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Features of your vehicle

384

Electric power steering (EPS)

The system assists you with steering

the vehicle. If the engine is off or if

the power steering system becomes

inoperative, the vehicle may still be

steered, but it will require increased

steering effort.

Also, the steering effort becomes

heavier as the vehicle’s speed

increases and becomes lighter as

the vehicle’s speed decreases for

better control of the steering wheel.

Should you notice any change in the

effort required to steer during normal

vehicle operation, we recommend

that the system be checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

The following symptoms may occur

during normal vehicle operation:

• The steering effort may be high

immediately after placing the igni-

tion switch in the ON position.

This happens as the system per-

forms the EPS system diagnostics.

When the diagnostics is complet-

ed, the steering wheel will return

to its normal condition.

• A click noise may be heard from

the EPS relay after the ignition

switch is placed to the ON or

LOCK/OFF position.

• A motor noise may be heard when

the vehicle is at stop or at a low

driving speed.

• When you operate the steering

wheel in low temperature, abnor-

mal noise may occur. If tempera-

ture rises, the noise will disappear.

This is a normal condition.

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION

If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate nor-

mally, the warning light ( ) will

illuminate on the instrument

cluster. The steering wheel may

become difficult to control or

operate. Take your vehicle to an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

have the system checked as

soon as possible.

439

Features of your vehicle

Tilt steering / Telescope steering

Pull down the lock-release lever (1) on

the steering wheel column and adjust

the steering wheel angle (2) and posi-

tion (3, if equipped). Move the steer-

ing wheel, so it points toward your

chest, not toward your face. Make

sure you can see the instrument

panel warning lights and gauges.

After adjusting, pull up the lock-

release lever (1) to lock the steering

wheel in place. Push the steering

wheel both up and down to be cer-

tain it is locked in position. Always

adjust the position of the steering

wheel before driving.

Driver selectable steering

mode (if equipped)

The Driver Selectable Steering Mode

controls steering effort as driver's

preference or road condition.You can

select the desired steering mode by

pressing the steering mode button.

The driver selectable steering mode

stays in the last mode selected when

turning the engine on.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel

while driving. This may cause

loss of vehicle control resulting

in an accident.

OMD040029

OMD044608

Features of your vehicle

404

When the steering mode button is

pressed, the selected steering mode

will appear on the cluster.

If the steering mode button is pressed

within 4 seconds, the steering mode

will change as above pictures.

If the steering wheel mode button is

not pressed for about 4 seconds, the

cluster will change to the previous

screen.

NORMAL mode

The NORMAL mode offers medium

steering effort.

SPORT mode

The steering effort becomes heavier.

OMD044723

OMD044721

OMD044722

441

Features of your vehicle

COMFORT mode

The steering effort comes lighter in

COMFORT mode.

✽✽

NOTICE

For your safety, if you press the

steering mode button to change the

mode while turning the steering

wheel, the cluster will change as you

have selected, but the steering effort

will not change. The steering effort

will change to the selected mode,

when the steering wheel is posi-

tioned to the center.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the area

indicated by the horn symbol on your

steering wheel (see illustration). The

horn will operate only when this area

is pressed.

OMD044720

CAUTION

• Be careful when changing the

steering mode while driving.

• When the Electric Power

Steering is not working prop-

erly, the Driver Selectable

Steering Mode will not work.

OMD040030

CAUTION

Do not strike the horn severely

to operate it, or hit it with your

fist. Do not press on the horn

with a sharp-pointed object.

Features of your vehicle

424

Inside rearview mirror

Before you start driving, adjust the

rearview mirror to the center on the

view through the rear window.

Day/night rearview mirror

(if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you

start driving and while the day/night

lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to

reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicles behind you during night

driving.

Remember that you lose some

rearview clarity in the night position.

Blue Link

center (if equipped)

For details, refer to the Blue Link

Owner’s Guide, Navigation Manual

or Audio Manual. The Audio Manual

is in this chapter.

MIRRORS

WARNING

Make sure your line of sight is not

obstructed. Do not place objects

in the rear seat, cargo area, or

behind the rear headrests which

could interfere with your vision

through the rear window.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury during

an accident or deployment of

the air bag, do not modify the

rearview mirror and do not

install a wide mirror.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the mirror while

driving. This may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident.

OMD040031

Day

Night

OMD044712N

443

Features of your vehicle

Electric chromic mirror (ECM)

with compass and HomeLink

system (if equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror

and an Integrated HomeLink

Wireless Control System.

During nighttime driving, this feature

will automatically detect and reduce

rearview mirror glare.The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver allows you to

activate your garage door(s), electric

gate, home lighting, etc.

(1) Channel 1 button

(2) Channel 2 button

(3) Status indicator LED

(4) Channel 3 button

(5) Rear light sensor

(6) Dimming ON button

(7) Dimming OFF button

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision

Safety™ (NVS

) Mirror (if equipped)

For more information regarding

NVS

mirrors and other applications,

please refer to the Gentex website:

www.gentex.com

OMD044713N

CAUTION

The NVS

Mirror automatically

reduces glare by monitoring

light levels in the front and the

rear of the vehicle. Any object

that obstructs either light sen-

sor will degrade the automatic

dimming control feature.

Features of your vehicle

444

The auto-dimming function can be

controlled by pressing the ON/OFF

button:

1. Pressing the OFF button (7) turns

the auto-dimming function off

which is indicated by the green

Status Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the ON button (6) again

turns the auto-dimming function

on which is indicated by the green

Status Indicator LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the ON posi-

tion each time the vehicle is started.

Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System

The HomeLink

Wireless Control

System can replace up to three

hand-held radio-frequency (RF)

transmitters with a single built-in

device. This innovative feature will

learn the radio frequency codes of

most current transmitters to operate

devices such as gate operators,

garage door openers, entry door

locks, security systems, even home

lighting. Both standard and rolling

code-equipped transmitters can be

programmed by following the out-

lined procedures.

Additional HomeLink

information

can be found at: www.homelink.com

or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the

RF device you are programming for

use in other vehicles as well as for

future HomeLink

programming. It is

also suggested that upon the sale of

the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink

buttons be erased for

security purposes.

WARNING

Before programming

HomeLink

to a garage door

opener or gate operator, make

sure people and objects are out

of the way of the device to pre-

vent potential harm or damage.

Do not use the HomeLink

with

any garage door opener that

lacks the safety stop and

reverse features required by

U.S. federal safety standards

(this includes any garage door

opener model manufactured

before April 1, 1982). A garage

door that cannot detect an

object - signaling the door to

stop and reverse - does not

meet current U.S. federal safety

standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features

increases the risk of serious

injury or death.

445

Features of your vehicle

Programming HomeLink

Please note the following:

• When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park the

vehicle outside of the garage.

• It is recommended that a new bat-

tery be placed in the hand-held

transmitter of the device being pro-

grammed to HomeLink

for quicker

training and accurate transmission

of the radio-frequency signal.

• Some vehicles may require the

ignition switch to be placed in the

ACC (or "Accessories") position for

programming and/or operation of

HomeLink

• In the event that there are still pro-

gramming difficulties or questions

after following the programming

steps listed below, contact

HomeLink

at: www.homelink.com

or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Rolling code programming

Rolling code devices which are

"code-protected" and manufactured

after 1996 may be determined by the

following:

• Reference the device owner's

manual for verification.

• The handheld transmitter appears

to program the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver but does not

activate the device.

• Press and hold the trained

HomeLink button. The device has

the rolling code feature if the indi-

cator light flashes rapidly and then

turns solid after 2 seconds.

To train rolling code devices, follow

these instructions:

1. At the garage door opener receiv-

er (motor-head unit) in the garage,

locate the "learn" or "smart" but-

ton. This can usually be found

where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the motor-head unit.

Exact location and color of the but-

ton may vary by garage door

opener brand. If there is difficulty

locating the training button, refer-

ence the device owner's manual or

please visit our Web site at

www.homelink.com.

2. Firmly press and release the

"learn" or "smart" button (which

activates the "training light"). You

will have 30 seconds to initiate

step 3.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly

press, hold for two seconds and

then release the desired

HomeLink

button. Repeat the

"press/hold/release" sequence a

second time to complete the pro-

gramming. (Some devices may

require you to repeat this

sequence a third time to complete

the programming.)

Features of your vehicle

464

4. Press and hold the just-trained

HomeLink

button and observe

the red Status Indicator LED. If the

indicator light stays on constantly,

programming is complete and

your device should activate.

5. To program the remaining two

HomeLink

buttons, follow either

steps 1 through 4 above for other

Rolling Code devices or steps 2

through 5 in Standard Programming

for standard devices.

Standard programming

To train most devices, follow these

instructions:

1. For first-time programming, press

and hold the two outside buttons,

HomeLink

Channel 1 and

Channel 3 Buttons, until the indi-

cator light begins to flash (after 20

seconds). Release both buttons.

Do not hold the buttons for longer

than 30 seconds.

2. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)

away from the HomeLink

buttons

while keeping the indicator light in

view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold

both the HomeLink

and hand-

held transmitter button. DO NOT

release the buttons until step 4

has been completed.

4. While continuing to hold the but-

tons the red Indicator Status LED

will flash slowly and then rapidly

after HomeLink

successfully

trains to the frequency signal from

the hand-held transmitter. Release

both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trained

HomeLink

button and observe

the red Status Indicator LED. If the

indicator light stays on constantly,

programming is complete and

your device should activate when

the HomeLink

button is pressed

and released.

6.To program the remaining two

HomeLink

buttons, follow steps 2

through 5.

447

Features of your vehicle

Gate operator & Canadian program-

ming

During programming, your handheld

transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press the

Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System button (note

steps 2 through 4 in the Standard

Programming portion of this docu-

ment) while you press and re-press

("cycle") your handheld transmitter

every two seconds until the frequen-

cy signal has been learned. The indi-

cator light will flash slowly and then

rapidly after several seconds upon

successful training.

Operating HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release

the programmed HomeLink

button.

Activation will now occur for the

trained device (i.e. garage door

opener, gate operator, security sys-

tem, entry door lock, home/office

lighting, etc.). For convenience, the

hand-held transmitter of the device

may also be used at any time.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink

button

To program a new device to a previ-

ously trained HomeLink

button, fol-

low these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink

button. Do NOT

release until step 4 has been com-

pleted.

2. When the indicator light begins to

flash slowly (after 20 seconds),

position the handheld transmitter 1

to 3 inches away from the

HomeLink

surface.

3. Press and hold the handheld

transmitter button.The HomeLink

indicator light will flash, first slowly

and then rapidly.

4. When the indicator light begins to

flash rapidly, release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trained

HomeLink

button and observe

the red Status Indicator LED. If the

indicator light stays on constantly,

programming is complete and

your new device should activate.

Erasing HomeLink

buttons

Individual buttons cannot be erased.

However, to erase all three pro-

grammed buttons:

1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink

buttons until the indi-

cator light begins to flash-after 20

seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold

for longer than 30 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System is now in the training

(learn) mode and can be pro-

grammed at any time following the

appropriate steps in the

Programming chapters above.

Features of your vehicle

484

This device complies with Part 15

of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired

operation.

Outside rearview mirror

Your vehicle is equipped with both

left-hand and right-hand outside

rearview mirrors.

WARNING

The transceiver has been tested

and complies with FCC and

Industry Canada rules. Changes

or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsi-

ble for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate

the device.

WARNING - Rearview

mirrors

• The right outside rearview mir-

ror is convex. Objects seen in

the mirror are closer than they

appear.

• Use your interior rearview

mirror or turn your head and

look to determine the actual

distance of following vehicles

when changing lanes.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside

rearview mirrors while driving.

This may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

CAUTION

• Do not scrape ice off the mir-

ror face; this may damage the

surface of the glass.

• If the mirror is jammed with ice,

do not adjust the mirror by

force. Use an approved spray

de-icer (not radiator antifreeze)

spray, or a sponge or soft cloth

with very warm water, or move

the vehicle to a warm place

and allow the ice to melt.

449

Features of your vehicle

Blind zone mirror

The Blind Zone Mirror (BZM) is a

supplemental mirror that reduces the

driver's blind zone by showing the

rear side area of the vehicle. The

blind zone mirror is equipped on the

left-hand outside rearview mirror.

Remote control

Electric type

Move the lever (1) to the L (Left) or R

(Right) to select the rearview mirror

you would like to adjust.

Use the mirror adjustment control to

position the selected mirror up,

down, left or right.

After adjustment, place the lever (1)

in the center to prevent inadvertent

adjustment.

OMD040035N

OGD044714

OGD054050

WARNING

• Always check the road condi-

tion while driving for unex-

pected situations even though

the vehicle is equipped with a

blind zone mirror.

• The blind zone mirror is a

device made for convenience.

Do not solely rely on the mir-

ror but always pay attention to

drive safely.

CAUTION

Do not clean the mirror with

harsh abrasives, fuel or other

petroleum based cleaning prod-

ucts.

Features of your vehicle

504

Folding the outside rearview mirror

To fold the outside rearview mirror,

grasp the housing of the mirror and

then fold it toward the rear of the

vehicle.

2–

CAUTION

• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum

adjusting angles, but the

motor continues to operate

while the switch is pressed.

Do not press the switch longer

than necessary, the motor

may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the

outside rearview mirror by

hand or the motor may be

damaged.

451

Features of your vehicle

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Odometer/Trip computer

OMD044040N

❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ

from the illustration.

For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in

this chapter.

Features of your vehicle

524

Instrument Cluster Control

Adjusting Instrument Cluster

Illumination

When the vehicle's parking lights or

headlights are on, press the illumina-

tion control button to adjust the

brightness of the instrument panel

illumination.

• The brightness of the instrument

panel illumination is displayed.

• If the brightness reaches to the

maximum or minimum level, an

alarm will sound.

Fuse switch ON

This warning message illuminates if

the fuse switch under the steering

wheel is OFF.

Turn the fuse switch ON.

For more details, refer to "Fuses" in

chapter 7.

OMD040043

OMD044605

OMD044604

453

Features of your vehicle

Gauges

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the

speed of the vehicle and is calibrated

in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-

meters per hour (km/h).

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the

approximate number of engine revo-

lutions per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the cor-

rect shift points and to prevent lug-

ging and/or over-revving the engine.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with-

in the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine

damage.

OMD040044N

OMD040046N

Features of your vehicle

544

Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge

This gauge shows the temperature

of the engine coolant when the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

Fuel Gauge

This gauge indicates the approxi-

mate amount of fuel remaining in the

fuel tank.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. The

engine coolant is under pressure

and could cause severe burns.

Wait until the engine is cool

before adding coolant to the

reservoir.

CAUTION

If the gauge pointer moves

beyond the normal range area

toward the “H” position, it indi-

cates overheating that may

damage the engine.

Do not continue driving with an

overheated engine. If your vehi-

cle overheats, refer to “If the

Engine Overheats” in chapter 6.

OMD044048N

OMD044049N

455

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

• The fuel tank capacity is given in

chapter 8.

• The fuel gauge is supplemented by

a low fuel warning light, which

will illuminate when the fuel tank

is nearly empty.

• On inclines or curves, the fuel

gauge pointer may fluctuate or the

low fuel warning light may come

on earlier than usual due to the

movement of fuel in the tank.

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total dis-

tance that the vehicle has been driv-

en and should be used to determine

when periodic maintenance should

be performed.

- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles

or kilometers.

WARNING - Fuel Gauge

Running out of fuel can expose

vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain addi-

tional fuel as soon as possible

after the warning light comes

on or when the gauge indicator

comes close to the “E (Empty)”

level.

CAUTION

Avoid driving with a very low

fuel level. Running out of fuel

could cause the engine to mis-

fire damaging the catalytic con-

verter.

OMD044053N

Features of your vehicle

564

Transaxle Shift Indicator

Automatic Transaxle Shift

Indicator (if equipped)

This indicator displays which auto-

matic transaxle shift lever is selected.

•Park :P

• Reverse : R

• Neutral : N

•Drive :D

• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Trip computer

Overview

Description

The trip computer is a microcomput-

er-controlled driver information sys-

tem that displays information related

to driving.

✽✽

NOTICE

Some driving information stored in

the trip computer (for example

Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the

battery is disconnected.

Press the TRIP button for less than 1

second to select any mode as follows :

OMD044603

OMD044052N

Average fuel economy

Average speed

TRIP A

TRIP B

Distance to empty

Elapsed time

ECO ON/OFF*

* : if equipped

457

Features of your vehicle

Tripmeter (mi. or km)

TRIP A : Tripmeter A

TRIP B : Tripmeter B

This mode indicates the distance of

individual trips selected since the

last tripmeter reset.

The meter's working range is from

0.0 to 999.9 miles (0.0 to 999.9 km).

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the tripmeter

(TRIP A or TRIP B) is being dis-

played, clears the tripmeter to zero

(0.0).

Distance to empty (mi. or km)

This mode indicates the estimated

distance to empty based on the cur-

rent fuel in the fuel tank and the

amount of fuel delivered to the

engine.When the remaining distance

is below 30 miles (50 km), “---” will be

displayed and the distance to empty

indicator will blink.

The meter’s working range is from 30

to 999 miles (50 to 999 km).

Average fuel economy (if equipped)

(MPG or l/100 km)

This mode calculates the average

fuel consumption from the total fuel

used and the distance since the last

average economy reset. The total

fuel used is calculated from the fuel

consumption input. For an accurate

calculation, drive more than 0.03

miles (50 m).

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the average fuel

economy is being displayed, clears

the average fuel consumption to zero

(----).

OMD044057K OMD044059N OMD044065N

Features of your vehicle

584

If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.6

MPH (1km/h) after being refueled

with more than 1.6 gallons (6 l), the

average fuel economy will be cleared

to zero (----).

Average speed (MPH or km/h)

This mode calculates the average

speed of the vehicle since the last

average speed reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion,

the average speed keeps changing

while the engine is running.

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the average

speed is being displayed, clears the

average speed to zero (---).

Elapsed time

This mode indicates the total time

traveled since the last driving time

reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion,

the driving time keeps increasing

while the engine is running.

The meter’s working range is from

00:00~99:59.

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the elapsed

time is being displayed, clears the

elapsed time to zero (00:00).

OMD044071N OMD044074N

459

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has been

interrupted, the “Distance to

empty” function may not operate

correctly.

The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 1.6 gal-

lons (6 liters) of fuel are added to

the vehicle.

• The fuel consumption and dis-

tance to empty values may vary

significantly based on driving con-

ditions, driving habits, and condi-

tion of the vehicle.

• The distance to empty value is an

estimate of the available driving

distance. This value may differ

from the actual driving distance

available.

ECO ON/OFF mode (if equipped)

You can turn the Manual transaxle

shift indicator ON/OFF on the instru-

ment cluster in this mode.

If you push the RESET button for

more than 1 second in the ECO ON

mode, ECO OFF is displayed on the

screen and the Manual transaxle

shift indicator turns off while driving.

If you want to display the Manual

transaxle shift indicator again, press

the RESET button for more than 1

second in the ECO OFF mode and

then ECO ON mode is displayed in

the screen.

Manual Transaxle Shift

Indicator (if equipped)

This indicator informs you which

gear is desired while driving to save

fuel.

For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the

3rd gear is desired (currently

the shift lever is in the 2nd

gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to

the 3rd gear is desired (current-

ly the shift lever is in the 4th

gear).

OMD044702

Features of your vehicle

604

Warning and indicator lights

✽✽

NOTICE - Warning lights

Make sure that all warning lights

are OFF after starting the engine. If

any light is still ON, this indicates a

situation that needs attention.

Air bag Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 6

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the SRS.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light informs the driver

that the seat belt is not fastened.

For more details, refer to the “Seat

Belts” in chapter 3.

461

Features of your vehicle

Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds

- It remains on if the parking brake

is applied.

• When the parking brake is applied.

• When the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.

- If the warning light illuminates

with the parking brake released, it

indicates the brake fluid level is

low.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoir

is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and add

fluid as required (For more details,

refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).

Then check all brake components

for fluid leaks. If any leak on the

brake system is found, the warning

light remains on, or the brakes do

not operate properly, do not drive

the vehicle.

In this case, have your vehicle

towed to an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer and inspected.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-

diagonal braking systems. This

means you still have braking on two

wheels even if one of the dual sys-

tems should fail.

With only one of the dual systems

working, more than normal pedal

travel and greater pedal pressure are

required to stop the vehicle.

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as

short a distance with only a portion

of the brake system working.

If the brakes fail while you are driv-

ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-

al engine braking and stop the vehi-

cle as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING - Parking

Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warn-

ing light ON is dangerous. If the

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light illuminates with

the parking brake released, it

indicates that the brake fluid

level is low.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Features of your vehicle

624

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the ABS (The normal braking sys-

tem will still be operational without

the assistance of the anti-lock

brake system).

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Electronic

Brake force

Distribution

(EBD) System

Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate at

the same time while driving:

• When the ABS and regular brake

system may not work normally.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE - Electronic Brake

force Distribution

(EBD) System

Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on

or both ABS and Parking Brake &

Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,

the speedometer, odometer, or trip-

meter may not work. Also, the EPS

Warning Light may illuminate and

the steering effort may increase or

decrease.

In this case, have your vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er as soon as possible.

WARNING - Electronic

Brake force Distribution

(EBD) System Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking

Brake & Brake Fluid Warning

Lights are on, the brake system

will not work normally and you

may experience an unexpected

and dangerous situation during

sudden braking.

In this case, avoid high speed

driving and abrupt braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

as soon as possible.

463

Features of your vehicle

Electric Power Steering

(EPS) Warning Light

(if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When there is a malfunction with

the EPS.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL)

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When there is a malfunction with

the emission control system.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION - Malfunction

Indicator

Lamp (MIL)

Driving with the Malfunction

Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may

cause damage to the emission

control systems which could

effect drivability and/or fuel

economy.

CAUTION - Gasoline

Engine

If the Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-

tial catalytic converter damage

is possible which could result in

loss of engine power.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as

possible.

Features of your vehicle

644

Charging System

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When there is a malfunction with

either the alternator or electrical

charging system.

If there is a malfunction with either

the alternator or electrical charging

system:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and check the

alternator drive belt for looseness

or breakage.

If the belt is adjusted properly,

there may be a problem in the

electrical charging system.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning

Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When the engine coolant tempera-

ture is above 248°F (120°C). This

means that the engine is overheat-

ed and may be damaged.

If your vehicle is overheated, refer

to “Overheating” in chapter 6.

CAUTION - Engine

Overheating

Do not continue driving with the

engine overheated. Otherwise

engine may be damaged.

465

Features of your vehicle

Engine Oil Pressure

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It remains on until the engine is

started.

• When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and check the

engine oil level (For more details,

refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 7).

If the level is low, add oil as

required.

If the warning light remains on

after adding oil or if oil is not avail-

able, have your vehicle inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

as soon as possible.

Low Fuel Level Warning

Light

This warning light illuminates:

When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

If the fuel tank is nearly empty, add

fuel as soon as possible.

CAUTION - Engine Oil

Pressure

Warning Light

• If the engine does not stop

immediately after the Engine

Oil Pressure Warning Light is

illuminated, severe damage

could result.

• If the warning light stays on

while the engine is running, it

indicates that there may be

serious engine damage or

malfunction. In this case,

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as

it is safe to do so.

2.Turn off the engine and

check the oil level. If the oil

level is low, fill the engine

oil to the proper level.

3. Start the engine again. If the

warning light stays on after

the engine is started, turn

the engine off immediately.

In this case, have your vehi-

cle inspected by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION - Low Fuel

Level

Driving with the Low Fuel Level

warning light on or with the fuel

level below "E (Empty)" can

cause the engine to misfire and

damage the catalytic converter

(if equipped).

Features of your vehicle

664

Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When one or more of your tires are

significantly underinflated.

For more details, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in chapter 6.

This warning light remains on after

blinking for approximately 60 seconds

or repeats blinking and off at the

intervals of approximately 3 seconds:

• When there is a malfunction with

the TPMS.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

For more details, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in chapter 6.

WARNING - Safe Stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damage

caused by external factors.

• If you notice any vehicle insta-

bility, immediately take your

foot off the accelerator pedal,

apply the brakes gradually with

light force, and slowly move to

a safe position off the road.

WARNING - Low tire

pressure

• Significantly low tire pressure

makes the vehicle unstable

and can contribute to loss of

vehicle control and increased

braking distances.

• Continued driving or low pres-

sure tires will cause the tires to

overheat and fail.

467

Features of your vehicle

Door Ajar Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

When a door is not closed securely.

Trunk Open Warning

Light

This warning light illuminates:

When the trunk is not closed secure-

ly.

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the ESC system.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) OFF

Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When you deactivate the ESC sys-

tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-

ton.

For more details, refer to “Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

Features of your vehicle

684

ECO Indicator Light

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

When you activate the active ECO

system by pressing the ACTIVE

ECO button.

For more details, refer to “Active

ECO System” in chapter 5.

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (Without Smart Key)

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

When the vehicle detects the immo-

bilizer in your key properly while the

ignition switch is ON.

- At this time, you can start the

engine.

- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks:

When there is a malfunction with the

immobilizer system.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Immobilizer Indicator

Light (With Smart Key)

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates for up

to 30 seconds:

When the vehicle detects the smart

key in the vehicle properly while the

Engine Start/Stop Button is ACC or

ON.

- At this time, you can start the

engine.

- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a few

seconds:

When the smart key is not in the

vehicle.

- At this time, you can not start the

engine.

ECO

469

Features of your vehicle

This indicator light illuminates for 2

seconds and goes off:

When the vehicle can not detect the

smart key which is in the vehicle

while the Engine Start/Stop Button is

ON.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

• When the battery of the smart key

is weak.

- At this time, you can not start the

engine. However, you can start

the engine if you press the Engine

Start/Stop Button with the smart

key. (For more details, refer to

“Starting the Engine” in section 5).

• When there is a malfunction with

the immobilizer system.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn Signal Indicator

Light

This indicator light blinks:

When you turn the turn signal light

on.

If any of the following occurs, there

may be a malfunction with the turn

signal system. In this case, have your

vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

- The indicator light does not blink

but illuminates.

- The indicator light blinks more

rapidly.

- The indicator light does not illumi-

nate at all.

Features of your vehicle

704

High Beam Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the headlights are on and in

the high beam position

• When the turn signal lever is pulled

into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Light ON Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

When the parking lights or head-

lights are on.

Front Fog Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

When the front fog lights are on.

Cruise Indicator Light

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the cruise control system is

enabled.

For more details, refer to “Cruise

Control System” in chapter 5.

Cruise SET Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the cruise control speed is set.

For more details, refer to “Cruise

Control System” in chapter 5.

CRUISE

SET

471

Features of your vehicle

KEY OUT Indicator Light

(if equipped)

When the ENGINE START/STOP

button is in the ACC or ON position,

if any door is open, the system

checks for the smart key.

This indicator light blinks:

When the smart key is not in the

vehicle and any door is open with the

ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop

button in the ACC or ON position.

- At this time, if you close all doors,

the chime will also sound for

approximately 5 seconds.

- The indicator will go off while the

vehicle is moving.

The rearview camera will activate

when the back-up light is ON with the

engine start/stop button ON and the

shift lever in the R position.

This system is a supplemental sys-

tem that shows behind the vehicle

through the monitor while backing-

up.

KEY

OUT

REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

• This system is a supplemen-

tary function only. It is the

responsibility of the driver to

always check the inside/out-

side rearview mirror and the

area behind the vehicle before

and while backing up.

• Always keep the camera lens

clean. If the lens is covered

with foreign matter, the cam-

era may not operate normally.

OMD044091

OMD045092

Features of your vehicle

724

LIGHT

Exterior lights

Lighting control

To operate the lights, turn the knob at

the end of the control lever to one of

the following positions:

■■

Type A

(1) DRL OFF (OFF) position

(2) Parking light position

(3) Headlight position

(4) AUTO light position (if equipped)

■■

Type B

(1) OFF position

(2) DRL ON position

(3) Parking light position

(4) Headlight position

Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the park-

ing light position (1st position), the

parking lights, taillights, license plate

lights and instrument panel lights are

turned ON.

OYFH041900N

OGD044900N

■ Type A

■ Type B

OYFH041901N

OGD044903N

■ Type A

■ Type B

473

Features of your vehicle

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the head

light position (2nd position), the

headlights, parking lights, taillights,

license plate lights and instrument

panel lights are turned ON.

✽✽

NOTICE

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to turn on the headlights.

AUTO light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO

position, the parking (position) light

and headlights will be turned ON or

OFF automatically depending on the

amount of light outside the vehicle.

Even with the AUTO light feature in

operation, it is recommended to

manually turn ON the lights when

driving at night or in a fog, or when

you enter dark areas, such as tun-

nels and parking facilities.

OYFH041902N

OGD044907N

■ Type A

■ Type B

OYFH041906N

Features of your vehicle

744

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights,

push the lever away from you. Pull it

back for low beams.

The high beam indicator will light

when the headlight high beams are

switched on.

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not leave the lights

on for a prolonged time while the

engine is not running.

CAUTION

• Do not cover or spill anything

on the sensor (1) located on

the instrument panel.

• Do not clean the sensor using

a window cleaner, the cleanser

may leave a light film which

could interfere with sensor

operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint

or other types of metallic coat-

ing on the front windshield,

the AUTO light system may

not work properly.

OYFH041904N

OGD044901N

■ Type A

■ Type B

WARNING

Do not use high beam when there

are other vehicles approaching

you. Using high beam could

obstruct the other driver's vision.

475

Features of your vehicle

To flash the high beam headlights,

pull the lever towards you, then

release the lever. The high beams

will remain ON as long as you hold

the lever towards you.

Turn signals and lane change sig-

nals

To signal a turn, move the lever up

for a right turn or down for a left turn

to position (A).The lever will return to

the OFF position when the turn is

completed.

To signal a lane change, move the

turn signal lever slightly and hold it in

position (B). The lever will return to

the OFF position when released.

OYFH041903N

OGD044904N

■ Type A

■ Type B

OYFH041907N

OGD044906N

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

764

One-touch lane change function

To activate an one-touch lane

change function, move the turn sig-

nal lever slightly and then release it.

The lane change signals will blink 3

times.

✽✽

NOTICE

If the turn signal indicator stays on

and does not flash, or if it flashes

abnormally, a bulb may be burned

out or have a poor electrical connec-

tion in the circuit. The bulb may

require replacement.

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provide

improved visibility when visibility is

poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. Use

the switch next to the headlight switch

to turn the fog lights ON and OFF.The

fog lights will turn on when fog light

switch (1) is turned to ON after the

parking lights are turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the

switch to the OFF position.

You can use the fog lights only when

the headlights are on low beam.

When the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position, you can also use the

fog lights when the headlights turn

on automatically. The fog lights will

go OFF when the headlights turn

OFF.

CAUTION

When in operation, the fog

lights consume large amounts

of vehicle electrical power. Only

use the fog lights when visibility

is poor.

OYFH041905N

OGD044905N

■ Type A

■ Type B

477

Features of your vehicle

Battery saver function

The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-

charged. The system automatically

turns off the parking lights when the

driver removes the ignition key or

turns the engine off (for smart key)

and opens the driver-side door.

With this feature, the parking lights

will turn off automatically if the driver

parks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on

when the ignition key is removed or

the engine is turned off (for smart

key), perform the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lights OFF and

ON again using the light switch on

the steering column.

Headlight escort function

If the key is removed from the ignition

switch or placed in the ACC position

or the LOCK/OFF position with the

headlights ON, the headlights (and/or

parking lights) remain on for about 5

minutes. However, if the driver’s door

is opened and closed, the headlights

are turned off after 15 seconds.

The headlights can be turned off by

pressing the LOCK button on the

remote key or smart key twice or

turning the light switch to the OFF or

AUTO position. However, if you turn

the light switch to the AUTO position

when it is dark outside, the head-

lights will not be turned off.

CAUTION

If the driver gets out of the vehi-

cle through other doors (except

driver's door), the battery saver

function does not operate and

the headlamp delay function

does not turn off automatically.

Therefore, It causes the battery

to be discharged. In this case,

make sure to turn off the lamp

before getting out of the vehicle.

Features of your vehicle

784

Daytime running light (DRL)

(if equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

can make it easier for others to see

the front of your vehicle during the

day, especially after dawn and before

sunset.

Type A

The DRL will turn off when:

1. The headlight is ON.

2. The light switch is in the DRL OFF

position.

3. The parking brake is applied.

4. The engine is turned OFF.

Type B

The DRL will turn off when:

1. The headlight is ON.

2. The light switch is in the OFF posi-

tion.

3. The parking brake is applied.

4. The engine is turned OFF.

Interior lights

Automatic turn off function

(if equipped)

When all doors are closed, if you lock

the vehicle by using the remote key

or smart key, all interior lamp will be

off within 5 seconds.

If you do not operate anything in the

vehicle after turning off the engine,

the lights will turn off after 20 minutes.

CAUTION

Do not use the interior lights for

extended periods when the

engine is turned off or the bat-

tery will discharge.

WARNING

Do not use the interior lights

when driving in the dark. The

interior lights may obscure your

view and cause an accident.

479

Features of your vehicle

Front lamps

(1) Front Map Lamp

(2) Front Room Lamp

Front Map Lamp:

Press either the right or left lens to

turn the map lamp on or off.This light

produces a spot beam for convenient

use as a map lamp at night or as a

personal lamp for the driver and the

front passenger.

Front Room Lamp:

The Front Room Lamp Switch acti-

vates the front and rear room lamps

when the switch is pressed in either of

the three positions indicated below:

DOOR :

With the switch in this position, the

front and rear room lamps come on

when the front or rear doors are

opened, or when the doors are

unlocked by the remote key or smart

key.

Once all doors are closed, the room

lamps will go out gradually after

about 30 seconds.

If a door is open with the ignition

switch in the ACC position or the

LOCK/OFF position, the lamps will

remain on for about 20 minutes. If a

door is open with the ignition switch

in the ON position, the lamps will

stay on continuously.

ON :

With the Front Room Lamp in this

position, the front and rear room

lamps remain on at all times.

OFF :

With the Front Room Lamp in this

position the front and rear room

lamps remain off at all times.

✽✽

NOTICE

When the map lamp (1) is turned

ON by pressing the lens, the map

lamp will not turn off even if the

front room lamp switch is in the

OFF position.

OMD040096

Features of your vehicle

804

Rear lamp

Rear Room Lamp Switch:

Press this switch to turn the room

lamp on and off.

Trunk lamp

The trunk lamp comes on when the

trunk is opened.

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

Push the switch to turn the light ON

or OFF.

• : The lamp will turn ON.

• O : The lamp will turn OFF.

CAUTION

Do not leave the lamp switches

on for an extended period of time

when the engine is turned off.

OMD040097

CAUTION

The trunk lamp comes on as

long as the trunk lid is open. To

prevent unnecessary charging

system drain, close the trunk lid

securely after using the trunk.

OMD040160 OYF049209

CAUTION

To prevent unnecessary charg-

ing system drain, turn off the

lamp by pushing the O button

after using the lamp.

481

Features of your vehicle

A : Wiper speed control

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe

· LO – Low wiper speed

· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent or Auto control

wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes

(if equipped)

Windshield wipers

Operates as follows when the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

MIST :

For a single wipe push the

lever upward and release.The

wipers will operate continu-

ously if the lever is held in this

position.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation.

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. To

vary the speed setting, turn the

speed control knob (1).

LO :

The wiper runs at a lower speed.

HI :

The wiper runs at a higher speed.

✽✽

NOTICE

If there is heavy accumulation of

snow or ice on the windshield, defrost

the windshield for about 10 minutes,

or until the snow and/or ice is

removed before using the windshield

wipers to ensure proper operation.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

OYF049100

OYF049102

Features of your vehicle

824

Windshield washers

In the OFF position, pull the lever

gently toward you to spray washer

fluid on the windshield and to run the

wipers 1-3 cycles. Use this function

when the windshield is dirty.

The spray and wiper operation will

continue until you release the lever. If

the washer does not work, you may

need to add washer fluid to the

washer fluid reservoir.

WARNING

When the outside temperature

is below freezing, ALWAYS

warm the windshield using the

defroster to prevent the washer

fluid from freezing on the wind-

shield and obscuring your

vision which could result in an

accident and serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage

to the washer pump, do not

operate the washer when the

fluid reservoir is empty.

• To prevent possible damage

to the wipers or windshield,

do not operate the wipers

when the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the

wiper arms and other compo-

nents, do not attempt to move

the wipers manually.

OYF049101

483

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

If you want to defrost and defog the

front windshield, refer to

“Windshield defrosting and defog-

ging” in this chapter.

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window to

remove frost, fog and thin ice from

the rear window, while the engine is

running.

To activate the rear window

defroster, press the rear window

defroster button located in the center

facia switch panel.

The indicator on the rear window

defroster button illuminates when the

defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of

snow on the rear window, brush it off

before operating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automati-

cally turns off after approximately 20

minutes or when the ignition switch is

turned off. To turn off the defroster,

press the rear window defroster but-

ton again.

Outside rearview mirror defroster

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the

outside rearview mirror defrosters,

they will operate at the same time

you turn on the rear window

defroster.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the con-

ductors bonded to the inside

surface of the rear window,

never use sharp instruments or

window cleaners containing

abrasives to clean the window.

DEFROSTER

OMD044098

OMD044099

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

844

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Front windshield defrost button

2. Mode selection buttons

3. Rear window defroster button

4. A/C (Air conditioning) button (if equipped)

5. Air intake control button

6. Fan speed control knob

7. Temperature control knob

OMD044100

485

Features of your vehicle

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

To improve the effectiveness of

heating and cooling :

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air or recirculated

air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (if

equipped) on.

OMD044102

Features of your vehicle

864

Mode selection

The mode selection knob controls

the direction of the air flow through

the ventilation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dash-

board outlets, or windshield. Five

symbols are used to represent Face,

Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and

Defrost air position.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper

body and face. Additionally, each

outlet can be controlled to direct the

air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face

and the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air

being directed to the windshield, side

window defrosters, and side vents.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor and the windshield with a small

amount directed to the side window

defrosters, and side vents.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side vents.

OMD044101

487

Features of your vehicle

MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped)

The MAX A/C mode is used to cool

the inside of the vehicle faster. Air

flow is directed toward the upper

body and face.

In this mode, the air conditioning and

the recirculated air position will be

selected automatically.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or

closed separately using the thumb-

wheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of

air delivered from these vents using

the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows

you to control the temperature of the

air flowing from the ventilation sys-

tem. To change the air temperature

inside the vehicle, turn the knob to

the right for warm air or left for cool-

er air.

OMD044103

OMD044104

OMD044105

Features of your vehicle

884

Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh)

air position or recirculated air posi-

tion.

To change the air intake control posi-

tion, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the

button illuminates when

the recirculated air posi-

tion is selected.

With the recirculated air

position selected, air

from the passenger com-

partment will be drawn

through the climate con-

trol system and heated

or cooled according to

the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh)

air position selected, air

enters the vehicle from

outside and is heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

✽✽

NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in

the recirculated air position (with-

out air conditioning selected) may

cause fogging of the windshield and

side windows and the air within the

passenger compartment to become

stale.

In addition, prolonged operation of

the air conditioning with the recircu-

lated air position selected will result

in excessively dry air in the passen-

ger compartment.

OMD044106

489

Features of your vehicle

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows

you to control the fan speed of the air

flowing from the ventilation system.

To change the fan speed, turn the

knob to the right for higher speed or

left for lower speed.

Setting the fan speed control knob to

the “0” position turns off the fan.

To turn off the fan

To turn off the fan, turn the fan speed

control knob to the "0" position.

WARNING

• Continuous use of the climate

control system in the recircu-

lated air position may allow

humidity to increase inside

the vehicle which may fog the

glass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with

the air conditioning or heating

system on. It may cause seri-

ous harm or death due to a

drop in the oxygen level

and/or body temperature.

• Continue using the climate

control system in the recircu-

lated air position can cause

drowsiness or sleepiness,

and loss of vehicle control.

Set the air intake control to

the outside (fresh) air position

as much as possible while

driving.

OMD044107

OMD044703

Features of your vehicle

904

Air conditioning

Press the A/C button to turn the air

conditioning system on (indicator

light will illuminate). Press the button

again to turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (if

equipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the

mode to the , position.

Operation Tips

• To prevent dust or unpleasant

fumes from entering the vehicle

through the ventilation system,

temporarily set the air intake con-

trol to the recirculated air position.

Be sure to return the control to the

fresh air position when the irritation

has passed to keep fresh air in the

vehicle.This will help keep the driv-

er alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system

is drawn in through the grilles just

ahead of the windshield. Care

should be taken that these are not

blocked by leaves, snow, ice or

other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

shield, set the air intake control to

the fresh air position and fan speed

to the desired position, turn on the

air conditioning system, and adjust

the temperature control to desired

temperature.

OMD044108

491

Features of your vehicle

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems

are filled with environmentally friendly

R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air con-

ditioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the

recirculated air position. However,

prolonged operation of the recircu-

lated air position will excessively

dry the air. In this case, change the

air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and

temperature control to maintain

maximum comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired,

set the temperature control to the

extreme left position then set the fan

speed control to the highest speed.

✽✽

NOTICE

• While using the air conditioning

system, monitor the engine tem-

perature gauge closely while driv-

ing up hills or in heavy traffic

when outside temperatures are

high. Air conditioning system

operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blow-

er fan but turn the air condition-

ing system off if the engine tem-

perature gauge indicates engine

overheating.

• Opening the windows in humid

weather while air conditioning

operates may create water

droplets inside the vehicle. Since

excessive water droplets may

cause damage to electrical equip-

ment, air conditioning should only

be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,

open the windows for a short time

to let the hot air inside the vehicle

escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of

the windows on rainy or humid

days, decrease the humidity inside

the vehicle by operating the air

conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system

operation, you may occasionally

notice a slight change in engine

speed as the air conditioning com-

pressor cycles. This is a normal

system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system

every month only for a few minutes

to ensure maximum system per-

formance.

• When using the air conditioning

system, you may notice clear water

dripping (or even puddling) on the

ground under the passenger side

of the vehicle.This is a normal sys-

tem operation characteristic.

Features of your vehicle

924

• Operating the air conditioning sys-

tem in the recirculated air position

provides maximum cooling, howev-

er, continual operation in this mode

may cause the air inside the vehicle

to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and humid

air intake. This is a normal system

operation characteristic.

• If you operate air conditioner

excessively, the difference between

the temperature of the outside air

and that of the windshield could

cause the outer surface of the

windshield to fog up, causing loss

of visibility. In this case, set the

mode selection knob or button to

the position and fan speed

control to the lower speed.

Climate control air filter

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust

or other pollutants that come into the

vehicle from the outside through the

heating and air conditioning system.

If dust or other pollutants accumulate

in the filter over a period of time, the

air flow from the air vents may

decrease, resulting in moisture accu-

mulation on the inside of the wind-

shield even when the outside (fresh)

air position is selected. If this hap-

pens, have the climate control air filter

replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is being driven in

severe conditions such as dusty,

rough roads, more frequent cli-

mate control air filter inspections

and changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, the system should be

checked at an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

OMG075033

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

493

Features of your vehicle

Checking the amount of air

conditioner refrigerant and

compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is

low, the performance of the air con-

ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also

has a negative influence on the air

conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The air conditioning system should

be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Air Conditioning refrigerant

label

❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant

label in the vehicle may differ from the

illustration.

Each symbols and specification on

air conditioning refrigerant label

means as below ;

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor lubri-

cant

Refer to chapter 8 for more detail

location of air conditioning refrigerant

label.

CAUTION - Compressor

damage

It is important that the correct

type and amount of oil and

refrigerant is used. Otherwise,

damage to the compressor and

abnormal system operation may

occur.

WARNING

Because the refriger-

ant is at very high

pressure, the air con-

ditioning system

should only be serv-

iced by trained and certified

technicians. It is important that

the correct type and amount of

oil and refrigerant is used, oth-

erwise damage to the vehicle

and personal injury may occur.

OMD043301N

■ Example

Features of your vehicle

944

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Driver’s temperature control button

2. Front windshield defrost button

3. Air intake control button

4. LCD display

5. AUTO (automatic control) button

6. OFF button

7. Fan speed control knob

8. Mode selection button

9. Dual temperature control selection button

10. Passenger’s temperature control button

11. Rear window defrost button

12. A/C (Air conditioning) button

OMD044109

495

Features of your vehicle

Automatic heating and air con-

ditioning

1. Push the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake

and air-conditioning will be controlled

automatically by temperature setting.

2. Press the temperature control but-

ton to set the desired temperature.

✽✽

NOTICE

• To turn the automatic operation off,

select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Front windshield defrost button

- Fan speed control button

The selected function will be con-

trolled manually while other func-

tions operate automatically.

• For your convenience and to

improve the effectiveness of the

climate control, use the AUTO

button and set the temperature to

73°F (23°C).

✽✽

NOTICE

Never place anything over the sen-

sor located on the instrument panel

to ensure better control of the heat-

ing and cooling system.

OMD040111

OMD044110

OMD044116

■ Dr

iver ■ Front passenger

Features of your vehicle

964

Manual heating and air condi-

tioning

The heating and cooling system can

be controlled manually by pressing

buttons or turning knob(s) other than

the AUTO button. In this case, the

system works sequentially according

to the order of buttons or knob(s)

selected.

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion.

For improving the effectiveness of

heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to

convert to full automatic control of

the system.

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls

the direction of the air flow through

the ventilation system.

The air flow outlet port is converted

as follows:

Refer to the illustration in the

“Manual climate control system”.

Face-Level

Air flow is directed toward the upper

body and face. Additionally, each

outlet can be controlled to direct the

air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level

Air flow is directed towards the face

and the floor.

Floor-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air

being directed to the windshield and

side window defrosters.

Floor & Defrost

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor and the windshield with a small

amount directed to the side window

defrosters.

OMD044112

497

Features of your vehicle

Defrost-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or

closed separately using the thumb-

wheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of

air delivered from these vents using

the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature will increase by

pushing the up button. Each push of

the button will cause the temperature

to increase by 1°F/0.5°C.

The temperature will decrease by

pushing the down button. Each push

of the button will cause the tempera-

ture to decrease by 1°F/0.5°C. When

set to the lowest temperature setting,

the air conditioning will operate contin-

uously.

OMD044113 OMD044104

OMD044116

■ Driver ■ Front passenger

Features of your vehicle

984

Adjusting the driver and passenger

side temperature individually

1. Press the DUAL button to operate

the driver and passenger side

temperature individually. Pressing

the right temperature control but-

ton will automatically switch to the

DUAL mode as well.

2. Press the left temperature control

button to adjust the driver side

temperature. Press the right tem-

perature control button to adjust

the passenger side temperature.

When the driver side temperature is

set to the highest or lowest tempera-

ture setting, the DUAL mode is deacti-

vated for maximum heating or cooling.

Adjusting the driver and passenger

side temperature equally

1. Press the DUAL button again to

deactivate DUAL mode. The pas-

senger side temperature will be

set to the same temperature as

the driver side temperature.

2. Press the left temperature control

button. The driver and passenger

side temperature will be adjusted

equally.

Temperature unit conversion

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, the temperature mode

display will reset to Fahrenheit.

This is a normal condition. You can

switch the temperature mode

between Fahrenheit to Celsius as fol-

lows;

While pressing the OFF button,

depress the AUTO button for 3 sec-

onds or more. The display will

change from Fahrenheit to Celsius,

or from Celsius to Fahrenheit.

OMD044115

499

Features of your vehicle

Air intake control

This is used to select the outside

(fresh) air position or recirculated air

position.

To change the air intake control posi-

tion, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the

button illuminates when

the recirculated air posi-

tion is selected.

With the recirculated air

position selected, air

from the passenger com-

partment will be drawn

through the climate con-

trol system and heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the

button will not illuminate

when the outside (fresh)

air position is selected.

With the outside (fresh)

air position selected, air

enters the vehicle from

outside and is heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

✽✽

NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in

the recirculated air position (with-

out air conditioning selected) may

cause fogging of the windshield and

side windows and the air within the

passenger compartment to become

stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air

conditioning with the recirculated

air position selected will result in

excessively dry air in the passenger

compartment.

OMD044117

Features of your vehicle

1004

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the

desired speed by turning the fan

speed control knob.

The higher the fan speed is, the

more air is delivered.

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to turn the air

conditioning system on (indicator

light will illuminate).

Push the button again to turn the air

conditioning system off.

WARNING

• Continuous use of the climate

control system in the recircu-

lated air position may allow

humidity to increase inside

the vehicle which may fog the

glass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with

the air conditioning or heating

system on. It may cause seri-

ous harm or death due to a

drop in the oxygen level

and/or body temperature.

• Continue using the climate

control system in the recircu-

lated air position can cause

drowsiness or sleepiness, and

loss of vehicle control. Set the

air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as

possible while driving.

OMD044118OMD044114

4101

Features of your vehicle

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn off the

air climate control system. However,

you can still operate the mode and

air intake buttons as long as the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (if

equipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the

mode to the , position.

Operation Tips

• To prevent dust or unpleasant

fumes from entering the vehicle

through the ventilation system,

temporarily set the air intake con-

trol to the recirculated air position.

Be sure to return the control to the

fresh air position when the irritation

has passed to keep fresh air in the

vehicle.This will help keep the driv-

er alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system

is drawn in through the grilles just

ahead of the windshield. Care

should be taken that these are not

blocked by leaves, snow, ice or

other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

shield, set the air intake control to

the fresh air position and fan speed

to the desired position, turn on the

air conditioning system, and adjust

the temperature control to desired

temperature.

OMD044119

Features of your vehicle

1024

Air conditioning

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems

are filled with environmentally friendly

R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air con-

ditioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the

recirculated air position. However,

prolonged operation of the recircu-

lated air position will excessively

dry the air. In this case, change the

air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and

temperature control to maintain

maximum comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired,

set the temperature control to the

extreme left position then set the

fan speed control to the highest

speed.

✽✽

NOTICE

• While using the air conditioning

system, monitor the engine tem-

perature gauge closely while driv-

ing up hills or in heavy traffic

when outside temperatures are

high. Air conditioning system

operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blow-

er fan but turn the air condition-

ing system off if the engine tem-

perature gauge indicates engine

overheating.

• Opening the windows in humid

weather while air conditioning

operates may create water

droplets inside the vehicle. Since

excessive water droplets may

cause damage to electrical equip-

ment, air conditioning should only

be used with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,

open the windows for a short time

to let the hot air inside the vehicle

escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of

the windows on rainy or humid

days, decrease the humidity inside

the vehicle by operating the air

conditioning system.

• During air conditioning system

operation, you may occasionally

notice a slight change in engine

speed as the air conditioning com-

pressor cycles. This is a normal

system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system

every month only for a few minutes

to ensure maximum system per-

formance.

• When using the air conditioning

system, you may notice clear water

dripping (or even puddling) on the

ground under the passenger side

of the vehicle.This is a normal sys-

tem operation characteristic.

4103

Features of your vehicle

• Operating the air conditioning sys-

tem in the recirculated air position

provides maximum cooling, how-

ever, continual operation in this

mode may cause the air inside the

vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and

humid air intake. This is a normal

system operation characteristic.

• If you operate air conditioner

excessively, the difference

between the temperature of the

outside air and that of the wind-

shield could cause the outer sur-

face of the windshield to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this

case, set the mode selection knob

or button to the position and

fan speed control to the lower

speed.

Climate control air filter

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust

or other pollutants that come into the

vehicle from the outside through the

heating and air conditioning system.

If dust or other pollutants accumulate

in the filter over a period of time, the

air flow from the air vents may

decrease, resulting in moisture accu-

mulation on the inside of the wind-

shield even when the outside (fresh)

air position is selected. If this hap-

pens, have the climate control air fil-

ter replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is being driven in

severe conditions such as dusty,

rough roads, more frequent cli-

mate control air filter inspections

and changes are required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, the system should be

checked at an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

OMG075033

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

Features of your vehicle

1044

Checking the amount of air

conditioner refrigerant and

compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is

low, the performance of the air con-

ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also

has a negative influence on the air

conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The air conditioning system should

be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Air Conditioning refrigerant

label

❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant

label in the vehicle may differ from the

illustration.

|Each symbols and specification on

air conditioning refrigerant label

means as below ;

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor lubri-

cant

Refer to chapter 8 for more detail

location of air conditioning refrigerant

label.

CAUTION - Compressor

damage

It is important that the correct

type and amount of oil and

refrigerant is used. Otherwise,

damage to the compressor and

abnormal system operation may

occur.

WARNING

Because the refriger-

ant is at very high

pressure, the air con-

ditioning system

should only be serv-

iced by trained and certified

technicians. It is important that

the correct type and amount of

oil and refrigerant is used, oth-

erwise damage to the vehicle

and personal injury may occur.

OMD043301N

■ Example

4105

Features of your vehicle

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

• For maximum defrosting, set the

temperature control to the extreme

right/hot position and the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired

while defrosting or defogging, set

the mode to the floor-defrost posi-

tion.

• Before driving, clear all snow and

ice from the windshield, rear win-

dow, outside rear view mirrors, and

all side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the

hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to

improve heater and defroster effi-

ciency and to reduce the probabili-

ty of fogging up the inside of the

windshield.

✽✽

NOTE

Be sure to keep the interior surface

of the windshield clean by wiping it

with a clean cloth and glass cleaner.

This will help reduce the tendency of

the glass fogging and also improve

visibility.

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windshield

1. Select any fan speed except “0”

position.

2. Select desired temperature, except

MAX A/C.

3. Select the or position.

4.The outside (fresh) air will be

selected automatically.

If the outside (fresh) air position is

not selected automatically, press the

corresponding button manually.

WARNING - Windshield

heating

Do not use the or posi-

tion during cooling operation in

extremely humid weather. The

difference between the temper-

ature of the outside air and that

of the windshield could cause

the outer surface of the wind-

shield to fog up, causing loss of

visibility. In this case, set the

mode selection knob or button

to the position and fan

speed control knob or button to

a lower speed.

OMD044120

Features of your vehicle

1064

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the

extreme hot position.

3. Select the position.

4.The outside (fresh) air will be

selected automatically.

Automatic climate control sys-

tem

To defog inside windshield

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defrost button ( ).

4. The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically.

If the outside (fresh) air position is

not selected automatically, adjust the

corresponding button manually.

If the position is selected, lower

fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan

speed.

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the

extreme hot (HI) position.

3. Press the defrost button ( ).

4. The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower

fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan

speed.

OMD044121

OMD044122

OMD044123

4107

Features of your vehicle

Defogging logic

When defogging logic is operating,

the air intake is controlled automati-

cally (You can’t control the air intake)

according to certain conditions such

as or position to reduce the

probability of fogging up the inside of

the windshield. To cancel or return

the defogging logic, perform the fol-

lowing steps.

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Press the defrost button ( ).

3. Push the air intake control button

at least 5 times within 10 seconds.

The indicator light in the air intake

control button will blink 3 times with

0.5 second of interval. It indicates that

the defogging logic is canceled or

returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, the system resets to

the programmed defogging logic.

Automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Select the defrost position press-

ing defrost button ( ).

3. While holding the air conditioning

button (A/C) pressed, press the air

intake control button at least 5

times within 3 seconds.

The indicator on the air intake control

button blinks 3 times with 0.5 second

of interval. It indicates that the defog-

ging logic is canceled or returned to

the programmed status.

OMD044125OMD044124

Features of your vehicle

1084

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, the system resets to

the programmed defogging logic.

Auto defogging system

(if equipped)

Auto defogging reduces the probabil-

ity of fogging up the inside of the

windshield by automatically sensing

the moisture of inside the windshield.

The auto defogging system operates

when the heater or air conditioning is

on.

This indicator illuminates

when the auto defogging

system senses the mois-

ture of inside the wind-

shield and operates.

Example if auto defogging does not

defog inside the windshield at step 1

Operating the air conditioning. it tries

to defog again at step 2 Outside air

position.

Step 1 : Operating the air conditioning

Step 2 : Outside air position

Step 3 : Blowing air toward the wind-

shield

Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward

the windshield

Step 5 : Maximizing the air condi-

tioning

OMD040126

4109

Features of your vehicle

If your vehicle is equipped with the

auto defogging system, it is automat-

ically activated when the conditions

are met. However, if you would like to

cancel the auto defogging system,

press the front defroster button for 3

seconds. The indicator will blink 3

times to notify you that the system is

cancelled. To use the auto defogging

system again, follow the procedures

mentioned above.

If the battery has been disconnected

or discharged, it resets to the auto

defogging status.

✽✽

NOTICE

• When the air conditioning is

turned on by Auto defogging sys-

tem, if you try to turn off the air

conditioning, the indicator will

blink 3 times and the air condi-

tioning will not be turned off.

• For efficiency, do not select recir-

culated air position while Auto

defogging system is operating.

CAUTION

Do not remove the sensor cover

located on the upper end of the

driver side windshield glass.

Damage to system parts could

occur and may not be covered

by your vehicle warranty.

Features of your vehicle

1104

Center console storage

To open the center console storage,

pull up the lever.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

WARNING - Flammable

materials

Never store cigarette lighters,

propane cylinders, or other

flammable/explosive materials

in the vehicle. These items may

catch fire and/or explode if the

vehicle is exposed to hot tem-

peratures for extended periods.

WARNING

ALWAYS keep the storage com-

partment covers closed secure-

ly while driving. Items inside

your vehicle are moving as fast

as the vehicle. If you have to

stop or turn quickly, or if there

is a crash, the items may fly out

of the compartment and may

cause an injury if they strike the

driver or a passenger.

CAUTION

To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartment.

OMD040127

4111

Features of your vehicle

Sliding armrest (if equipped)

To move the armrest forward:

Grab the front portion of the armrest

(1) then pull it forward.

To move the armrest rearward:

Push the armrest rearward.

Glove box

To open the glove box, push the but-

ton and the glove box will automati-

cally open.

OMD040128

WARNING

Do not grab the front portion of

the armrest (1) when moving

the armrest rearward. You may

pinch your fingers.

WARNING

ALWAYS close the glove box

door after use. An open glove

box door can cause serious

injury to the passenger in an

accident, even if the passenger

is wearing a seat belt.

CAUTION

Do not keep food in the glove

box for a long time.

OMD040129

Features of your vehicle

1124

Sunglass holder (if equipped)

To open the sunglass holder:

Press the cover and the holder will

slowly open. Place your sunglasses

in the compartment door with the

lenses facing out.

To close the sunglass holder:

Push back into position. Make sure

the sunglass holder is closed while

driving.

WARNING

• Do not keep objects except

sunglasses inside the sun-

glass holder. Such objects can

be thrown from the holder in

the event of a sudden stop or

an accident, possibly injuring

the passengers in the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass

holder while the vehicle is

moving. The rear view mirror

of the vehicle can be blocked

by an open sunglass holder.

•

Do not put the glasses forcibly

into a sunglass holder. It may

cause personal injury if you

try to open it forcibly when the

glasses are jammed in the

holder.

OMD041130L

4113

Features of your vehicle

INTERIOR FEATURES

Clock

With Audio system

Whenever the battery terminals or

related fuses are disconnected, you

must reset the time.

To set the time:

The ignition switch must be in the

ACC position or the ON position.

• H (Hour)

Each time you press the "H" button,

the clock will change backward by

one hour. Pressing and holding the

"H" button will change the clock

backward continuously.

Release the button at the desired

time.

• M (Minute)

Each time you press the "M" button,

the clock will change backward by

one minute.Pressing and holding the

"M" button will change the clock

backward continuously.

Release the button at the desired

time.

• Display conversion

To change the 12 hour format to the

24 hour format, press the "H" and

"M" button simultaneously for more

than 4 seconds.

For example, if the "H" and "M" but-

ton is pressed when the time is 10:15

p.m., the display will change to 22:15

With Navigation system

The clock automatically sets itself to

the correct time.

OMD044138L

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock while

driving, you may lose steering

control and cause an accident

that results in severe personal

injury or death.

Features of your vehicle

1144

Outside temperature

The current outside temperature is

displayed.

The outside temperature on the dis-

play may not change immediately

like a general thermometer.

Temperature unit conversion (°C

↔↔

°F)

■■

Type A

To change the temperature display

between Fahrenheit and Centigrade

(or Centigrade and Fahrenheit),

press and hold the "H" button, then

press the "M" button for 3 seconds.

■■

Type B

To change the temperature display to

Fahrenheit, press the "°F" button.

To change the temperature display to

Centigrade, press the "°C" button.

OMD044196N

OMD044196A

4115

Features of your vehicle

Cup holder

Cups or small beverage cans may be

placed in the cup holders.

OMD040134

OMD040136

■ Rear

■ Front

WARNING - Hot liquids

• Do not place uncovered cups

with hot liquid in the cup hold-

er while the vehicle is in

motion. If hot liquid spills, you

could be burned. Such a burn

to the driver could cause loss

of vehicle control resulting in

an accident.

• Avoid abrupt starting and

braking when the cup holder

is in use to prevent spilling

your drink. If hot liquid spills,

you could be burned. Such a

burn to the driver could cause

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident.

• Only use soft cups in the cup

holders. Hard objects can

injure you in an accident.

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of

direct sun light and do not put

them in a vehicle that is heated.

It may explode.

CAUTION

• When cleaning spilled liquids,

do not dry the cup holder at

high temperature. This may

damage the chrome part of the

cup holder.

• Keep your drinks sealed while

driving to prevent spilling

your drink. If liquid spills, it

may get into the vehicle's

electrical/electronic system

and damage electrical/elec-

tronic parts.

Features of your vehicle

1164

Sunvisor

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window,

pull it downward, unsnap it from the

bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down

the sunvisor and slide the mirror

cover (3).

Adjust the sunvisor forward or back-

ward (4) as needed. Use the ticket

holder (5) to hold tickets.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Always have the vanity mirror

lamp switch in the OFF position

when the vanity mirror lamp is

not in use.

• Close the vanity mirror cover

securely and return the sunvisor

to its original position after use.

Power outlet

The power outlet is designed to pro-

vide power for mobile telephones or

other devices designed to operate

with vehicle electrical systems. The

devices should draw less than 15

amps with the engine running.

WARNING

For your safety, do not block

your view when using the sunvi-

sor.

CAUTION

Always use the sunvisor exten-

sion, after swinging the sunvi-

sor to the side.

OMD044302N

OMD044137

■ Type B

■ Type A

OHD046089L

4117

Features of your vehicle

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

To hang items, pull down the upper

portion of the hanger. (Type A)

These hangers are not designed to

hold large or heavy items.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the Power

Outlets:

• Use the power outlet only

when the engine is running

and remove the accessory

plug after use. Using the

accessory plug for prolonged

periods of time with the

engine off could cause the

battery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electrical acces-

sories which are less than 15A

in electrical capacity.

(Continue)

• Adjust the air-conditioner or

heater to the lowest operating

level when using the power

outlet.

• Close the cover when not in

use.

• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interference

when plugged into a vehicle’s

power outlet. These devices

may cause excessive audio

static and malfunctions in

other electronic systems or

devices used in your vehicle.

• Push the plug in as far as it

will go. If good contact is not

made, the plug may overheat

or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

WARNING

Avoid electrical shocks. Do not

place your fingers or foreign

objects (pin, etc.) into a power

outlet or touch the power outlet

with a wet hand.

OUN026348

OMDS042193

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

1184

Floor mat anchor(s)

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors

to attach the front floor mats to the

vehicle. The anchors on the front

floor carpet keep the floor mats from

sliding forward.

Your vehicle was manufactured with

driver's side floor mat anchors that

are designed to securely hold the

floor mat in place.To avoid any inter-

ference with pedal operation,

HYUNDAI recommends that the

HYUNDAI floor mat designed for use

in your vehicle be installed.

WARNING

Do not hang other objects

except clothes. In an accident it

may cause vehicle damage or

personal injury.

OMD040195N

WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size

or not properly installed, it can

interfere with the accelerator or

the brake pedal while driving.

Take the following precautions

when installing any floor mat:

• ALWAYS ensure the floor mats

are securely attached to the

vehicle's floor mat anchor(s)

and do not interfere with the

accelerator or brake pedal

before driving the vehicle.

• Use only the HYUNDAI floor

mats designed for use in your

vehicle.

• Do not stack floor mats on top

of one another (e.g. all-weath-

er rubber mat on top of a car-

peted floor mat).

• Only a single floor mat should

be installed in each position.

• Do not place anything on top

of the driver side floor mat.

•

Do not place the floor mats bot-

tom- side up or upside down.

4119

Features of your vehicle

Luggage net holder

(if equipped)

To keep items from shifting in the

trunk, you can use the 4 holders

located in the trunk to attach the lug-

gage net.

Make sure the luggage net is securely

attached to the holders in the trunk.

OYF049225

WARNING

Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-

stretch the luggage net.

ALWAYS keep your face and

body out of the luggage net’s

recoil path. DO NOT use the lug-

gage net when the strap has vis-

ible signs of wear or damage.

Features of your vehicle

1204

✽✽

NOTICE

• If you install an after market HID

(high intensity discharge) head

lamp, your vehicle's audio and

electronic devices may malfunc-

tion.

• Prevent chemicals such as per-

fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,

hand cleaner, and air freshener

from contacting the interior parts

because they may cause damage

or discoloration.

Antenna (if equipped)

When the radio power switch is

turned on while the ignition key is in

either the “ON” or “ACC” position,

your car will receive both AM and FM

broadcast signals through the anten-

na in the rear window glass.

Shark fin antenna (if equipped)

The shark fin antenna will receive the

transmit data.

AUDIO SYSTEM

OMD044161

CAUTION

• Do not clean the inside of the

rear window glass with a

cleaner or scraper to remove

foreign deposits as this may

cause damage to the antenna

elements.

• Avoid adding metallic coatings

such as Nickel, Cadmium, and

so on. These can disturb the

reception of AM and FM broad-

cast signals.

4121

Features of your vehicle

Steering wheel audio control

(if equipped)

The steering wheel may incorporate

audio control buttons.

1. VOLUME (VOL+/-)

• Push the lever upward (+) to

increase the volume.

• Push the lever downward (-) to

decrease the volume.

2. PRESET/SEEK ( / )

The SEEK/PRESET button has dif-

ferent functions based on the system

mode.

For the following functions the button

should be pressed for 0.8 second or

more.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK

select button.

CD/USB/iPod mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is

pressed for less than 0.8 second, it

will work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA-

TION buttons.

CD/USB/iPod mode

It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN

button.

CAUTION

Do not operate audio remote

control buttons simultaneously.

OMD040139N

OMD040139

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

1224

3. MODE

Press the button to change audio

source.

- FM(1~2)

➟ AM ➟ SAT(1~3) ➟ CD

➟ USB AUX(iPod) FM...

4. MUTE (if equipped)

• Press the button to mute the

sound.

• Press the button to turn off the

microphone during a telephone

call.

Detailed information for audio control

buttons are described in the following

pages in this chapter.

Aux, USB and iPod

port

If your vehicle has an aux and/or

USB(universal serial bus) port, you

can use an aux port to connect audio

devices and an USB port to plug in

an USB and iPod.

✽✽

NOTICE

When using a portable audio device

connected to the power outlet, noise

may occur during playback. If this

happens, use the power source of the

portable audio device.

❈ iPod

is a trademark of Apple Inc.

How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broad-

cast from transmitter towers located

around your city. They are intercept-

ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-

cle. This signal is then processed by

the radio and sent to your vehicle

speakers.

When a strong radio signal has

reached your vehicle, the precise

engineering of your audio system

ensures the best possible quality

reproduction. However, in some

cases the signal coming to your vehi-

cle may not be strong and clear.

OMD040140

¢¢¢

JBM001

FM reception

4123

Features of your vehicle

This can be due to factors, such as

the distance from the radio station,

closeness of other strong radio sta-

tions or the presence of buildings,

bridges or other large obstructions in

the area.

AM broadcasts can be received at

greater distances than FM broad-

casts. This is because AM radio

waves are transmitted at low fre-

quencies. These long distance, low

frequency radio waves can follow the

curvature of the earth rather than

travelling straight. In addition, they

curve around obstructions resulting

in better signal coverage.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at

high frequencies and do not bend to

follow the earth's surface. Because

of this, FM broadcasts generally

begin to fade within short distances

from the station. Also, FM signals are

easily affected by buildings, moun-

tains, and obstructions.This can lead

to undesirable or unpleasant listen-

ing conditions which might lead you

to believe a problem exists with your

radio. The following conditions are

normal and do not indicate radio

trouble:

¢¢¢

JBM002

AM reception

JBM003

FM radio station

Features of your vehicle

1244

• Fading - As your vehicle moves

away from the radio station, the

signal will weaken and sound will

begin to fade. When this occurs,

we suggest that you select another

stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or

large obstructions between the

transmitter and your radio can dis-

turb the signal causing static or

fluttering noises to occur. Reducing

the treble level may lessen this

effect until the disturbance clears.

• Station Swapping - As an FM signal

weakens, another more powerful

signal near the same frequency

may begin to play. This is because

your radio is designed to lock onto

the clearest signal. If this occurs,

select another station with a

stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig-

nals being received from several

directions can cause distortion or

fluttering. This can be caused by a

direct and reflected signal from the

same station, or by signals from two

stations with close frequencies. If

this occurs, select another station

until the condition has passed.

Using a cellular phone or a two-

way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside

the vehicle, noise may be produced

from the audio system. This does not

mean that something is wrong with

the audio equipment. In such a case,

try to operate mobile devices as far

from the audio equipment as possible.

¢¢¢

JBM004 JBM005

CAUTION

When using a communication

system such as a cellular phone

or a radio set inside the vehicle, a

separate external antenna must

be fitted. When a cellular phone

or a radio set is used with an

internal antenna alone, it may

interfere with the vehicle's elec-

trical system and adversely affect

safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not use a cellular phone

while driving. Stop at a safe

location to use a cellular phone.

4125

Features of your vehicle

Caring for disc

• If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows to venti-

late before using the system.

• It is illegal to copy and use

MP3/WMA files without permission.

Use CDs that are created only by

lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents, such

as benzene and thinner, use nor-

mal cleaners and magnetic sprays

made for analogue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface from

getting damaged, hold CDs by the

edges or the center hole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a piece

of soft cloth before playback (wipe

it from the center to the outside

edge).

• Do not damage the disc surface or

attach pieces of sticky tape or

paper.

• Make certain only CDs are insert-

ed into the CD player (Do not insert

more than one CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use to

protect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-

R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may

not operate normally according to

the manufacturing companies. In

such circumstances, continued

use may cause malfunctions to

your audio system.

✽✽

NOTICE - Playing an

Incompatible Copy

Protected Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do

not comply with international audio

CD standards (Red Book), may not

play on your car audio. Please note

that inabilities to properly play a

copy protected CD may indicate

that the CD is defective, not the CD

player.

NOTE:

Order of playing files (folders) :

1. Song playing order : to

sequentially.

2.Folder playing order :

❋ If no song file is contained in the

folder, that folder is not displayed.

Features of your vehicle

1264

WARNING

• Do not stare at the screen

while driving. Staring at the

screen for prolonged periods

of time could lead to traffic

accidents.

• Do not disassemble, assem-

ble, or modify the audio sys-

tem. Such acts could result in

accidents, fire, or electric

shock.

• Using the phone while driving

may lead to a lack of attention of

traffic conditions and increase

the likelihood of accidents.

Use the phone feature after

parking the vehicle.

• Heed caution not to spill water

or introduce foreign objects

into the device. Such acts

could lead to smoke, fire, or

product malfunction.

(Continued)

• Please refrain from use if the

screen is blank or no sound

can be heard as these signs

may indicate product malfunc-

tion. Continued use in such

conditions could lead to acci-

dents(fires, electric shock) or

product malfunctions.

• Do not touch the antenna dur-

ing thunder or lightening as

such acts may lead to light-

ning induced electric shock.

• Do not stop or park in park-

ing-restricted areas to operate

the product. Such acts could

lead to traffic accidents.

• Use the system with the vehi-

cle ignition turned on.

Prolonged use with the igni-

tion turned off could result in

battery discharge.

4127

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• Turn on the car ignition before

using this device. Do not oper-

ate the audio system for long

periods of time with the ignition

turned off as such operations

may lead to battery discharge.

• Do not subject the device to

severe shock or impact. Direct

pressure onto the front side of

the monitor may cause dam-

age to the LCD or touch

screen.

• When cleaning the device,

make sure to turn off the

device and use a dry and

smooth cloth. Never use

tough materials, chemical

cloths, or solvents (alcohol,

benzene, thinners, etc.) as

such materials may damage

the device panel or cause

color/quality deterioration.

(Continued)

CAUTION

• Operating the device while

driving could lead to accidents

due to a lack of attention to

external surroundings. First

park the vehicle before operat-

ing the device.

• Adjust the volume to levels that

allow the driver to hear sounds

from outside of the vehicle.

Driving in a state where exter-

nal sounds cannot be heard

may lead to accidents.

• Pay attention to the volume set-

ting when turning the device

on. A sudden output of extreme

volume upon turning the

device on could lead to hearing

impairment. (Adjust the volume

to a suitable levels before turn-

ing off the device.)

(Continued)

• Do not place beverages close

to the audio system. Spilling

beverages may lead to system

malfunction.

• In case of product malfunc-

tion, please contact your clos-

est authorized Hyundai dealer.

• Placing the audio system

within an electromagnetic

environment may result in

noise interference.

• Prevent caustic solutions such

as perfume and cosmetic oil

from contacting the dashboard

because they may cause dam-

age or discoloration.

Features of your vehicle

1284

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE

USB DEVICE

• To use an external USB device,

make sure the device is not con-

nected when starting up the

vehicle. Connect the device after

starting up.

• If you start the engine when the

USB device is connected, it may

damage the USB device. (USB

flashdrives are very sensitive to

electric shock.)

• If the engine is started up or

turned off while the external USB

device is connected, the external

USB device may not work.

• The System may not play unau-

thenticated MP3 or WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files

with the compression rate

between 8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music

files with the compression

rate between

8Kbps~320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static elec-

tricity when connecting or dis-

connecting the external USB

device.

(Continued)

• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is

not recognizable.

• Depending on the condition of

the external USB device, the

connected external USB device

can be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector

setting of External USB device

is not either 512BYTE or

2048BYTE, then the device will

not be recognized.

• Use only a USB device format-

ted to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/F

authentication may not be rec-

ognizable.

• Make sure the USB connection

terminal does not come in con-

tact with the human body or

other objects.

• If you repeatedly connect or dis-

connect the USB device in a

short period of time, it may

break the device.

• You may hear a strange noise

when connecting or disconnect-

ing a USB device.

(Continued)

• If you disconnect the external

USB device during playback in

USB mode, the external USB

device can be damaged or may

malfunction. Therefore, discon-

nect the external USB device

when the audio is turned off or

in another mode. (e.g, Radio,

CD)

• Depending on the type and

capacity of the external USB

device or the type of the files

stored in the device, there is a

difference in the time taken for

recognition of the device.

• Do not use the USB device for

purposes other than playing

music files.

• Playing videos through the USB

is not supported.

• Use of USB accessories such as

rechargers or heaters using USB

I/F may lower performance or

cause trouble.

(Continued)

4129

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• Some USB flash memory read-

ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,

etc.) or external-HDD type

devices can be unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM

(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-

MENT) are not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memory

may be lost while using this

audio. Always back up impor-

tant data on a personal storage

device.

• Please avoid using

USB memory prod-

ucts which can be

used as key chains or

cellular phone accessories as

they could cause damage to the

USB jack. Please make certain

only to use plug type connector

products.

(Continued)

• If you use devices such as a USB

hub purchased separately, the

vehicle’s audio system may not

recognize the USB device. In that

case, connect the USB device

directly to the multimedia termi-

nal of the vehicle.

• If the USB device is divided by

logical drives, only the music files

on the highest-priority drive are

recognized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/

Cellular phone/Digital camera can

be unrecognizable by standard

USB I/F can be unrecognizable.

• Charging through the USB may

not be supported in some mobile

devices.

• USB HDD or USB types liable to

connection failures due to vehicle

vibrations are not supported.

(i-stick type)

• Some non-standard USB devices

(METAL COVER TYPE USB)

can be unrecognizable.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

1304

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE

iPod

DEVICE

• Some iPod

models may not

support communication proto-

col and files may not properly

play.

Supported iPod

models:

- iPhone

3GS/4

- iPod

touch 1st~4th generation

- iPod

nano 1st~6th generation

- iPod

classic

• The order of search or playback

of songs in the iPod

can be dif-

ferent from the order searched

in the audio system.

• If the iPod

is disabled due to its

own malfunction, reset the

iPod

. (Reset: Refer to iPod

manual)

• An iPod

may not operate nor-

mally on low battery.

(Continued)

• Some iPod

devices, such as the

iPhone

, can be connected

through the Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology interface. The

device must have audio

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

capability (such as for stereo

headphone Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology).

The device can play, but it will

not be controlled by the audio

system.

• To use iPod

features within the

audio, use the cable provided

upon purchasing an iPod

device.

• Skipping or improper operation

may occur depending on the

characteristics of your iPod

iPhone

device.

• If your iPhone

is connected to

both the Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology and USB, the sound

may not be properly played. In

your iPhone

, select the Dock

connector or Bluetooth

Wireless Technology to change

the sound output (source).

(Continued)

• When connecting iPod

with the

iPod

Power Cable, insert the

connector to the multimedia

socket completely. If not insert-

ed completely, communications

between iPod

and audio may

be interrupted.

• When adjusting the sound

effects of the iPod

and the

audio system, the sound effects

of both devices will overlap and

might reduce or distort the

quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equal-

izer function of an iPod

when

adjusting the audio system’s

volume, and turn off the equal-

izer of the audio system when

using the equalizer of an iPod

• When not using iPod

with car

audio, detach the iPod

cable

from iPod

. Otherwise, iPod

may remain in accessory mode,

and may not work properly.

4131

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE -

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

• The Bluetooth

word mark and

logos are registered trademarks

owned by Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and

any use of such marks is under

license.

A Bluetooth

enabled call phone is

required to use Bluetooth

wire-

less technology.

• Bluetooth

Wirelss Technology

phone compatibility can be checked

by visiting www. hyundaiusa.com

and under the SERVICE & PARTS

- BLUETOOTH COMPATIBILI-

TY menu.

✽✽

NOTICE - BEFORE USING

THE

Bluetooth

HANDSFREE

What is Bluetooth

• Bluetooth

refers to a short-dis-

tance wireless networking technol-

ogy which uses a 2.4GHz ~

2.48GHz frequency to connect

various devices within a certain

distance.

• Supported within PCs, external

devices, Bluetooth

phones, PDAs,

various electronic devices, and auto-

motive environments, Bluetooth

allows data to be transmitted at high

speeds without having to use a con-

nector cable.

• Bluetooth

Handsfree refers to a

device which allows the user to

conveniently make phone calls

with Bluetooth

mobile phones

through the audio system.

• Bluetooth

Handsfree may not be sup-

ported in some mobile phones. To

learn more about mobile device com-

patibility, visit www. hyundaiusa.com.

✽✽

NOTICE - PRECAUTIONS

FOR SAFE DRIVING

• Bluetooth

is a feature that enables

drivers to use handsfree while

driving. Connecting the head unit

with a Bluetooth

phone allows the

user to conveniently make and

receive calls and use contacts.

Before using Bluetooth

, carefully

read the contents of this user’s

manual.

• Excessive use or operations while

driving may lead to negligent driv-

ing practices and result in acci-

dents. Refrain from excessive

operations while driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolonged

periods of time is dangerous and

may lead to accidents. When driv-

ing, view the screen only for short

periods of time.

Features of your vehicle

1324

✽✽

NOTICE - WHEN CON-

NECTING A

Bluetooth

PHONE

• Before connecting the head unit

with the mobile phone, check to

see that the mobile phone supports

Bluetooth

features.

• Even if the phone supports

Bluetooth

, the phone will not be

found during device searches if the

phone has been set to hidden state

or the Bluetooth

power is turned

off. Disable the hidden state or

turn on the Bluetooth

power

prior to searching/connecting with

the Head unit.

• Bluetooth phone is automatically

connected when the ignition is

turned on.

• If you do not want automatic con-

nection with your Bluetooth

device, turn off the Bluetooth

fea-

ture within your mobile phone.

• The Handsfree call volume and

quality may differ depending on

the mobile phone.

(Continued)

• Park the vehicle when connecting

the head unit with the mobile

phone.

• Bluetooth

connection may

become intermittently disconnect-

ed in some mobile phones. Follow

these steps to try again.

1.Within the mobile phone, turn

the Bluetooth

function off/on

and try again.

2.Turn the mobile phone power

Off/On and try again.

3.Completely remove the mobile

phone battery, reboot, and then

again.

4.Reboot the Audio System and

try again.

5.Delete all paired devices, pair

and try again.

• Handsfree call quality and volume

may differ depending on the

model of your mobile phone.

4133

Features of your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE - USING THE

VOICE RECOGNITION

• When using the voice recognition

feature, only commands listed

within the user's manual are sup-

ported.

• Be aware that during the opera-

tion of the voice recognition sys-

tem, pressing any key other than

the key terminate voice recog-

nition mode.

• For superior voice recognition

performance, position the micro-

phone used for voice recognition

above the head of the driver’s seat

and maintain a proper position

when saying commands.

• Within the following situations,

voice recognition may not function

properly due to external sound.

- When the windows and sunroof

are open

- When the wind of the cooling /

heating device is strong

- When entering and passing

through tunnels

(Continued)

- When driving on rugged and

uneven roads

- During severe rain (heavy rains,

windstorms)

• Phone related voice commands

can be used only when a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device is connected.

• When making calls by stating a

name, the corresponding contact

must be downloaded and stored

within the audio system.

• After downloading the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone book,

it takes some time to convert the

phone book data into voice infor-

mation. During this time, voice

recognition may not properly

operate.

• Pronounce the voice commands

naturally and clearly as if in a nor-

mal conversation.

Features of your vehicle

1344

■ DOT LCD type audio

Press the key Select [Phone]

1. If you CAN find “Audio Streaming” menu,

(Go to 135 page)

2. If you CANNOT find “Audio Streaming” menu,

(Go to 254 page)

■ Color LCD type audio

Press the key Select [Phone]

1. If you CAN find “Streaming Audio” menu,

(Go to 184 page)

2. If you CANNOT find “Streaming Audio” menu,

(Go to 302 page)

SETUP

The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences.

Before reading the manual, check the following.

4135

Features of your vehicle

■■

CD Player : AM1B0MDKN F/L, AM1B0MDAN F/L, AM1B1MDAN F/L

Features of your vehicle

1364

■■

CD Player : AM180MDKN F/L, AM180MDAN F/L

❋ No logo will be shown if the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

4137

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS

AND FUNCTIONS

Audio Head Unit

1. (EJECT)

• Ejects the disc.

• Changes to FM/AM/XM mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of FM1

➟

FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3

❈In Setup>Display, the radio pop up

screen will be displayed when

[Mode Pop up] is turned .

When the pop up screen is dis-

played, use the TUNE knob or

keys ~ to select the

desired mode.

• Changes to CD, USB, iPod, AUX,

My Music, BT Audio modes.

• Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of CD,

USB, iPod, AUX, My Music, BT

Audio modes.

❈In Setup>Display, the media pop

up screen will be displayed when

[Mode Pop up] is turned .

When the pop up screen is dis-

played, use the TUNE knob or

keys ~ to select the

desired mode.

• Operates Phone Screen

❈When a phone is not connected,

the connection screen is displayed.

5. PWR/VOL knob

• Power Knob: Turns power

On/Off by pressing the knob

• Volume Knob: Sets volume by

turning the knob left/right

6. ~ (Preset)

• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies

(channels) or receives saved fre-

quencies (channels)

• CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode

- : Repeat

- : Random

• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and

Menu pop up screen, the number

menu is selected.

• Radio Mode : Automatically search-

es for broadcast frequencies.

• CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes :

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Moves to next or previ-

ous song(file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8

seconds): Rewinds or fast-for-

wards the current song(file)

SEEK

TRACK

PHONE

MEDIA

RADIO

Features of your vehicle

1384

• Each time the button is shortly

pressed (under 0.8 seconds), it

sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟

Screen Off

❈Audio operation is maintained and

only the screen will be turned Off.

In the screen Off state, press any

key to turn the screen On again.

• Radio Mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each broad-

cast for 5 seconds each

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8

seconds): Previews the broad-

casts saved in Preset ~

for 5 seconds each.

❈ Press the key again to

continue listening to the current

frequency.

❈ SiriusXM

Radio does not sup-

port the Preset scan feature.

• CD, USB, iPod mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each song

(file) for 10 seconds each

❈ Press the key again to

continue listening to the current

song (file).

10.

• Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds) : Moves to the Display,

Sound, Phone, System setting

modes

11.

• Displays menus for the current

mode.

12. TUNE knob

• Radio mode : Changes frequency

by turning the knob left/right

• CD, USB, iPod mode: Searches

songs (files) by turning the knob

left/right

❈When the desired song is dis-

played, press the knob to play the

song.

• Moves focus in all selection menus

and selects menus

13.

• Radio Mode

- SiriusXM

RADIO : Category

• MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder

• iPod mode: Moves to parent folder

❈May differ depending on the select-

ed audio.

CAT

FOLDER

SETUP

SCAN

DISP

4139

Features of your vehicle

Audio Head Unit

(For NON Bluetooth model)

14.

• Changes to FM mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the

mode changed in order of FM1 ➟

FM2 ➟ AM.

15.

• Changes to SiriusXM

mode.

SAT

FM/AM

Features of your vehicle

1404

■■

CD Player : AM110MDAN F/L

❋ No will be shown if the SiriusXM

feature is not supported.

4141

Features of your vehicle

■■

CD Player : AM110MDAN F/L

❋ No will be shown if the SiriusXM

feature is not supported.

❋ No logo will be shown if the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology feature is not supported.

Features of your vehicle

1424

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS

AND FUNCTIONS

Audio Head Unit

1. (EJECT)

• Ejects the disc.

• Changes to FM/AM/XM mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of FM1

➟

FM2 ➟ AM

❈In Setup>Display, the radio pop up

screen will be displayed when

[Mode Pop up] is turned .

When the pop up screen is dis-

played, use the TUNE knob or

keys ~ to select the

desired mode.

• Changes to CD, USB, iPod, AUX,

My Music, BT Audio modes.

• Each time the key is pressed, the

mode is changed in order of CD,

USB, iPod, AUX, My Music, BT

Audio modes.

❈In Setup>Display, the media pop

up screen will be displayed when

[Mode Pop up] is turned .

When the pop up screen is dis-

played, use the TUNE knob or

keys ~ to select the

desired mode.

• Operates Phone Screen

❈When a phone is not connected,

the connection screen is displayed.

5. PWR/VOL knob

• Power Knob: Turns power

On/Off by pressing the knob

• Volume Knob: Sets volume by

turning the knob left/right

6. ~ (Preset)

• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies

(channels) or receives saved fre-

quencies (channels)

• CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode

- : Repeat

- : Random

• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and

Menu pop up screen, the number

menu is selected.

• Radio Mode : Automatically search-

es for broadcast frequencies.

• CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes :

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Moves to next or previ-

ous song(file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8

seconds): Rewinds or fast-for-

wards the current song(file)

SEEK

TRACK

PHONE

MEDIA

RADIO

4143

Features of your vehicle

• Each time the button is shortly

pressed (under 0.8 seconds), it

sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟

Screen Off

❈Audio operation is maintained and

only the screen will be turned Off.

In the screen Off state, press any

key to turn the screen On again.

• Radio Mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each broad-

cast for 5 seconds each

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8

seconds): Previews the broad-

casts saved in Preset ~

for 5 seconds each.

❈ Press the key again to

continue listening to the current

frequency.

❈ XM Radio does not support the

Preset scan feature.

• CD, USB, iPod mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each song

(file) for 10 seconds each

❈ Press the key again to

continue listening to the current

song (file).

10.

• Shortly press the key (under 0.8

seconds) : Moves to the Display,

Sound, Phone, System setting

modes

11.

• Displays menus for the current

mode.

12. TUNE knob

• Radio mode : Changes frequency

by turning the knob left/right

• CD, USB, iPod mode: Searches

songs (files) by turning the knob

left/right

❈When the desired song is dis-

played, press the knob to play the

song.

• Moves focus in all selection menus

and selects menus

13.

• MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder

• iPod mode: Moves to parent folder

❈May differ depending on the select-

ed audio.

FOLDER

SETUP

SCAN

DISP

Features of your vehicle

1444

Audio Head Unit

(For NON Bluetooth model)

14.

• Changes to FM mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the

mode changed in order of FM1 ➟

FM2.

15.

• Changes to AM mode.

4145

Features of your vehicle

SETUP

Display Settings

Press the key Select

[Display] through TUNE knob or

key Select menu through

TUNE knob

Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] Changes

selection mode

• During On state, press the

or key to display the mode

change pop up screen.

Text Scroll

[Text Scroll] Set /

• : Maintains scroll

• : Scrolls only one (1) time.

Media Display

When playing an MP3 file, select the

desired display info from ‘Folder/File’

or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.

Off

OffOn

MEDIA

RADIO

OffOn

SETUP

Features of your vehicle

1464

SOUND SETTINGS

Press the key Select

[Sound] through TUNE knob or

key Select menu through

TUNE knob

Sound Settings

This menu allows you to set the

‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound

Fader and Balance.

Select [Sound Settings] Select

menu through TUNE knob Turn

TUNE knob left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the

sound tone.

• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound

fader and balance.

• Default : Restores default settings.

❈Back : While adjusting values,

pressing the TUNE knob will

restore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume

Control

This feature is used to automatically

control the volume level according to

the speed of the vehicle.

Select [SDVC] Turn SDVC On/Off

by pressing the Tune knob.

SETUP

4147

Features of your vehicle

Voice Recognition Volume

Adjusts voice recognition volume.

Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set

volume of

TUNE

knob

Features of your vehicle

1484

SYSTEM SETTINGS

Press the key Select [System]

through tune knob or key Select

menu through TUNE knob

Memory Information

Displays currently used memory and

total system memory.

Select [Memory Information] OK

The currently used memory is dis-

played on the left side while the total

system memory is displayed on the

right side.

Prompt Feedback

This feature is used to change voice

command feedback between Normal

and Expert modes.

Select [Prompt Feedback] Set

through

TUNE

knob

• Normal(On) : This mode is for

beginner users and provides

detailed instructions during voice

command operation.

• Expert(Off) :This mode is for expert

users and omits some information

during voice command operation.

(When using Expert mode, guid-

ance instructions can be heard

through the [Help] or [Menu] com-

mands.

Language

This menu is used to set the display

and voice recognition language.

Select [Language] Set through TUNE

knob

❈The system will reboot after the

language is changed.

❈Language support by region

- English, Francais, Espanol

SETUP

4149

Features of your vehicle

RADIO : FM, AM OR

SIRIUSXM

SEEK

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Changes the frequency.

• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): Automatically search-

es for the next frequency.

Preset SEEK

Press the ~ key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Plays the frequency

saved in the corresponding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding

the desired key from

will save the currently playing

broadcast to the selected key and

sound a BEEP.

SCAN

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): The broadcast frequen-

cy increases and previews each

broadcast for 5 seconds each.

After scanning all frequencies,

returns and plays the current

broadcast frequency.

• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-

casts saved in Preset ~

for 5 seconds each.

Selecting through manual

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to

adjust the frequency.

• FM : Changes by 200KHz

• AM : Changes by 10KHz

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

Features of your vehicle

1504

Within key are the A.Store

(Auto Store) and Info functions.

A.Store

Press the key Set [A.Store]

through TUNE knob or key

Saves broadcasts with superior

reception to ~ keys. If no

frequencies are received, then the

most recently received frequency will

be broadcast.

4151

Features of your vehicle

SIRIUSXM

RADIO

Using XM satellite Radio

Your vehicle is equipped with a 3

month complimentary period of XM

Satellite Radio. XM provides access

to over 130 channels of music, infor-

mation, and entertainment program-

ming.

SEEK

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): select previous or next

channel.

• Pressing and holding the key (over

0.8 seconds): continuously move

to previous or next channel.

❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,

channels are changed within the

current category.

SCAN

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8

seconds): Previews each broad-

cast for 10 seconds each

❈Press the key again to con-

tinue listening to the current fre-

quency

❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,

channels are changed within the

current category.

latest contents & services based on

an open environment.

Using the Room Mirror Key

Selecting the room mirror key will

allow you to make service required

inquiries, POI info searches, and

emergency rescues by connecting to

the Blue Link

Center.

Such features can be used only after

subscribing to the Blue Link

service.

➀ (Blue Link

Center)

Makes requests for Blue Link

serv-

ice related inquiries and consulta-

tions.

A call is connected to the Blue Link

service center employee.

Re-pressing the key will end the call.

This feature does not operate when

you are on a Bluetooth

phone call.

➁ (Blue Link

for POI)

• Blue Link

for Voice command

Starts Blue Link

voice command.

Voice receiving voice guidance,

shortly press the button to convert to

voice command mode. Press and

hold the button to end voice com-

mand.

• TBT VR Commands

1. Navigate to

“Navigate to” voice command is used

to request the download of route

data for a new destination, saved

destinations, daily routes and previ-

ous destinations.

2. Save Destination

“Save Destination” VR command is

used to assign a voice tag to the last

downloaded destination and store it

in a destination directory.

NOTE:

The Turn by Turn(TBT) feature sup-

ports the store of ten(10) destina-

tions in the TBT destinations

directory.

Features of your vehicle

3674

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP 8/28/2014 5:29 PM Page 367

3. Route Preview

“Route Preview”VR command allows

the user to preview the route instruc-

tions (upcoming maneuver instruc-

tions) at any time during the route

guidance.

4. Destinations List

“Destinations List” VR command

allows the user to preview and delete

the stored destinations with their

associated voice tags in the Turn by

Turn destinations directory.

5. Voice Guidance

“Voice Guidance”VR command allows

the user to mute/unmute the Turn by

Turn(TBT) direction announcements.

6. Suspend Route

“Suspend Route” VR command

allows the user to suspend and

pause Turn by Turn(TBT) route guid-

ance while in the guidance mode.

7. Resume Route

“Resume Route” VR command

allows the user to resume Turn by

Turn(TBT) route guidance.

➂ (Blue Link

for SOS)

In the case of an emergency,

requests for help to the Blue Link

center.

Call is connected to the Blue Link

emergency rescue center. Re-press-

ing the key will end the call.

If already on a Bluetooth

phone call,

the call will end to connect you to the

Blue Link

Emergency Rescue

Center.

CAUTION

• You cannot talk simultaneous-

ly on the Bluetooth

phone

and Blue Link

phone.

• While on a Bluetooth

call,

pressing the key or

key will display a message

indicating that you are cur-

rently on a call.

• A message will be displayed if

you receive a Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

call while already on a Blue

Link

call. At this time, press

the key on the steering

wheel remote controller to

accept the call. The phone bell

will not ring.

4 368

Features of your vehicle

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP 8/28/2014 5:29 PM Page 368

Eco Coach

• What is Eco Coach?

Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach com-

pares your fuel economy against the

government tested average (EPA) or

other similar Hyundai models (com-

munity), based on your preference.

Each month, or after every tank fill

up, Eco Coach rates your extended

average and gives you a reward star

if you best the average.

See your My Hyundai web page for

more information.

• What does the bar graph and hori-

zontal line mean?

The horizontal line is adjusted once

per month or at each tank full, based

on your preference; it represents the

EPA combined average or communi-

ty average fuel economy target.

• What is My Eco MPG?

Your actual fuel economy average

over 2.5 minutes.

This value is also shown in bar graph

as your “now” rating.

• What are Eco Rewards?

If you beat the average (the EPA or

community), you will receive an Eco

Reward point.

See your my Hyundai web page for

more information.

[Eco Driving] will not operate if the

vehicle ignition is not turned on.

Please operate with the ignition

turned on.

Features of your vehicle

3694

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP 8/28/2014 5:29 PM Page 369

Turn by Turn

The Turn by Turn feature can be used

through Blue Link

1.Direction Indicator Image

2.Remaining distance until next point

3.The Count bar is divided into a

total of 9 levels.

9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi

7 Level 0.3mi 6 Level 0.2mi

5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft

3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft

1 Level 100ft

4.Next Street name

5.Distance to destination

6.Expected Time Arrival

7. Current Street name

❈ For information on specific

Blue Link

operations, please refer

to a separate manual.

4 370

Features of your vehicle

UD(FL) HMA 4C(254~AUDIO2).QXP 8/28/2014 5:29 PM Page 370

Driving your vehicle

Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

• Before entering the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

• Key ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

• Engine Start/Stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

• Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

• Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

• Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

• Disc brakes wear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

• Anti-lock Brake System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

• Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

• Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

• Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Driving assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

• Active ECO system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

• Snow or icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-53

• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system . . 5-53

• Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-54

• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

• Don't place foreign objects or materials in the

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

• Tire loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 8/6/2014 12:26 PM Page 1

Driving your vehicle

WARNING

Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.

Do not inhale engine exhaust.

If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause

unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If

you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the

vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only

long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.

Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle , be sure to do so only in an

open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

Keep the air intakes clear.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield

clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.

If you must drive with the trunk open:

Close all windows.

Open instrument panel air vents.

Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 2

Before entering the vehicle

• Be sure all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean

and unobstructed.

• Remove frost, snow, or ice.

• Visually check the tires for uneven

wear and damage.

• Check under the vehicle for any

sign of leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles

behind you if you intend to back up.

Before starting

• Make sure the hood, the trunk, and

the doors are securely closed and

locked.

• Adjust the position of the seat and

steering wheel.

• Adjust the inside and outside

rearview mirrors.

• Verify all the lights work.

• Fasten your seatbelt. Check that all

passengers have fastened their

seatbelts.

• Check the gauges and indicators in

the instrument panel and the mes-

sages on the instrument display

when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

• Check that any items you are car-

rying are stored properly or fas-

tened down securely.

Driving your vehicle

WARNING - CALIFORNIA

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide vari-

ety of automobile components

including components found in

the interior furnishings in a

vehicle, contain or emit harmful

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and

birth defects and reproductive

harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and cer-

tain products of components

contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and birth

defects or other reproductive

harm.

BEFORE DRIVING

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 3

Driving your vehicle

WARNING

NEVER drink or take drugs and

drive. Drinking or taking drugs

and driving is dangerous and

may result in an accident and

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH.

Drunk driving is the number

one contributor to the highway

death toll each year. Even a

small amount of alcohol will

affect your reflexes, percep-

tions and judgment. Just one

drink can reduce your ability to

respond to changing conditions

and emergencies and your reac-

tion time gets worse with each

additional drink.

Driving while under the influ-

ence of drugs is as dangerous

or more dangerous than driving

under the influence of alcohol.

(Continued)

You are much more likely to

have a serious accident if you

drink or take drugs and drive. If

you are drinking or taking

drugs, don’t drive. Do not ride

with a driver who has been

drinking or taking drugs.

Choose a designated driver or

call a taxi.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-

lowing precautions:

• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.

All passengers must be prop-

erly belted whenever the vehi-

cle is moving. For more infor-

mation, refer to “Seat Belts” in

chapter 3.

• Always drive defensively.

Assume other drivers or

pedestrians may be careless

and make mistakes.

• Stay focused on the task of

driving. Driver distraction can

cause accidents.

• Leave plenty of space

between you and the vehicle

in front of you.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 4

Key ignition switch

Whenever the front door is opened,

the ignition switch will illuminate, pro-

vided the ignition switch is not in the

ON position. The light will go off

immediately when the ignition switch

is turned on or go off after about 30

seconds when the door is closed. (if

equipped)

IGNITION SWITCH

Driving your vehicle

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-

lowing precautions:

• NEVER allow children or any

person who is unfamiliar with

the vehicle to touch the igni-

tion switch or related parts.

Unexpected and sudden vehi-

cle movement can occur.

• NEVER reach through the

steering wheel for the ignition

switch, or any other control,

while the vehicle is in motion.

The presence of your hand or

arm in this area may cause a

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident.

OTF050001

OUN036002

ACC

START

LOCK

PUSH

WARNING

• NEVER turn the ignition

switch to the LOCK or ACC

position while the vehicle is in

motion except in an emer-

gency. This will result in the

engine turning off and loss of

power assist for the steering

and brake systems. This may

lead to loss of directional con-

trol and braking function,

which could cause an acci-

dent.

(Continued)

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 5

Driving your vehicle

(Continued)

• Before leaving the driver’s

seat, always make sure the

shift lever is in 1st gear (for

manual transaxle vehicle) or P

(Park, for automatic transaxle

vehicle) position, apply the

parking brake, and turn igni-

tion switch to the LOCK posi-

tion.

Unexpected vehicle move-

ment may occur if these pre-

cautions are not followed.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 6

Driving your vehicle

Key ignition switch positions

Switch

Position

Action Notes

LOCK

To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the key in

slightly at the ACC position and turn the key towards the LOCK

position.

The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.

The steering wheel locks to protect the vehi-

cle from theft. (if equipped)

ACC

Electrical accessories are usable. The steering wheel unlocks.

If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition

switch to the ACC position, turn the key

while turning the steering wheel right and

left to release tension.

This is the normal key position when the engine has started.

All features and accessories are usable.

The warning lights can be checked when you turn the ignition

switch from ACC to ON.

Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON

position when the engine is not running to

prevent the battery from discharging.

START

To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START position.

The switch returns to the ON position when you let go of the key.

The engine will crank until you release the

key.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 7

Driving your vehicle

Starting the engine

Vehicle with manual transaxle:

1.Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2.Make sure the shift lever is in neu-

tral.

3.Depress the clutch and brake ped-

als.

4.Turn the ignition switch to the

START position. Hold the key

(maximum of 10 seconds) until the

engine starts and release it.

Vehicle with automatic transaxle:

1.Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2.Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

3.Depress the brake pedal.

4.Turn the ignition switch to the

START position. Hold the key

(maximum of 10 seconds) until the

engine starts and release it.

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate

shoes when operating your

vehicle. Unsuitable shoes,

such as high heels, ski boots,

sandals, flip-flops, etc., may

interfere with your ability to

use the brake, accelerator and

clutch pedals.

• Do not start the vehicle with the

accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move and lead

to an accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is

normal. The vehicle may sud-

denly move if the brake padel

is released when the rpm is

high.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 8

Driving your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

• Do not wait for the engine to warm

up while the vehicle remains sta-

tionary.

Start driving at moderate engine

speeds. (Steep accelerating and

decelerating should be avoided.)

• Always start the vehicle with your

foot on the brake pedal. Do not

depress the accelerator while

starting the vehicle. Do not race

the engine while warming it up.

Engine Start/Stop button

Whenever the front door is opened,

the Engine Start/Stop button will illu-

minate and will go off 30 seconds

after the door is closed.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the vehi-

cle:

• Do not hold the ignition key in

the START position for more

than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10

seconds before trying again.

• Do not turn the ignition switch

to the START position with the

engine running. It may dam-

age the starter.

• If traffic and road conditions

permit, you may put the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) posi-

tion while the vehicle is still

moving and turn the ignition

switch to the START position

in an attempt to restart the

engine.

• Do not push or tow your vehi-

cle to start the engine.

OMD054005

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 9

Driving your vehicle

105

WARNING

To turn the engine off in an

emergency:

Press and hold the Engine

Start/Stop button for more than

two seconds OR Rapidly press

and release the Engine

Start/Stop button three times

(within three seconds).

If the vehicle is still moving, you

can restart the engine without

depressing the brake pedal by

pressing the Engine Start/Stop

button with the shift lever in the

N (Neutral) position.

WARNING

• NEVER press the Engine

Start/Stop button while the

vehicle is in motion except in

an emergency. This will result

in the engine turning off and

loss of power assist for the

steering and brake systems.

This may lead to loss of direc-

tional control and braking

function, which could cause

an accident.

• Before leaving the driver’s

seat, always make sure the

shift lever is in the P (Park)

position, set the parking

brake, press the Engine

Start/Stop button to the OFF

position, and take the Smart

Key with you. Unexpected

vehicle movement may occur

if these precautions are not

followed.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 10

511

Driving your vehicle

Engine Stop/Start button positions

- Vehicle with manual transaxle

Button Position Action Notes

OFF

To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and

then press the Engine Start/Stop button.

Not illuminated

ACC

• Press the Engine Start/Stop button when

the button is in the OFF position without

depressing the clutch pedal.

• Electrical accessories are usable.

If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the

ACC position for more than one hour, the bat-

tery power will turn off automatically to prevent

the battery from discharging.

Orange indicator

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 11

Driving your vehicle

125

Button Position Action Notes

• Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it

is in the ACC position without depressing

the clutch pedal.

• The warning lights can be checked before

the engine is started.

If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in

the ON position for more than one hour, the

battery power will turn off automatically to

prevent the battery from discharging.

Blue indicator

START

To start the engine, depress the clutch and

brake pedals and press the Engine Start/

Stop button with the shift lever in neutral.

If you press the Engine Start/Stop button

without depressing the clutch pedal, the

engine does not start and the Engine

Start/Stop button changes as follows:

OFF

→→

ACC

→→

OFF

Not illuminated

- Vehicle with manual transaxle

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 12

513

Driving your vehicle

Engine Stop/Start button positions

- Vehicle with automatic transaxle

Button Position Action Notes

OFF

To turn off the engine, press the Engine

Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).

When you press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton without the shift lever in P (Park), the

Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to

the OFF position, but turns to the ACC posi-

tion.

Not illuminated

ACC

• Press the Engine Start/Stop button when

the button is in the OFF position without

depressing the brake pedal.

• Electrical accessories are usable.

If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in

the ACC position for more than one hour, the

battery power will turn off automatically to

prevent the battery from discharging.

Orange indicator

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 13

Driving your vehicle

145

- Vehicle with automatic transaxle

Button Position Action Notes

• Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it

is in the ACC position without depressing

the brake pedal.

• The warning lights can be checked before

the engine is started.

If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in

the ON position for more than one hour, the

battery power will turn off automatically to

prevent the battery from discharging.

Blue indicator

START

To start the engine, depress the brake pedal

and press the Engine Start/Stop button with

the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N

(Neutral) position.

For your safety, start the engine with the

shift lever in the P (Park) position.

If you press the Engine Start/Stop button

without depressing the brake pedal, the

engine does not start and the Engine

Start/Stop button changes as follows:

OFF

→→

ACC

→→

OFF

Not illuminated

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 14

515

Driving your vehicle

Starting the engine

✽✽

NOTICE

• The engine will start by pressing

the Engine Start/Stop button, only

when the smart key is in the vehi-

cle.

• Even if the smart key is in the

vehicle, if it is far away from the

driver, the engine may not start.

• When the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton is in the ACC or ON position,

if any door is open, the system

checks for the smart key. If the

smart key is not in the vehicle, the

" " indicator will blink, and if

all doors are closed, the chime will

also sound for about 5 seconds.

The indicator will turn off while

the vehicle is moving. Keep the

smart key in the vehicle when

using the ACC position or if the

vehicle engine is ON.

Vehicle with manual transaxle:

1.Always carry the smart key with

you.

2.Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

3.Make sure the shift lever is in neu-

tral.

4.Depress the clutch and brake ped-

als.

5.Press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton.

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate

shoes when operating your

vehicle. Unsuitable shoes,

such as high heels, ski boots,

sandals, flip-flops, etc., may

interfere with your ability to

use the brake, accelerator and

clutch pedals.

• Do not start the vehicle with the

accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move and lead

to an accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is

normal. The vehicle may sud-

denly move if the brake pedal

is released when the rpm is

high.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 15

Driving your vehicle

165

Vehicle with automatic transaxle:

1.Always carry the smart key with

you.

2.Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

3.Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

4.Depress the brake pedal.

5 Press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Do not wait for the engine to warm

up while the vehicle remains sta-

tionary.

Start driving at moderate engine

speeds. (Steep accelerating and

decelerating should be avoided.)

• Always start the vehicle with your

foot on the brake pedal. Do not

depress the accelerator while

starting the vehicle. Do not race

the engine while warming it up.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the vehi-

cle:

• If the engine stalls while you

are in motion, do not attempt

to move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position.

If traffic and road conditions

permit, you may put the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) posi-

tion while the vehicle is still

moving and press the Engine

Start/Stop button in an

attempt to restart the engine.

• Do not push or tow your vehi-

cle to start the engine.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the vehi-

cle:

Do not press the Engine

Start/Stop button for more than

10 seconds except when the

stop lamp fuse is blown.

When the stop lamp fuse is

blown, you can't start the engine

normally. Replace the fuse with

a new one. If you are not able to

replace the fuse, you can start

the engine by pressing and

holding the Engine Start/Stop

button for 10 seconds with the

Engine Start/Stop button in the

ACC position.

For your safety always depress

the brake and/or clutch pedal

before starting the engine.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:21 PM Page 16

517

Driving your vehicle

✽✽

NOTICE

If the smart key battery is weak or

the smart key does not work cor-

rectly, you can start the engine by

pressing the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton with the smart key in the direc-

tion of the picture above.

OMD054013L

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 17

Driving your vehicle

185

Manual transaxle operation

The manual transaxle has 6 forward

gears. The transaxle is fully synchro-

nized in all forward gears so shifting

to either a higher or a lower gear is

easily accomplished.

To shift to R (Reverse), make sure

the vehicle has completely stopped,

and then move the shift lever to neu-

tral before moving into R (Reverse).

When you've come to a complete

stop and it's hard to shift into 1st gear

or R (Reverse):

1.Put the shift lever in neutral and

release the clutch pedal.

2.Depress the clutch pedal, and then

shift into first or R (Reverse) gear.

✽✽

NOTICE

During cold weather, shifting may

be difficult until the transaxle lubri-

cant has warmed up.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE

OMD050009

The shift lever can be moved without

pressing the button (1).

The button (1) must be pressed while

moving the shift lever to R (Reverse).

WARNING

Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in 1st gear when the vehicle

is parked on a uphill and in R

(Reverse) on a downhill, set the

parking brake, and place the

ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF

position. Unexpected vehicle

movement may occur if these

precautions are not followed.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 18

519

Driving your vehicle

Using the clutch

The clutch pedal should be

depressed all the way to the floor

before:

- Starting the engine

The engine will not start without

depressing the clutch pedal.

- Shifting

When releasing the clutch pedal,

release it slowly. The clutch pedal

should always be released while

driving.

Downshifting

Downshift when you must slow down

in heavy traffic or drive up a steep hill

to prevent engine load.

Also, downshifting reduces the

chance of stalling and can accelerate

when you need to increase your

speed again.

When the vehicle is going downhill,

downshifting helps maintain safe

speed by providing brake power from

the engine and enables less wear on

the brakes.

CAUTION

To prevent unnecessary wear or

damage to the clutch:

• Do not rest your foot on the

clutch pedal while driving.

• Do not hold the vehicle with

the clutch on an incline, while

waiting for the traffic light, etc.

• Always depress the clutch

pedal down fully to prevent

noise or damage.

• Do not start with the 2nd (sec-

ond) gear engaged except

when you start on a slippery

road.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 19

Driving your vehicle

205

Good driving practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear

and coast down a hill. This is

extremely dangerous.

• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can

cause the brakes and related parts

to overheat and malfunction.

When you are driving down a long

hill, slow down and shift to a lower

gear. Engine braking will help slow

down the vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to a

lower gear. This will help avoid

over-revving the engine, which can

cause damage.

• Slow down when you encounter

cross winds. This gives you much

better control of your vehicle.

• Be sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before you shift into R

(Reverse) to prevent damage to

the transaxle.

• Exercise extreme caution when

driving on a slippery surface. Be

especially careful when braking,

accelerating or shifting gears. On a

slippery surface, an abrupt change

in vehicle speed can cause the

drive wheels to lose traction and

may cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the

engine, clutch and transaxle:

• When downshifting from 5th

gear to 4th gear, be careful not

to inadvertently push the shift

lever sideways engaging the

2nd gear. A drastic downshift

may cause the engine speed

to increase to the point the

tachometer will enter the red-

zone.

• Do not downshift more than

two gear at a time or down-

shift the gear when the engine

is running at high speed

(5,000 RPM or higher).

WARNING

Do not use the engine brake

(shifting from a higher gear to

lower gear) rapidly on slippery

roads. The vehicle may slip

causing an accident.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 20

521

Driving your vehicle

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.

In a collision, an unbelted

occupant is significantly more

likely to be seriously injured

or killed than a properly belt-

ed occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cor-

nering or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as

sharp lane changes or fast,

sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control

of your vehicle at highway

speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off

the roadway and the driver

over steers to reenter the

roadway.

(Continued)

• In the event your vehicle

leaves the roadway, do not

steer sharply. Instead, slow

down before pulling back into

the travel lanes.

• HYUNDAI recommends you

follow all posted speed limits.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 21

Driving your vehicle

225

Automatic transaxle operation

The automatic transaxle has six for-

ward speeds and one reverse speed.

The individual speeds are selected

automatically in the D (Drive) posi-

tion.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

OMD054010

((

))

((

))

Sports mode

Move shift lever.

Depress the brake pedal, then move shift lever.

Press the shift button, then move shift lever.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death:

• ALWAYS check the surround-

ing areas near your vehicle for

people, especially children,

before shifting a vehicle into

D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’s

seat, always make sure the

shift lever is in the P (Park)

position, then set the parking

brake, and place the ignition

switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-

tion. Unexpected and sudden

vehicle movement can occur

if these precautions are not

followed.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 8/29/2014 2:39 PM Page 22

523

Driving your vehicle

The indicator in the instrument clus-

ter displays the shift lever position

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into P (Park).

To shift from P (Park), you must

depress firmly on the brake pedal

and make sure your foot is off the

accelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above and

still cannot shift the lever out of P

(Park), see “Shift-Lock Release” on

page 5-26.

The shift lever must be in P (Park)

before turning the engine off.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion may

cause you to lose control of

the vehicle.

• After the vehicle has stopped,

always make sure the shift

lever is in P (Park), apply the

parking brake, and turn the

engine off.

• Do not use the P (Park) posi-

tion in place of the parking

brake.

CAUTION

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the

transaxle if you shift into R

(Reverse) while the vehicle is in

motion.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 8/29/2014 2:39 PM Page 23

Driving your vehicle

245

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are not

engaged.

Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart

a stalled engine. Shift into P (Park) if

you need to leave your vehicle for

any reason.

Always depress the brake pedal

when you are shifting from N

(Neutral) to another gear.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position.

The transaxle will automatically shift

through a 6-gear sequence, provid-

ing the best fuel economy and

power.

For extra power when passing anoth-

er vehicle or driving uphill, depress

the accelerator fully. The transaxle

will automatically downshift to the

next lower gear (or gears, as appro-

priate).

Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or

in motion, sports mode is selected by

pushing the shift lever from the D

(Drive) position into the manual gate.

To return to D (Drive) range opera-

tion, push the shift lever back into the

main gate.

WARNING

• Do not shift into gear unless

your foot is firmly on the

brake pedal. Shifting into gear

when the engine is running at

high speed can cause the

vehicle to move very rapidly.

You could lose control of the

vehicle.

• Do not drive with the shift

lever in N (Neutral). The

engine brake will not work

and lead to an accident.

OMD054012

((

))

((

))

Sports mode

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 8/29/2014 2:39 PM Page 24

525

Driving your vehicle

In Sports Mode, moving the shift

lever backwards and forwards will

allow you to select the desired range

of gears for the current driving condi-

tions.

+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once

to shift up one gear.

- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards

once to shift down one

gear.

✽✽

NOTICE

• Only the six forward gears can be

selected. To reverse or park the

vehicle, move the shift lever to the

R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as

required.

• Downshifts are made automatical-

ly when the vehicle slows down.

When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is

automatically selected.

• When the engine rpm approaches

the red zone the transaxle will

upshift automatically.

(Continued)

• If the driver presses the lever to

+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the

transaxle may not make the

requested gear change if the next

gear is outside of the allowable

engine rpm range. The driver

must execute upshifts in accor-

dance with road conditions, taking

care to keep the engine rpms

below the red zone.

• When accelerating from a stop on

a slippery road, push the shift

lever forward into the + (Up) posi-

tion. This causes the transaxle to

shift into the 2nd gear which is

better for smooth driving on a

slippery road. Push the shift lever

to the - (Down) side to shift back to

the 1st gear.

Shift-lock system

For your safety, the automatic

transaxle has a shift-lock system

which prevents shifting the transaxle

from P (Park) into R (Reverse)

unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transaxle from P (Park)

into R (Reverse):

1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2.Start the engine or place the igni-

tion switch in the ON position.

3.Move the shift lever.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 25

Driving your vehicle

265

Shift-lock release

If the shift lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position into R (Reverse)

position with the brake pedal

depressed, continue depressing the

brake, and then do the following:

1.Place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

2.Apply the parking brake.

3.Carefully remove the cap (1) cover-

ing the shift-lock access hole.

4.Insert a screwdriver into the

access hole and press down on

the screwdriver.

5.Move the shift lever while holding

down the screwdriver.

6.Remove the screwdriver from the

shift-lock access hole then install

the cap.

If you need to use the shift-lock

release, have the system inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

immediately.

OMD054031

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 26

527

Driving your vehicle

Ignition key interlock system

The ignition key cannot be removed

unless the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position.

Parking

Always come to a complete stop and

continue to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position, apply the parking brake,

and place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key

with you when exiting the vehicle.

Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other

position with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

• Never move the shift lever into P

(Park) when the vehicle is in

motion.

Be sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before you attempt to shift

into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Do not move the shift lever to N

(Neutral) when driving. Doing so

may result in an accident because

of a loss of engine braking and the

transaxle could be damaged.

• Do not drive with your foot resting

on the brake pedal. Even light, but

consistent pedal pressure can

result in the brakes overheating,

brake wear and possibly even

brake failure.

• When driving in sports mode, slow

down before shifting to a lower gear.

Otherwise, the lower gear may not

be engaged if the engine RPM is

outside of the allowable range.

WARNING

When you stay in the vehicle

with the engine running, be

careful not to depress the accel-

erator pedal for a long period of

time. The engine or exhaust

system may overheat and start

a fire.

The exhaust gas and the

exhaust system are very hot.

Keep away from the exhaust

system components.

Do not stop or park over flam-

mable materials, such as dry

grass, paper or leaves. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 27

Driving your vehicle

285

• Always apply the parking brake

when leaving the vehicle. Do not

depend on placing the transaxle in

P (Park) to keep the vehicle from

moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when

driving on a slippery surface. Be

especially careful when braking,

accelerating or shifting gears. On a

slippery surface, an abrupt change

in vehicle speed can cause the

drive wheels to lose traction and

may cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident

• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothly

depressing and releasing the

accelerator.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.

In a collision, an unbelted

occupant is significantly more

likely to be seriously injured

or killed than a properly belt-

ed occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cor-

nering or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as

sharp lane changes or fast,

sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control

of your vehicle at highway

speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off

the roadway and the driver

over steers to reenter the

roadway.

(Continued)

• In the event your vehicle

leaves the roadway, do not

steer sharply. Instead, slow

down before pulling back into

the travel lanes.

• HYUNDAI recommends you

follow all posted speed limits.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 28

529

Driving your vehicle

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted

brakes that adjust automatically

through normal usage.

If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the brakes will not work.

You can still stop your vehicle by

applying greater force to the brake

pedal than typical. The stopping dis-

tance, however, will be longer than

with power brakes.

When the engine is not running, the

reserve brake power is partially

depleted each time the brake pedal

is applied. Do not pump the brake

pedal when the power assist has

been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when

necessary to maintain steering con-

trol on slippery surfaces.

BRAKING SYSTEM

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

• Do not drive with your foot

resting on the brake pedal.

This will create abnormal high

brake temperatures, exces-

sive brake lining and pad

wear, and increased stopping

distances.

• When descending a long or

steep hill, shift to a lower gear

and avoid continuous applica-

tion of the brakes. Applying

the brakes continuously will

cause the brakes to overheat

and could result in a tempo-

rary loss of braking perform-

ance.

(Continued)

• Wet brakes may impair the

vehicle’s ability to safely slow

down; the vehicle may also

pull to one side when the

brakes are applied. Applying

the brakes lightly will indicate

whether they have been

affected in this way. Always

test your brakes in this fash-

ion after driving through deep

water.To dry the brakes, light-

ly tap the brake pedal to heat

up the brakes while maintain-

ing a safe forward speed until

brake performance returns to

normal. Avoid driving at high

speeds until the brakes func-

tion correctly.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 29

Driving your vehicle

305

Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and

new pads are required, you will hear

a high pitched warning sound from

your front or rear brakes. You may

hear this sound come and go or it

may occur whenever you depress

the brake pedal.

Please remember some driving con-

ditions or climates may cause a

brake squeal when you first apply (or

lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-

mal and does not indicate a problem

with your brakes.

✽✽

NOTICE

Always replace brake pads as com-

plete front or rear axle sets.

Parking brake

Always set the parking brake before

leaving the vehicle, to apply:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Pull up the parking brake lever as far

as possible.

To release:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Slightly pull up the parking brake

lever.

While pressing the release button

(1), lower the parking brake (2).

If the parking brake does not release

or does not release all the way,

have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OMD050014

CAUTION

To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn

brake pads.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-

ate the parking brake while the

vehicle is moving except in an

emergency situation. It could

damage the brake system and

lead to an accident.

OMD050015

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 30

531

Driving your vehicle

Check the Parking

Brake Warning Light by

placing the ignition

switch to the ON posi-

tion (do not start the

engine).

This light will be illuminated when the

parking brake is applied with the igni-

tion switch in the START or ON posi-

tion.

Before driving, be sure the parking

brake is released and the Brake

Warning Light is OFF.

If the Parking Brake Warning Light

remains on after the parking brake is

released while engine is running,

there may be a malfunction in the

brake system. Immediate attention is

necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the

vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-

sible, use extreme caution while

operating the vehicle and only con-

tinue to drive the vehicle until you

can reach a safe location.

WARNING

• Whenever leaving the vehicle

or parking, always come to a

complete stop and continue

to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the

1st gear (for manual transaxle

vehicle) or P (Park, for auto-

matic transaxle vehicle) posi-

tion, then apply the parking

brake, and place the ignition

switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-

tion.

Vehicles with the parking

brake not fully engaged are at

risk for moving inadvertently

and causing injury to yourself

or others.

• NEVER allow anyone who is

unfamiliar with the vehicle to

touch the parking brake. If the

parking brake is released

unintentionally, serious injury

may occur.

• Only release the parking

brake when you are seated

inside the vehicle with your

foot firmly on the brake pedal.

CAUTION

• Do not apply the accelerator

pedal while the parking brake

is engaged. If you depress the

accelerator pedal with the

parking brake engaged, warn-

ing will sound. Damage to the

parking brake may occur.

• Driving with the parking brake

on can overheat the braking

system and cause premature

wear or damage to brake

parts. Make sure the parking

brake is released and the

Brake Warning Light is off

before driving.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 31

Driving your vehicle

325

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

ABS is an electronic braking system

that helps prevent a braking skid.

ABS allows the driver to steer and

brake at the same time.

Using ABS

To obtain the maximum benefit from

your ABS in an emergency situation,

do not attempt to modulate your

brake pressure and do not try to

pump your brakes. Depress your

brake pedal as hard as possible.

When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may lock the

wheels, you may hear sounds from

the brakes, or feel a corresponding

sensation in the brake pedal. This is

normal and it means your ABS is

active.

ABS does not reduce the time or dis-

tance it takes to stop the vehicle.

Always maintain a safe distance from

the vehicle in front of you.

ABS will not prevent a skid that

results from sudden changes in

direction, such as trying to take a

corner too fast or making a sudden

lane change. Always drive at a safe

speed for the road and weather con-

ditions.

WARNING

An Anti-Lock Braking System

(ABS) or an Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system will not

prevent accidents due to

improper or dangerous driving

maneuvers. Even though vehi-

cle control is improved during

emergency braking, always

maintain a safe distance

between you and objects ahead

of you. Vehicle speeds should

always be reduced during

extreme road conditions. The

braking distance for cars

equipped with ABS or ESC may

be longer than for those without

these systems in the following

road conditions.

(Continued)

Drive your vehicle at reduced

speeds during the following

conditions:

• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-

ered roads.

• On roads where the road sur-

face is pitted or has different

surface height.

• Tire chains are installed on

your vehicle.

The safety features of an ABS

or ESC equipped vehicle should

not be tested by high speed

driving or cornering. This could

endanger the safety of yourself

or others.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 32

533

Driving your vehicle

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili-

ty. Always steer moderately when

braking hard. Severe or sharp steer-

ing wheel movement can still cause

your vehicle to veer into oncoming

traffic or off the road.

On loose or uneven road surfaces,

operation of the anti-lock brake sys-

tem may result in a longer stopping

distance than for vehicles equipped

with a conventional brake system.

The ABS warning light ( ) will stay

on for several seconds after the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

During that time, the ABS will go

through self-diagnosis and the light

will go off if everything is normal. If

the light stays on, you may have a

problem with your ABS. Contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon

as possible.

✽✽

NOTICE

When you jump start your vehicle

because of a drained battery, the

ABS warning light ( ) may turn

on at the same time. This happens

because of the low battery voltage. It

does not mean your ABS is malfunc-

tioning. Have the battery recharged

before driving the vehicle.

WARNING

If the ABS warning light ( ) is

on and stays on, you may have

a problem with the ABS. Your

power brakes will work normal-

ly. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death, contact your

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as

possible.

CAUTION

When you drive on a road hav-

ing poor traction, such as an icy

road, and apply your brakes

continuously, the ABS will be

active continuously and the

ABS warning light ( ) may

illuminate. Pull your car over to

a safe place and turn the engine

off.

Restart the engine. If the ABS

warning light is off, then your

ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a

problem with your ABS system.

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 33

Driving your vehicle

345

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)

The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system helps to stabilize the

vehicle during cornering maneuvers.

ESC checks where you are steering

and where the vehicle is actually

going. ESC applies braking pressure

to any one of the vehicle’s brakes

and intervenes in the engine man-

agement system to assist the driver

with keeping the vehicle on the

intended path. It is not a substitute

for safe driving practices. Always

adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

WARNING

Never drive too fast for the road

conditions or too quickly when

cornering. The ESC system will

not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt

maneuvers, and hydroplaning

on wet surfaces can result in

severe accidents.

OMD050016

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 34

535

Driving your vehicle

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the ESC and the ESC OFF

indicator lights illuminate for approxi-

mately three seconds and goes off,

then the ESC is turned on.

If this light stays on, your vehicle may

have a malfunction with the ESC

system. Have your vehicle checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

as soon as possible.

When operating

When the ESC is in opera-

tion, the ESC indicator light

blinks:

• When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may lock the

wheels, you may hear sounds from

the brakes, or feel a corresponding

sensation in the brake pedal. This

is normal and it means your ESC is

active.

• When the ESC activates, the

engine may not respond to the

accelerator as it does under rou-

tine conditions.

• If the Cruise Control was in use

when the ESC activates, the cruise

control automatically disengages.

The Cruise Control can be reen-

gaged when the road conditions

allow. See “Cruise Control System”

later in this chapter.

• When moving out of the mud or

driving on a slippery road, the

engine rpm (revolutions per

minute) may not increase even if

you press the accelerator pedal

deeply. This is to maintain the sta-

bility and traction of the vehicle and

does not indicate a problem.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 35

Driving your vehicle

365

ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :

• State 1

Press the ESC OFF button shortly

(ESC OFF indicator light illumi-

nates). At this state, the engine con-

trol function does not operate. In

other words, the traction control

function does not operate but only

the brake control function operates.

• State 2

Press the ESC OFF button for more

than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator

light illuminates and ESC OFF warn-

ing chime will sound. At this state,

the engine control function and brake

control function does not operate. In

other words, the vehicle stability con-

trol function does not operate any

more.

If the ignition switch is placed to the

LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,

ESC remains off. Upon restarting the

engine, the ESC will automatically

turn on again.

Indicator lights

When the ignition switch is placed to

the ON position, the ESC indicator

light illuminates, then goes off if the

ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks when-

ever the ESC is operating.

If ESC indicator light stays on, your

vehicle may have a malfunction with

the ESC system. When this warning

light illuminates, have the vehicle

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes

on when the ESC is turned off with

the button.

■ ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 36

537

Driving your vehicle

ESC OFF usage

When Driving

The ESC OFF mode should only be

used briefly to help free the vehicle if

stuck in snow or mud by temporarily

stopping operation of the ESC to

maintain wheel torque.

To turn ESC off while driving, press

the ESC OFF button while driving on

a flat road surface.

✽✽

NOTICE

Turning the ESC OFF does not

affect ABS or standard brake sys-

tem operation.

CAUTION

Driving with varying tire or

wheel sizes may cause the ESC

system to malfunction. When

replacing tires, make sure they

are the same size as your origi-

nal tires for this vehicle.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the

transaxle:

• Do not allow wheel(s) of one

axle to spin excessively while

the ESC, ABS, and brake

warning lights are displayed.

The repairs would not be cov-

ered by the vehicle warranty.

Reduce engine power and do

not spin the wheel(s) exces-

sively while these lights are

displayed.

• When operating the vehicle on

a dynamometer, ensure the

ESC is turned off (ESC OFF

light illuminated).

WARNING

When the ESC is blinking, this

indicates the ESC is active:

Drive slowly and NEVER

attempt to accelerate. NEVER

press the ESC OFF button while

the ESC indicator light is blink-

ing or you may lose control of

the vehicle resulting in an acci-

dent.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 37

Driving your vehicle

385

Vehicle Stability Management

(if equipped)

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM)

helps ensure the vehicle stays stable

when accelerating or braking sud-

denly on wet, slippery and rough

roads where traction over the four

tires can suddenly become uneven.

VSM operation

VSM ON condition

The VSM operates when:

• The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) is on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately

above 9mph (15 km/h) on curve

roads.

• Vehicle speed is approximately

above 18 mph (30 km/h) when the

vehicle is braking on rough roads.

When operating

When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may activate the

ESC, you may hear sounds from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sen-

sation in the brake pedal.This is nor-

mal and it means your VSM is active.

✽✽

NOTICE

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on bank road such as gra-

dient or incline

• Driving rearward.

• ESC OFF indicator light is on.

• EPS (Electric Power Steering)

warning light ( ) is on.

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when using the Vehicle Stability

Management (VSM):

• ALWAYS check the speed and

the distance to the vehicle

ahead. The VSM is not a sub-

stitute for safe driving prac-

tices.

• Never drive too fast for the

road conditions.The VSM sys-

tem will not prevent acci-

dents. Excessive speed in bad

weather, slippery and uneven

roads can result in severe

accidents.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 38

539

Driving your vehicle

VSM OFF condition

To cancel VSM operation, press the

ESC OFF button. ESC OFF indicator

light ( ) will illuminate.

To turn on VSM, press the ESC OFF

button again.The ESC OFF indicator

light will go out.

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

(if equipped)

The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

helps prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards when starting a vehicle

from a stop on a hill. The system

operates the brakes automatically for

approximately 2 seconds and releas-

es the brake when the accelerator

pedal is depressed or after 2 sec-

onds.

✽✽

NOTICE

• The HAC does not operate when

the shift lever is in P (Park) or N

(Neutral)

• The HAC activates even though

the ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is off but does not acti-

vate when the ESC has malfunc-

tioned.

WARNING

If ESC indicator light ( ) or

EPS warning light ( ) stays

on, your vehicle may have a

malfunction with the VSM sys-

tem.When the warning light illu-

minates have the vehicle

checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as

possible.

CAUTION

Driving with varying tire or

wheel sizes may cause the ESC

system to malfunction. When

replacing tires, make sure they

are the same size as your origi-

nal tires for this vehicle.

WARNING

Always be ready to depress the

accelerator pedal when starting

off on a incline. The HAC acti-

vates only for approximately 2

seconds.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 39

Driving your vehicle

405

Good braking practices

Wet brakes can be dangerous! The

brakes may get wet if the vehicle is

driven through standing water or if it

is washed. Your vehicle will not stop

as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet

brakes may cause the vehicle to pull

to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes

lightly until the braking action returns

to normal, taking care to keep the

vehicle under control at all times. If

the braking action does not return to

normal, stop as soon as it is safe to

do so and call an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

DO NOT drive with your foot resting

on the brake pedal. Even light, but

constant pedal pressure can result in

the brakes overheating, brake wear,

and possibly even brake failure.

If a tire goes flat while you are driv-

ing, apply the brakes gently and

keep the vehicle pointed straight

ahead while you slow down. When

you are moving slowly enough for it

to be safe to do so, pull off the road

and stop in a safe location.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake

pedal when the vehicle is stopped to

prevent the vehicle from rolling for-

ward.

WARNING

Whenever leaving the vehicle or

parking, always come to a com-

plete stop and continue to

depress the brake pedal. Move

the shift lever into the 1st gear

(for manual transaxle vehicle) or

P (Park, for automatic transaxle

vehicle) position, then apply the

parking brake, and place the

ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF

position.

Vehicles with the parking brake

not fully engaged are at risk for

moving inadvertently and caus-

ing injury to yourself or others.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 40

541

Driving your vehicle

DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM

Active ECO system

Active ECO operation

Active ECO helps improve fuel effi-

ciency by controlling the engine and

transaxle. Fuel-efficiency is deter-

mined by the driver's driving habits

and road conditions.

• When the Active ECO button is

pressed the ECO indicator (green)

will illuminate to show that the

Active ECO is operating.

• When the Active ECO is activated,

it does not turn off even though the

engine is restarted again. To turn

off the system, press the active

ECO button again.

• If Active ECO is turned off, it will

return to normal mode.

When Active ECO is activated :

• Engine sound may change.

• Vehicle speed may slightly be

reduced.

• Air conditioner performance may

be affected.

✽✽

NOTICE

Active ECO is designed on the

assumption of light to mild throttle

driving style to control engine and

transaxle in order to optimize fuel

economy. A person with an aggres-

sive throttle driving style may find

the engine performance in Active

ECO on mode to be unsatisfactory,

and thus may not realize any fuel

economy gain. In such an aggressive

driver style case, it would be better

to keep Active ECO off for best fuel

economy. For best results, it is rec-

ommended to compare the perform-

ance of both modes to determine

which is more effective for your

driving style.

OMD050030

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 41

Driving your vehicle

425

Limitation of Active ECO opera-

tion

If the following conditions occur while

Active ECO is operating, the effec-

tiveness of the Active ECO may be

limited even though the indicator is

still on.

• When coolant temperature is low:

The system will be limited until

engine temperature becomes nor-

mal.

• When driving up a hill:

The system will be limited to gain

power when driving uphill because

engine torque is required.

• When using sports mode:

The system will be limited accord-

ing to shift request.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 42

543

Driving your vehicle

Cruise control operation

1.CRUISE indicator

2.SET indicator

The cruise control system allows you

to drive at speeds above 20 mph (30

km/h) without depressing the accel-

erator pedal.

Cruise control switch

CRUISE (ON/OFF):

Turns cruise control system on or off.

CANCEL:

Cancels cruise control operation.

RES+:

Resumes or increases speed.

SET-:

Sets or decreases speed.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OMD050032N

OMD051033N

OMD051033N-1

■ Type A

■ Type B

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

• If the cruise control is left on,

(CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument cluster illuminat-

ed) the cruise control can be

activated unintentionally.

Keep the cruise control sys-

tem off (CRUISE indicator

light OFF) when the cruise

control is not in use, to avoid

inadvertently setting a speed.

• Use the cruise control system

only when traveling on open

highways in good weather.

• Do not use the cruise control

when it may not be safe to

keep the vehicle at a constant

speed:

- Driving in heavy or varying

speed traffic.

- On slippery (rainy, icy or

snow covered) roads.

- Hilly or winding roads.

- Very windy areas.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:22 PM Page 43

Driving your vehicle

445

To set cruise control speed

1.Push the CRUISE (ON/OFF) but-

ton on the steering wheel to turn

the system on. The CRUISE indi-

cator will illuminate.

2.Accelerate to the desired speed,

which must be more than 20 mph

(30 km/h).

3.Push the SET- switch, and release

it. The SET indicator light will illu-

minate.

4.Release the accelerator pedal.

✽✽

NOTICE

The vehicle may slow down or speed

up slightly while going uphill or

downhill.

To increase cruise control speed

• Push the RES+ switch and hold it,

while monitoring the SET speed on

the instrument cluster. Release the

switch when the desired speed is

shown and the vehicle will acceler-

ate to that speed.

OMD050036N

OUD052036N

■ Type A

■ Type B

OMD050033N

OUD052033N

■ Type A

■ Type B

OMD050035N

OUD052035N

■ Type A

■ Type B

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:23 PM Page 44

545

Driving your vehicle

• Push the RES+ switch and release

it immediately. The cruising speed

will increase 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

each time the switch is operated in

this manner.

• Depress the accelerator pedal.

When the vehicle attains the

desired speed, push the SET-

switch.

To decrease cruise control speed

• Push the SET- switch and hold it.

Your vehicle will gradually slow

down. Release the switch at the

speed you want to maintain.

• Push the SET- switch and release

it immediately. The cruising speed

will decrease 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h)

each time the switch is operated in

this manner.

• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired

speed, push the SET- switch.

To temporarily accelerate with the

cruise control ON

Depress the accelerator pedal.When

you take your foot off the accelerator,

the vehicle will return to the previ-

ously set speed.

If you push the SET- switch. at the

increased speed, the cruise control

will maintain the increased speed.

OMD050036N

OUD052036N

■ Type A

■ Type B

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:23 PM Page 45

Driving your vehicle

465

Cruise control will be canceled

when:

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Pressing the CANCEL switch

located on the steering wheel.

• Pushing the CRUISE (ON/OFF)

button. Both the CRUISE indicator

and the SET indicator will turn

OFF.

• Depressing the clutch pedal.

(for manual transaxle vehicle)

• Moving the shift lever into N

(Neutral).

(for automatic transaxle vehicle)

• Decreasing the vehicle speed

lower than the memory speed by

12 mph (20 km/h).

• Decreasing the vehicle speed to

less than approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h).

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is operating. (if equipped)

• Downshifting to the 2nd gear with

sports mode.

✽✽

NOTICE

Each of the previous actions will

cancel cruise control operation (the

SET indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster will go off), but only

pressing the CRUISE (ON/OFF)

button will turn the system off. If

you wish to resume cruise control

operation, push the RES+ switch

located on your steering wheel. You

will return to your previously preset

speed, unless the system was turned

off using the CRUISE (ON/OFF)

button.

OMD050034N

OUD052034N

■ Type A

■ Type B

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:23 PM Page 46

547

Driving your vehicle

To resume preset cruising speed

Push the RES+ switch. If the vehicle

speed is over 20 mph (30 km/h), the

vehicle will resume the preset speed.

To turn cruise control off

• Push the CRUISE (ON/OFF) but-

ton (the CRUISE indicator light will

go off).

• Turn the engine OFF.

OMD050035N

OUD052035N

■ Type A

■ Type B

OMD050033N

OUD052033N

■ Type A

■ Type B

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:23 PM Page 47

Driving your vehicle

485

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions

are encountered such as water,

snow, ice, mud or sand:

Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking.

Avoid sudden movements in braking

or steering.

If stuck in snow, mud, or sand, use

second gear. Accelerate slowly to

avoid spinning the drive wheels.

Use sand, rock salt, or other non-slip

material under the drive wheels to

provide traction when stalled in ice,

snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle

to free it from snow, sand, or mud,

first turn the steering wheel right and

left to clear the area around your

front wheels. Then, shift back and

forth between 1st and R (Reverse,

for manual transaxle vehicle) or R

(Reverse) and a forward gear (for

automatic transaxle vehicle). Try to

avoid spinning the wheels, and do

not race the engine.

To prevent transaxle wear, wait until

the wheels stop spinning before

shifting gears. Release the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting, and press

lightly on the accelerator pedal while

the transaxle is in gear. Slowly spin-

ning the wheels in forward and

reverse directions causes a rocking

motion that may free the vehicle.

WARNING

Downshifting with an automatic

transaxle, while driving on slip-

pery surfaces can cause an

accident.The sudden change in

tire speed could cause the tires

to skid. Be careful when down-

shifting on slippery surfaces.

WARNING

If the tires spin at high speed

the tires can explode, and you

or others may be injured. Do not

attempt this procedure if people

or objects are anywhere near

the vehicle.

The vehicle can overheat caus-

ing an engine compartment fire

or other damage. Spin the

wheels as little as possible and

avoid spinning the wheels at

speeds over 35 mph (56 km/h)

as indicated on the speedome-

ter.

CAUTION

If you are still stuck after rock-

ing the vehicle a few times, have

the vehicle pulled out by a tow

vehicle to avoid engine over-

heating, possible damage to the

transaxle, and tire damage. See

“Towing” in chapter 6.

To prevent damage to the

transaxle, turn OFF the ESC

prior to rocking the vehicle.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:23 PM Page 48

549

Driving your vehicle

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in

corners, especially when roads are

wet. Ideally, corners should always

be taken under gentle acceleration.

Driving at night

Night driving presents more hazards

than driving in the daylight. Here are

some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more dis-

tance between you and other vehi-

cles, as it may be more difficult to

see at night, especially in areas

where there may not be any street

lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the

glare from other driver's head-

lights.

• Keep your headlights clean and

properly aimed. Dirty or improperly

aimed headlights will make it much

more difficult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the head-

lights of oncoming vehicles. You

could be temporarily blinded, and it

will take several seconds for your

eyes to readjust to the darkness.

OBH058035L

OMC035004

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:23 PM Page 49

Driving your vehicle

505

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving

dangerous. Here are a few things to

consider when driving in the rain or

on slick pavement:

• Slow down and allow extra follow-

ing distance. A heavy rainfall

makes it harder to see and increas-

es the distance needed to stop

your vehicle.

• Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if

equipped)

• Replace your windshield wiper

blades when they show signs of

streaking or missing areas on the

windshield.

• Be sure your tires have enough

tread. If your tires do not have

enough tread, making a quick stop

on wet pavement can cause a skid

and possibly lead to an accident.

See “Tire Tread” in chapter 7.

• Turn on your headlights to make it

easier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large pud-

dles can affect your brakes. If you

must go through puddles, try to

drive through them slowly.

• If you believe your brakes may be

wet, apply them lightly while driv-

ing until normal braking operation

returns.

Hydroplaning

If the road is wet enough and you are

going fast enough, your vehicle may

have little or no contact with the road

surface and actually ride on the

water. The best advice is SLOW

DOWN when the road is wet. The

risk of hydroplaning increases as the

depth of tire tread decreases, refer to

“Tire Tread” in chapter 7.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas

unless you are sure the water is no

higher than the bottom of the wheel

hub. Drive through any water slowly.

Allow adequate stopping distance

because brake performance may be

reduced.

After driving through water, dry the

brakes by gently applying them sev-

eral times while the vehicle is moving

slowly.

1JBB3303

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:23 PM Page 50

551

Driving your vehicle

Snow or icy conditions

You need to keep sufficient distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you.

Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,

rapid acceleration, sudden brake

applications, and sharp turns are

potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine

braking to the fullest extent. Sudden

brake applications on snowy or icy

roads may cause skids to occur.

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it

may be necessary to use snow tires

or to install tire chains on your tires.

Always carry emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to

carry include, tow straps or chains, a

flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a

shovel, jumper cables, a window

scraper, gloves, ground cloth, cover-

alls, a blanket, etc.

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehi-

cle, make sure to use radial tires of

the same size and load range as the

original tires. Mount snow tires on all

four wheels to balance your vehicle’s

handling in all weather conditions.

The traction provided by snow tires

on dry roads may not be as high as

your vehicle's original equipment

tires. Check with the tire dealer for

maximum speed recommendations.

✽✽

NOTICE

Do not install studded tires without

first checking local and municipal

regulations for possible restrictions

against their use.

Tire chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are

thinner than other types of tires, they

may be damaged by mounting some

types of tire chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tires is

recommended instead of tire chains.

Do not mount tire chains on vehicles

equipped with aluminum wheels; if

unavoidable use a wire type chain. If

tire chains must be used, use gen-

uine HYUNDAI parts and install the

tire chain after reviewing the instruc-

tions provided with the tire chains.

Damage to your vehicle caused by

improper tire chain use is not cov-

ered by your vehicle manufacturer’s

warranty.

WINTER DRIVING

WARNING

Snow tires should be equivalent

in size and type to the vehicle's

standard tires. Otherwise, the

safety and handling of your

vehicle may be adversely affect-

ed.

OED050200

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:23 PM Page 51

Driving your vehicle

525

✽✽

NOTICE

• Install tire chains on the front

tires. It should be noted that

installing tire chains on the tires

will provide a greater driving

force, but will not prevent side

skids.

• Do not install studded tires with-

out first checking local and munic-

ipal regulations for possible

restrictions against their use.

Chain Installation

When installing tire chains, follow the

manufacturer's instructions and

mount them as tightly possible. Drive

slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h))

with chains installed. If you hear the

chains contacting the body or chas-

sis, stop and tighten them. If they still

make contact, slow down until the

noise stops. Remove the tire chains

as soon as you begin driving on

cleared roads.

When mounting snow chains, park

the vehicle on level ground away

from traffic. Turn on the vehicle

Hazard Warning Flasher and place a

triangular emergency warning device

behind the vehicle (if available).

Always place the vehicle in P (Park),

apply the parking brake and turn off

the engine before installing snow

chains.

WARNING

The use of tire chains may

adversely affect vehicle han-

dling:

• Drive less than 20 mph (30

km/h) or the chain manufac-

turer’s recommended speed

limit, whichever is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid

bumps, holes, sharp turns,

and other road hazards, which

may cause the vehicle to

bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked

wheel braking.

CAUTION

When using tire chains:

• Wrong size chains or improp-

erly installed chains can dam-

age your vehicle's brake lines,

suspension, body and wheels.

• Use SAE “S” class or wire

chains.

• If you hear noise caused by

chains contacting the body,

retighten the chain to prevent

contact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage,

retighten the chains after driv-

ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

• Do not use tire chains on vehi-

cles equipped with aluminum

wheels. If unavoidable, use a

wire type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 0.59

inch (15 mm) wide to prevent

damage to the chain’s connec-

tion.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:23 PM Page 52

Use high quality ethylene gly-

col coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high

quality ethylene glycol coolant in the

cooling system. It is the only type of

coolant that should be used because

it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-

ing system, lubricates the water

pump and prevents freezing. Be sure

to replace or replenish your coolant

in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in section 7. Before winter,

have your coolant tested to assure

that its freezing point is sufficient for

the temperatures anticipated during

the winter.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on

the battery system. Visually inspect

the battery and cables as described

in section 7. We recommend that the

system be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Change to "winter weight" oil

if necessary

In some climates it is recommended

that a lower viscosity "winter weight"

oil be used during cold weather. See

section 8 for recommendations. If

you aren't sure what weight oil you

should use, we recommend that you

consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Check spark plugs and igni-

tion system

Inspect your spark plugs as

described in section 7 and replace

them if necessary. Also check all

ignition wiring and components to be

sure they are not cracked, worn or

damaged in any way.

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing,

squirt an approved de-icer fluid or

glycerine into the key opening. If a

lock is covered with ice, squirt it with

an approved de-icing fluid to remove

the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,

you may be able to thaw it out by

using a heated key. Handle the heat-

ed key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window

washer system from freezing, add an

approved window washer anti-freeze

solution in accordance with instruc-

tions on the container.Window wash-

er anti-freeze is available from an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

most auto parts outlets. Do not use

engine coolant or other types of anti-

freeze as these may damage the

paint finish.

553

Driving your vehicle

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:23 PM Page 53

Driving your vehicle

545

Don't let your parking brake

freeze

Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged

position.This is most likely to happen

when there is an accumulation of

snow or ice around or near the rear

brakes or if the brakes are wet. If

there is a risk the parking brake may

freeze, apply it only temporarily while

you put the shift lever in P (automat-

ic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear

(manual transaxle) and block the

rear wheels so the vehicle cannot

roll. Then release the parking brake.

Don't let ice and snow accu-

mulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and

ice can build up under the fenders

and interfere with the steering. When

driving in severe winter conditions

where this may happen, you should

periodically check underneath the

vehicle to be sure the movement of

the front wheels and the steering

components is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the

weather, you should carry appropri-

ate emergency equipment. Some of

the items you may want to carry

include tire chains, tow straps or

chains, flashlight, emergency flares,

sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a win-

dow scraper, gloves, ground cloth,

coveralls, a blanket, etc.

Don't place foreign objects or

materials in the engine com-

partment

Placement of foreign objects or

materials which prevent cooling of

the engine, in the engine compart-

ment, may cause a failure or com-

bustion. The manufacturer is not

responsible for the damage caused

by such placement.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:23 PM Page 54

555

Driving your vehicle

Two labels on your driver’s door sill

show how much weight your vehicle

was designed to carry: the Tire and

Loading Information Label and the

Certification Label.

Before loading your vehicle, familiar-

ize yourself with the following terms

for determining your vehicle's weight

ratings, from the vehicle's specifica-

tions and the Certification Label:

Base Curb Weight

This is the weight of the vehicle

including a full tank of fuel and all

standard equipment. It does not

include passengers, cargo, or option-

al equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle

when you picked it up from your deal-

er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo Weight

This figure includes all weight added

to the Base Curb Weight, including

cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight)

This is the total weight placed on

each axle (front and rear) - including

vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum allowable

weight that can be carried by a single

axle (front or rear). These numbers

are shown on the Certification Label.

The total load on each axle must

never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus

actual Cargo Weight plus passen-

gers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating)

This is the maximum allowable

weight of the fully loaded vehicle

(including all options, equipment,

passengers and cargo). The GVWR

is shown on the Certification Label

located on the driver’s door sill.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:23 PM Page 55

Driving your vehicle

565

Tire loading information label

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your

vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

■ Type A

■ Type D ■ Type E ■ Type F

■ Type B ■ Type C

OMD054042N/OMD054041N/OMD054040N/OMD054045N/OMD054044N/OMD054043N

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:24 PM Page 56

557

Driving your vehicle

Vehicle capacity weight

849 lbs. (385 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-

mum combined weight of occupants

and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped

with a trailer, the combined weight

includes the tongue load.

Seating capacity

Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum

number of occupants including a

driver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may

be reduced based upon the weight of

all of the occupants, and the weight

of the cargo being carried or towed.

Do not overload the vehicle as there

is a limit to the total weight, or load

limit including occupants and cargo,

the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity

We do not recommend using this

vehicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity

The cargo capacity of your vehicle

will increase or decrease depending

on the weight and the number of

occupants and the tongue load, if

your vehicle is equipped with a trail-

er.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:24 PM Page 57

Driving your vehicle

585

Steps for determining correct

load limit

1.Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg

or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's plac-

ard.

2.Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3.Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4.The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity. For example, if

the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs.

and there will be five 150 lb. pas-

sengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5.Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle.That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail-

er, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehi-

cle

WARNING

Do not overload the vehicle as

there is a limit to the total

weight, or load limit, including

occupants and cargo, the vehi-

cle can carry. Overloading can

shorten the life of the vehicle. If

the GVWR or the GAWR is

exceeded, parts on the vehicle

can break, and it can change

the handling of your vehicle.

These could cause you to lose

control and result in an acci-

dent.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:24 PM Page 58

559

Driving your vehicle

Example 1

Maximum Load

(849 lbs.)

(385 kg)

Passenger Weight

(150lbs. × 2 = 300 lbs.)

(68 kg × 2 = 136kg)

Cargo Weight

(549 lbs.)

(249 kg)

Example 2

Maximum Load

(849 lbs.)

(385 kg)

Passenger Weight

(150lbs. × 5 = 750 lbs.)

(68 kg × 5 = 340kg)

Cargo Weight

(99 lbs.)

(45 kg)

Example 3

Maximum Load

(849 lbs.)

(385 kg)

Passenger Weight

(163 lbs. × 5 = 815 lbs.)

(74 kg × 5 = 370kg)

Cargo Weight

(34 lbs.)

(15 kg)

≥≥

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:24 PM Page 59

Driving your vehicle

605

Certification label

The certification label is located on

the driver's door sill at the center pil-

lar and shows the maximum allow-

able weight of the fully loaded vehi-

cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR

includes the weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, fuel and cargo.

This label also tells you the maxi-

mum weight that can be supported

by the front and rear axles, called

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

The total weight of the vehicle,

including all occupants, accessories,

cargo, and trailer tongue load must

not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out

the actual loads on your front and

rear axles, you need to go to a weigh

station and weigh your vehicle. Be

sure to spread out your load equally

on both sides of the centerline.

OEN056020

WARNING

If you carry items inside your

vehicle (e.g., suitcases, tools,

packages, or anything else),

they are moving as fast as the

vehicle. If you have to stop, turn

quickly, or if there is a crash, the

items will keep going and can

cause an injury if they strike the

driver or a passenger.

• Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle.Try to spread the

weight evenly.

• Do not stack items, like suit-

cases, inside the vehicle

above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured

child restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something

inside the vehicle, secure it.

WARNING - Overloading

• Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR for

either the front or rear axle

and vehicle capacity weight.

Exceeding these ratings can

affect your vehicle’s handling

and braking ability, and cause

an accident.

• Do not overload your vehicle.

Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in your

vehicle's tires and possible

tire failure, increased stop-

ping distances and poor vehi-

cle handling-all of which may

result in a crash.

CAUTION

Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would

not be covered by your warran-

ty. Do not overload your vehicle.

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:24 PM Page 60

561

Driving your vehicle

We do not recommend using this

vehicle for trailer towing.

TRAILER TOWING

UD(FL) HMA 5.qxp 6/26/2014 3:24 PM Page 61

What to do in an emergency

Hazard warning flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3

• If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3

• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

• If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly. . 6-4

• If the engine turns over normally but doesn't start. . 6-4

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . 6-10

• Low tire pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

• TPMS malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

• With spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

• Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

• With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

• Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

The hazard warning flasher serves

as a warning to other drivers to exer-

cise extreme caution when

approaching, overtaking, or passing

your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emer-

gency repairs are being made or

when the vehicle is stopped near the

edge of a roadway.

To turn the hazard warning flasher

on or off, press the hazard warning

flasher button with the ignition switch

in any position. The button is located

in the center console switch panel.

All turn signal lights will flash simul-

taneously.

• The hazard warning flasher oper-

ates whether your vehicle is run-

ning or not.

• The turn signals do not work when

the hazard flasher is on.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

What to do in an emergency

OMD064013

If the engine stalls while driving

• Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-

tiously off the road to a safe place.

• Turn on your hazard warning flash-

er.

• Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or

seek other qualified assistance.

If the engine stalls at a cross-

road or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or

crossing, if safe to do so, move the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position

and then push the vehicle to a safe

location.

If you have a flat tire while

driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driv-

ing:

• Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the vehicle slow

down while driving straight ahead.

Do not apply the brakes immedi-

ately or attempt to pull off the road

as this may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

When the vehicle has slowed to

such a speed that it is safe to do

so, brake carefully and pull off the

road. Drive off the road as far as

possible and park on firm, level

ground. If you are on a divided

highway, do not park in the median

area between the two traffic lanes.

• When the vehicle is stopped, press

the hazard warning flasher button,

move the shift lever into P (Park,

for automatic transaxle vehicle) or

neutral (for manual transaxle vehi-

cle), apply the parking brake, and

place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

• Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle. Be sure they all get out on

the side of the vehicle that is away

from traffic.

• When changing a flat tire, follow

the instructions provided later in

this chapter.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If the engine doesn't turn over

or turns over slowly

• Be sure the shift lever is in N

(Neutral) or P (Park) if it is an auto-

matic transaxle vehicle.The engine

starts only when the shift lever is in

N (Neutral) or P (Park).

• Check the battery connections to

be sure they are clean and tight.

• Turn on the interior light. If the light

dims or goes out when you operate

the starter, the battery is drained.

Do not push or pull the vehicle to

start it. This could cause damage to

your vehicle. See instructions for

"Jump Starting" provided in this

chapter.

If the engine turns over nor-

mally but doesn’t start

• Check the fuel level and add fuel if

necessary.

If the engine still does not start, call

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for

assistance.

What to do in an emergency

WARNING

Push or pull starting the vehicle

may cause the catalytic con-

verter to overload which can

lead to damage to the emission

control system.

Jump starting can be dangerous if

done incorrectly. Follow the jump

starting procedure in this section to

avoid serious injury or damage to

your vehicle. If in doubt about how to

properly jump start your vehicle, we

strongly recommend that you have a

service technician or towing service

do it for you.

JUMP STARTING

What to do in an emergency

WARNING

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders,

always follow these precautions

when working near or handling

the battery:

Always read and follow

instructions carefully

when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection

designed to protect the

eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks,

or smoking materials

away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always

present in battery cells,

is highly combustible,

and may explode if ignit-

ed.

Keep batteries out of

reach of children.

(Continued)

Batteries contain sulfu-

ric acid which is highly

corrosive. Do not allow

acid to contact your

eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush

your eyes with clean water for at

least 15 minutes and get imme-

diate medical attention. If acid

gets on your skin, thoroughly

wash the area. If you feel pain or

a burning sensation, get med-

ical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressure

on the case may cause battery

acid to leak. Lift with a battery

carrier or with your hands on

opposite corners.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle if your battery is

frozen.

(Continued)

✽✽

NOTICE

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to

the environment and human

health. Dispose the battery

according to your local

law(s) or regulation.

Jump starting procedure

1.Position the vehicles close enough

that the jumper cables will reach,

but do not allow the vehicles to

touch.

2.Avoid fans or any moving parts in

the engine compartment at all

times, even when the vehicles are

turned off.

3.Turn off all electrical devices such

as radios, lights, air conditioning,

etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park, for

automatic transaxle vehicle) or

neutral (for manual transaxle vehi-

cle), and set the parking brakes.

Turn both vehicles OFF.

What to do in an emergency

(Continued)

• NEVER attempt to recharge

the battery when the vehicle’s

battery cables are connected

to the battery.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these compo-

nents with the engine running

or when the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to your vehi-

cle:

• Only use a 12-volt power sup-

ply (battery or jumper system)

to jump start your vehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle by push-starting.

4.Connect the jumper cables in the

exact sequence shown in the illus-

tration. First connect one jumper

cable to the red, positive (+)

jumper terminal of your vehicle (1).

5.Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the red, positive

(+) battery/jumper terminal of the

assisting vehicle (2).

6.Connect the second jumper cable

to the black, negative (-) battery of

the assisting vehicle (3).

7.Connect the other end of the sec-

ond jumper cable to the chassis

ground of your vehicle (4).

Do not allow the jumper cables to

contact anything except the correct

battery or jumper terminals or the

correct ground. Do not lean over

the battery when making connec-

tions.

8.Start the engine of the assisting

vehicle and let it run at approxi-

mately 2,000 rpm for a few min-

utes. Then start your vehicle.

If your vehicle will not start after a

few attempts, it probably requires

servicing. In this event please seek

qualified assistance. If the cause of

your battery discharging is not

apparent, have your vehicle checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the

exact reverse order you connected

them:

1.Disconnect the jumper cable from

the chassis ground of your vehicle

(4).

2.Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the black, nega-

tive (-) battery of the assisting vehi-

cle (3).

3.Disconnect the second jumper

cable from the red, positive (+) bat-

tery/jumper terminal of the assist-

ing vehicle (2).

4.Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the red, positive

(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

What to do in an emergency

OLMB063002/Q

Jumper Terminal

Jumper Cables

Booster Battery

(-)

(+)

(-)

If your temperature gauge indicates

overheating, you experience a loss

of power, or hear loud pinging or

knocking, the engine may be over-

heating. If this happens, you should:

1.Pull off the road and stop as soon

as it is safe to do so.

2.Place the shift lever in P (Park, for

automatic transaxle vehicle) or

neutral (for manual transaxle vehi-

cle) and set the parking brake. If

the air conditioning is ON, turn it

OFF.

3.If engine coolant is running out

under the vehicle or steam is com-

ing out from the hood, stop the

engine. Do not open the hood until

the coolant has stopped running or

the steaming has stopped. If there

is no visible loss of engine coolant

and no steam, leave the engine

running and check to be sure the

engine cooling fan is operating. If

the fan is not running, turn the

engine off.

4.Check for coolant leaking from the

radiator, hoses or under the vehi-

cle. (If the air conditioning had

been in use, it is normal for cold

water to be draining from it when

you stop.)

5.If engine coolant is leaking out,

stop the engine immediately and

call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er for assistance.

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

What to do in an emergency

WARNING

While the engine is

running, keep hands,

clothing and tools

away from the moving

parts such as the

cooling fan and drive

belt to prevent seri-

ous injury.

WARNING

NEVER remove the

radiator cap or the

drain plug while the

engine and radiator

are hot. Hot coolant

and steam may blow out under

pressure, causing serious

injury.

Turn the engine off and wait

until the engine cools down.

Use extreme care when remov-

ing the radiator cap. Wrap a

thick towel around it, and turn it

counterclockwise slowly to the

first stop. Step back while the

pressure is released from the

cooling system. When you are

sure all the pressure has been

released, press down on the

cap, using a thick towel, and

continue turning counterclock-

wise to remove it.

6.If you cannot find the cause of the

overheating, wait until the engine

temperature has returned to nor-

mal.Then, if coolant has been lost,

carefully add coolant to the reser-

voir to bring the fluid level in the

reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping

alert for further signs of overheat-

ing. If overheating happens again,

call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er for assistance.

What to do in an emergency

CAUTION

• Serious loss of coolant indi-

cates a leak in the cooling

system and have the system

checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• When the engine overheats

from low engine coolant, sud-

denly adding engine coolant

may cause cracks in the

engine. To prevent damage,

add engine coolant slowly in

small quantities.

(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/

TPMS Malfunction Indicator

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your

vehicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pres-

sure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and

may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumina-

tion of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

What to do in an emergency

106

OMD064002/Q

WARNING

Over-inflation or under-inflation

can reduce tire life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tire failure that

may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale. When

the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximate-

ly one minute and then remain con-

tinuously illuminated. This sequence

will continue upon subsequent vehi-

cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-

tion exists. When the malfunction

indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal

low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a

variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle

that prevent the TPMS from function-

ing properly. Always check the TPMS

malfunction telltale after replacing

one or more tires or wheels on your

vehicle to ensure that the replace-

ment or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to func-

tion properly.

✽✽

NOTICE

If the TPMS Low Tire Pressure

Telltale does not illuminate for three

seconds when the ignition switch is

in the ON position or when the

engine starts, or if it remains illumi-

nated after coming on for approxi-

mately three seconds, take your

vehicle to your nearest authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-

tem checked.

Low Tire Pressure

Telltale

The TPMS is not a substitute for

manually checking tire pressure with

a tire pressure gauge. Changes in

temperature affect tire pressure. See

“Tires and Wheels” in chapter 7 for

proper tire inflating and tire pressure

measurement procedures.

If the telltale illuminates, immediately

reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-

nering and anticipate increased stop-

ping distances. You should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible.

Inflate the tires to the proper pres-

sure as indicated on the vehicle’s

placard or tire inflation pressure label

located on the driver’s side door

jamb. If you cannot reach a service

station or if the tire cannot hold the

newly added air, replace the low

pressure tire with the spare tire.

611

What to do in an emergency

126

The Low Tire Pressure Telltale will

remain on and the TPMS Malfunction

Indicator may blink for one minute

and then remain illuminated (when

the vehicle is driven approximately

20 minutes at speed above 15.5 mph

(25 km/h)) until you have the low

pressure tire repaired and replaced

on the vehicle.

✽✽

NOTICE

The spare tire (if equipped) does not

come with a tire pressure sensor.

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the

Low Tire Pressure Telltale may

be illuminated if the tire pres-

sure was adjusted to the recom-

mended tire inflation pressure

in warm weather. It does not

mean your TPMS is malfunction-

ing because the decreased tem-

perature leads to a proportional

lowering of tire pressure.

When you drive your vehicle

from a warm area to a cold area

or from a cold area to a warm

area, or the outside temperature

is greatly higher or lower, you

should check the tire inflation

pressure and adjust the tires to

the recommended tire inflation

pressure.

WARNING

• Significantly low tire pressure

makes the vehicle unstable

and can contribute to loss of

vehicle control and increased

braking distances.

• Continued driving on low

pressure tires can cause the

tires to overheat and fail.

TPMS Malfunction

Indicator

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator

comes on after it blinks for approxi-

mately one minute when there is a

problem with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System.

Have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon

as possible to determine the cause

of the problem.

✽✽

NOTICE

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator

may illuminate after blinking for

one minute if the vehicle is near elec-

tric power supply cables or radio

transmitters such as police stations,

government and public offices,

broadcasting stations, military

installations, airports, transmitting

towers, etc. Additionally, the TPMS

Malfunction Indicator may illumi-

nate if snow chains are used or elec-

tronic devices such as computers,

chargers, remote starters, naviga-

tion, etc. This may interfere with

normal operation of the TPMS.

This device complies with Part 15

of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harm-

ful interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the equipment.

Tampering with, modifying, or dis-

abling the TPMS components may

interfere with the system’s ability to

function and may void the warranty

for that portion of the vehicle.

613

What to do in an emergency

Changing a Tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire

Pressure Telltale will illuminate.If you

believe you have a flat tire or feel any

vehicle instability, take your foot off

the accelerator pedal and let the

vehicle slow down while driving

straight ahead. Do not apply the

brakes immediately or attempt to pull

off the road as this may cause a loss

of control resulting in an accident.

When the vehicle has slowed to such

a speed that it is safe to do so, brake

carefully and pull off the road. Drive

off the road as far as possible and

park on firm, level ground. If you are

on a divided highway, do not park in

the median area between the two

traffic lanes. Replace the flat tire with

the spare tire (if equipped).

The spare tire (if equipped) does not

come with a tire pressure monitoring

sensor.When the low pressure tire or

the flat tire is replaced with the spare

tire, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale

will remain on. Also, the TPMS

Malfunction Indicator will illuminate

after blinking for one minute if the

vehicle is driven at speed above 15.5

mph (25 km/h) for approximately 20

minutes.

Once the original tire equipped with

a tire pressure monitoring sensor is

reinflated to the recommended pres-

sure and reinstalled on the vehicle,

the Low Tire Pressure Telltale and

TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go

off within a few minutes.

If the indicators do not extinguish

after a few minutes, please visit an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire

pressure sensor mounted inside the

tire behind the valve stem (except for

the spare tire). You must use TPMS

specific wheels. It is recommended

that you always have your tires serv-

iced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

What to do in an emergency

146

CAUTION

To prevent damaging your tire

pressure sensor, never use a

puncture-repairing agents or

tire sealants to repair and/or

inflate a low pressure tire. If

used, you will have to replace

the tire pressure sensor.

615

What to do in an emergency

With spare tire (if equipped)

Jack and tools

➀ Jack handle

➁ Jack

➂ Wheel lug nut wrench

The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug

nut wrench are stored in the luggage

compartment under the luggage box

cover.

The jack is provided for emergency

tire changing only.

Turn the winged hold down bolt

counterclockwise to remove the

spare tire.

Store the spare tire in the same com-

partment by turning the winged hold

down bolt clockwise.

To prevent the spare tire and tools

from “rattling,” store them in their

proper location.

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

OMD060003

OYF069005N

WARNING

Changing a tire can be danger-

ous. Follow the instructions in

this section when changing a

tire to reduce the risk of serious

injury or death.

What to do in an emergency

166

Changing tires

Follow these steps to change your

vehicle’s tire:

1.Park on a level, firm surface.

2.Move the shift lever into P (Park,

for automatic transaxle vehicle) or

neutral (for manual transaxle vehi-

cle), apply the parking brake, and

place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position.

3.Press the hazard warning flasher

button.

4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,

jack, jack handle, and spare tire

from the vehicle.

5.Block both the front and rear of the

tire diagonally opposite of the tire

you are changing.

WARNING

A vehicle can slip or roll off of a

jack causing serious injury or

death to you or those nearby.

Take the following safety pre-

cautions:

• Never place any portion of

your body under a vehicle that

is supported by a jack.

• NEVER attempt to change a

tire in the lane of traffic.

ALWAYS move the vehicle

completely off the road on

level, firm ground away from

traffic before trying to change

a tire. If you cannot find a

level, firm place off the road,

call a towing service for assis-

tance.

• Be sure to use the jack pro-

vided with the vehicle.

(Continued)

• ALWAYS place the jack on the

designated jacking positions

on the vehicle and NEVER on

the bumpers or any other part

of the vehicle for jacking sup-

port.

• Do not start or run the engine

while the vehicle is on the

jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain

in the vehicle while it is on the

jack.

• Keep children away from the

road and the vehicle.

617

What to do in an emergency

6.Insert the screwdriver into the

groove of the wheel cap and pry

gently to remove the wheel cap (If

equipped).

7.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter-

clockwise one turn each in the

order shown above, but do not

remove any lug nuts until the tire

has been raised off of the ground.

8.Place the jack at the designated

jacking position under the frame

closest to the tire you are chang-

ing. The jacking positions are

plates welded to the frame with two

tabs and a raised dot. Never jack

any other position or part of the

vehicle.

OMD060006 1JBA6025OMD060009

What to do in an emergency

186

9.Insert the jack handle into the jack

and turn it clockwise, raising the

vehicle until the tire clears the

ground. Make sure the vehicle is

stable on the jack.

10. Loosen the lug nuts with the

wheel lug nut wrench and

remove them with your fingers.

Remove the wheel from the

studs and lay it flat on the ground

out of the way. Remove any dirt

or debris from the studs, mount-

ing surfaces, and wheel.

11. Install the spare tire onto the

studs of the hub.

12. Tighten the lug nuts with your fin-

gers onto the studs with the

smaller end of the lug nuts clos-

est to the wheel.

13. Lower the vehicle to the ground

by turning the jack handle coun-

terclockwise.

14. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to

tighten the lug nuts in the order

shown. Double-check each lug

nut until they are tight. After

changing tires, we recommend

that an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer tighten the lug nuts to their

proper torque as soon as possi-

ble. The wheel lug nut should

be tightened to 65~79 lb.ft

(9~11 kg.m).

OMD060008 OUN046019

619

What to do in an emergency

If you have a tire gauge, check the

tire pressure (see “Tires and Wheels”

in chapter 8 for tire pressure instruc-

tions.). If the pressure is lower or

higher than recommended, drive

slowly to the nearest service station

and adjust it to the recommended

pressure. Always reinstall the valve

cap after checking or adjusting tire

pressure. If the cap is not replaced,

air may leak from the tire. If you lose

a valve cap, buy another and install it

as soon as possible. After changing

tires, secure the flat tire and return

the jack and tools to their proper stor-

age locations.

✽✽

NOTICE

Check the tire pressure as soon as

possible after installing a spare tire.

Adjust it to the recommended pres-

sure.

If any of the equipment such as the

jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equip-

ment is damaged or in poor condi-

tion, do not attempt to change the

tire and call for assistance.

Use of compact spare tires

(if equipped)

Compact spare tires are designed for

emergency use only. Drive carefully

on the compact spare tire and

always follow the safety precautions.

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads

on the studs and lug nuts. Make

certain during tire changing that

the same nuts that were

removed are reinstalled. If you

have to replace your lug nuts

make sure they have metric

threads to avoid damaging the

studs and ensure the wheel is

properly secured to the hub.

Consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer for assistance.

WARNING

To prevent compact spare tire

failure and loss of control pos-

sibly resulting in an accident:

• Use the compact spare tire

only in an emergency.

• NEVER operate your vehicle

over 50 mph (80 km/h).

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s

maximum load rating or the

load carrying capacity shown

on the sidewall of the com-

pact spare tire.

• Do not use the compact spare

tire continuously. Repair or

replace the original tire as

soon as possible to avoid fail-

ure of the compact spare tire.

What to do in an emergency

206

When driving with the compact spare

tire mounted to your vehicle:

• Check the tire pressure after

installing the compact spare tire.

The compact spare tire should be

inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).

• Do not take this vehicle through an

automatic car wash while the com-

pact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use the compact spare tire

on any other vehicle because this

tire has been designed especially

for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread life

is shorter than a regular tire.

Inspect your compact spare tire

regularly and replace worn com-

pact spare tires with the same size

and design, mounted on the same

wheel.

• Do not use more than one compact

spare tire at a time.

✽✽

NOTICE

When the original tire and wheel are

repaired and reinstalled on the vehi-

cle, the lug nut torque must be set

correctly to prevent wheel vibration.

The correct lug nut tightening

torque is 65-79 lb.ft (9-11 kg.m).

CAUTION

To prevent damaging the com-

pact spare tire and your vehicle:

• Drive slowly enough for the

road conditions to avoid all

hazards, such as a potholes or

debris.

• Avoid driving over obstacles.

The compact spare tire diame-

ter is smaller than the diame-

ter of a conventional tire and

reduces the ground clearance

approximately 1 inch (25 mm).

• Do not use tire chains on the

compact spare tire. Because

of the smaller size, a tire chain

will not fit properly.

• Do not use the compact spare

tire on any other wheels, nor

should standard tires, snow

tires, wheel covers or trim

rings be used with the com-

pact spare wheel.

621

What to do in an emergency

Jack label

1. Model Name

2. Maximum allowable load

3. When using the jack, set your

parking brake.

4. When using the jack, stop the

engine.

5. Do not get under a vehicle that is

supported by a jack.

6. The designated locations under

the frame

7. When supporting the vehicle, the

base plate of jack must be vertical

under the lifting point.

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles

with manual transaxle or move the

shift lever to the P position on

vehicles with automatic transaxle.

9. The jack should be used on firm

level ground.

10. Jack manufacture

11. Production date

12. Representative company and

address

OHYK064001

OHYK064005

OHYK064002

• Type A

■ Example

• Type B

• Type C

❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

What to do in an emergency

226

With Tire Mobility Kit

(TMK, if equipped)

For safe operation, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this

manual before use.

(1) Compressor

(2) Sealant bottle

The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary

fix to the tire and the tire should be

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

Introduction

With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay

mobile even after experiencing a tire

puncture.

The system of compressor and seal-

ing compound effectively and com-

fortably seals most punctures in a

passenger car tire caused by nails

or similar objects and reinflates the

tire.

After you ensured that the tire is

properly sealed you can drive cau-

tiously on the tire (distance up to 120

miles (200 km)) at a max. speed of

(50mph (80 km/h)) in order to reach

a service station or tire dealer for the

tire replacement.

CAUTION - One sealant

for one tire

When two or more tires are flat,

do not use the tire mobility kit

because the supported one

sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is

only used for one flat tire.

WARNING - Tire wall

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit

to repair punctures in the tire

walls.This can result in an acci-

dent due to tire failure.

WARNING - Temporary fix

Have your tire repaired as soon

as possible. The tire may lose

air pressure at any time after

inflating with the Tire Mobility

Kit.

OYN069010

OYN069018

623

What to do in an emergency

It is possible that some tires, espe-

cially with larger punctures or dam-

age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed

completely.

Air pressure loss in the tire may

adversely affect tire performance.

For this reason, you should avoid

abrupt steering or other driving

maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is

heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.

The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed

or intended as a permanent tire

repair method and is to be used for

one tire only.

This instruction shows you step by

step how to temporarily seal the

puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe

use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the safe use of the Tire

Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the

road so that you can work with the

Tire Mobility Kit away from moving

traffic.

• To be sure your vehicle will not

move, even when you're on fairly

level ground, always set your park-

ing brake.

• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for

sealing/inflation passenger car

tires. Only punctured areas located

within the tread region of the tire

can be sealed using the tire mobil-

ity kit.

• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-

cles or any other type of tires.

• When the tire and wheel are dam-

aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit

for your safety.

• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not

be effective for tire damage larger

than approximately 0.24 inch (6

mm).

Please contact the nearest

HYUNDAI dealership if the tire

cannot be made roadworthy with

the Tire Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a

tire is severely damaged by driving

run flat or with insufficient air pres-

sure.

• Do not remove any foreign objects

such as nails or screws that have

penetrated the tire.

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave

the engine running. Otherwise

operating the compressor may

eventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit

unattended while it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor run-

ning for more than 10 minutes at a

time or it may overheat.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if

the ambient temperature is below

-22°F (-30°C).

What to do in an emergency

246

0. Speed restriction label

1. Sealant bottle and label with

speed restriction

2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to

wheel

3. Connectors and cable for the

power outlet direct connection

4. Holder for the sealant bottle

5. Compressor

6. On/off switch

7. Pressure gauge for displaying the

tire inflation pressure

8. Screw cap for reducing tire infla-

tion pressure

9. Hose to connect compressor and

sealant bottle or compressor and

wheel

Connectors, cable and connection

hose are stored in the compressor

housing.

Strictly follow the specified

sequence, otherwise the sealant

may escape under high pressure.

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

OAM060015L

WARNING - Expired

sealant

Do not use the tire sealant after

the sealant has expired (i.e.

pasted the expiration date on

the sealant container). This can

increase the risk of tire failure.

WARNING - Sealant

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Avoid contact with eyes.

• Do not swallow.

625

What to do in an emergency

Using the Tire Mobility Kit

1.Detach the speed restriction label

(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and

place it in a highly visible place

inside the vehicle such as on the

steering wheel to remind the driver

not to drive too fast.

2.Screw connection hose (9) onto

the connector of the sealant bottle.

3.Ensure that screw cap (8) is

closed.

4.Unscrew the valve cap from the

valve of the flat tire and screw fill-

ing hose (2) of the sealant bottle

onto the valve.

5.Insert the sealant bottle into the

housing (4) of the compressor so

that the bottle is upright.

6.Ensure that the compressor is

switched off, position 0.

7.Plug the compressor power cord

into the vehicle power outlet.

8.With the engine start/stop button

position on or ignition switch posi-

tion on, switch on the compressor

and let it run for approximately 5~7

minutes to fill the sealant up to

proper pressure. (refer to the Tire

and Wheels, chapter 8). The infla-

tion pressure of the tire after filling

is unimportant and will be

checked/corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the tire

and stay away from the tire when

filling it.

9. Switch off the compressor.

10. Detach the hoses from the

sealant bottle connector and

from the tire valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-

age location in the vehicle.

OYN069018

CAUTION - Tire pressure

Do not attempt to drive your

vehicle if the tire pressure is

below 29 psi (200kpa). This

could result in an accident due

to sudden tire failure.

WARNING

- Carbon

monoxide

Do not leave your vehicle run-

ning in a poorly ventilated area

for extended periods of time.

Carbon monoxide poisoning

and suffocation can occur.

What to do in an emergency

266

Distributing the sealant

11. Immediately drive approximately

4~6miles (7~10km or about 10

minutes) to evenly distribute the

sealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall

below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

While driving, if you experience any

unusual vibration, ride disturbance or

noise, reduce your speed and drive

with caution until you can safely pull

off of the side of the road.

Call for road side service or towing.

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,

the tire pressure sensors and wheel

may be damaged by sealant, remove

the sealant stained with tire pressure

sensors and wheel and inspect at an

authorized dealer.

Checking the tire inflation pres-

sure

1.After driving approximately

4~6miles (7~10km or about

10 minutes), stop at a safety loca-

tion.

2.Connect connection hose (9) of the

compressor directly to the tire

valve.

3.Plug the compressor power cord

into the vehicle power outlet.

4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to

the recommended tire inflation.

With the ignition on, proceed as fol-

lows.

- To increase the inflation pressure:

Switch on the compressor, posi-

tion I. To check the current infla-

tion pressure setting, briefly

switch off the compressor.

✽✽

NOTICE

The pressure gauge may show high-

er than actual reading when the

compressor is running. To get an

accurate tire pressure, the compres-

sor needs to be turned off.

- To reduce the inflation pressure:

Loosen the screw cap (8) on the

compressor hose.

627

What to do in an emergency

Technical Data

System voltage: DC 12 V

Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V

Amperage rating: max. 15 A

Suitable for use at temperatures:

-22 ~ +158°F (-30 ~ +70°C)

Max. working pressure:

87 psi (6 bar)

Size

Compressor: 6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in.

(170 x 150 x 60 mm)

Sealant bottle: 3.3 x 3.0 ø in.

(85 x 77 ø mm)

Compressor weight:

1.8 lbs (0.8 kg)

Sealant volume:

12.2 cu. in. (200 ml)

CAUTION - Tire pressure

sensor

When you use the Tire Mobility

Kit including sealant not

approved by HYUNDAI, the tire

pressure sensors may be dam-

aged by sealant. The sealant on

the tire pressure sensor and

wheel should be removed when

you replace the tire with a new

one and inspect the tire pres-

sure sensors at an authorized

dealer.

What to do in an emergency

286

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary,

we recommend having it done by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a

commercial tow-truck service.

Proper lifting and towing procedures

are necessary to prevent damage to

the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies

or flatbed is recommended.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle

with the rear wheels on the ground

(without dollies) and the front wheels

off the ground. If any of the loaded

wheels or suspension components

are damaged or the vehicle is being

towed with the front wheels on the

ground, use a towing dolly under the

front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial

tow truck and wheel dollies are not

used, the front of the vehicle should

always be lifted, not the rear.

TOWING

OMC045012

HXD03

HXD02

dolly

CAUTION

• Do not tow the vehicle with the

front wheels on the ground as

this may cause damage to the

vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type

equipment. Use a wheel lift or

flatbed equipment.

629

What to do in an emergency

When towing your vehicle in an

emergency without wheel dollies:

1.Place the ignition switch in the

ACC position.

2.Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

3.Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook

1.Open the trunk, and remove the

towing hook from the tool case.

2.Remove the hole cover pressing

the lower part of the cover on the

front bumper.

3.Install the towing hook by turning it

clockwise into the hole until it is

fully secured.

4.Remove the towing hook and

install the cover after use.

Emergency towing

If towing is necessary, we recom-

mend you have it done by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer or a commer-

cial tow truck service.

CAUTION

Failure to place the shift lever in

N (Neutral) when being towed

with the front wheels on the

ground can cause internal dam-

age to the transaxle.

OMD060010

OMD060011

OMD060007

■ Front

■ Rear

What to do in an emergency

306

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be

temporarily towed using a cable or

chain secured to the emergency tow-

ing hook at the front (or rear) of the

vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing

the vehicle with a cable or chain. A

driver must be in the vehicle to steer

it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done

only on hard-surfaced roads for a

short distance and at low speeds.

Also, the wheels, axles, power train,

steering and brakes must all be in

good condition.

Always follow these emergency tow-

ing precautions:

• Place the ignition switch in the

ACC position so the steering

wheel is not locked. (if equipped)

• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

• Release the parking brake.

• Depress the brake pedal with more

force than normal since you will

have reduced braking perform-

ance.

• More steering effort will be

required because the power steer-

ing system will be disabled.

• Use a vehicle heavier than your

own to tow your vehicle.

• The drivers of both vehicles should

communicate with each other fre-

quently.

• Before emergency towing, check

that the hook is not broken or dam-

aged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain

securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady

and even force.

• Use a towing cable or chain less

than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a

white or red cloth (about 12 inches

(30 cm) wide) in the middle of the

cable or chain for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so the towing cable

or chain remains tight during tow-

ing.

• Before towing, check the automat-

ic transaxle for fluid leaks under

your vehicle. If the automatic

transaxle fluid is leaking, flatbed

equipment or a towing dolly must

be used.

OTD069011

631

What to do in an emergency

CAUTION

To avoid damage to your vehicle

and vehicle components when

towing:

• Always pull straight ahead

when using the towing hooks.

Do not pull from the side or at

a vertical angle.

• Do not use the towing hooks

to pull a vehicle out of mud,

sand or other conditions from

which the vehicle cannot be

driven out under its own

power.

• Limit the vehicle speed to

10 mph (15 km/h) and drive

less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when

towing to avoid serious dam-

age to the automatic transaxle.

Maintenance

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Scheduled maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-26

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

• Checking the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

• Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

• Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Brake/clutch fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

• Checking the brake/clutch fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Climate control air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

• Reset features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-48

• Check tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

• Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

• Tire maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53

• Tire terminology and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57

• All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

• Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

• Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

• Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61

• Low aspect ratio tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63

• Instrument panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64

• Memory fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65

• Engine compartment panel fuse replacement . . . . . 7-66

• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76

• Headlight, parking light, turn signal light,

side marker and front fog light bulb

replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76

• Side repeater light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80

• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-81

• High mounted stop light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84

• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85

• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85

Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92

Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94

• Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94

• Evaporative emission control system including

onboard refueling vapor recovery (ORVR). . . . . . 7-94

• Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95

California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OMD070047N

❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Engine oil dipstick

3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir

4. Positive battery terminal

5. Negative battery terminal

6. Fuse box

7. Air cleaner

8. Radiator cap

9. Engine coolant reservoir

10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

* : if equipped

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care

to prevent damage to your vehicle

and injury to yourself whenever per-

forming any maintenance or inspec-

tion procedures.

We recommend you have your vehi-

cle maintained and repaired by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An

authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets

HYUNDAI’s high service quality

standards and receives technical

support from HYUNDAI in order to

provide you with a high level of serv-

ice satisfaction.

Owner’s responsibility

Maintenance service and record

retention are the owner’s responsibil-

ity.

You should retain documents that

show proper maintenance has been

performed on your vehicle in accor-

dance with the scheduled mainte-

nance service charts shown on the

following pages. You need this infor-

mation to establish your compliance

with the servicing and maintenance

requirements of your vehicle war-

ranties. Detailed warranty informa-

tion is provided in your Owner’s

Handbook & Warranty Information

booklet.

Repairs and adjustments required as

a result of improper maintenance or

a lack of required maintenance are

not covered.

Owner maintenance precau-

tions

Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-

cient servicing may result in opera-

tional problems with your vehicle that

could lead to vehicle damage, an

accident, or personal injury. This

chapter provides instructions only for

the maintenance items that are easy

to perform. Several procedures can

be done only by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.

Your vehicle should not be modified

in any way. Such modifications may

adversely affect the performance,

safety or durability of your vehicle

and may, in addition, violate condi-

tions of the limited warranties cover-

ing the vehicle. Certain modifications

may also be in violation of regula-

tions established by the U.S.

Department of Transportation and

other federal or state agencies.

Maintenance

✽✽

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance dur-

ing the warranty period may affect

warranty coverage. For details, read

the separate Owner’s Handbook &

Warranty Information booklet pro-

vided with the vehicle. If you’re

unsure about any service or mainte-

nance procedure, have it done by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE

The following lists are vehicle checks

and inspections that should be per-

formed by the owner or an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen-

cies indicated to help ensure safe,

dependable operation of your vehi-

cle.

Any adverse conditions should be

brought to the attention of your deal-

er as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance vehicle

checks are generally not covered by

warranties and you may be charged

for labor, parts and lubricants used.

WARNING

Performing maintenance work

on a vehicle can be dangerous.

If you lack sufficient knowledge

and experience or the proper

tools and equipment to do the

work, have it done by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer. ALWAYS

follow these precautions for

performing maintenance work:

• Park your vehicle on level

ground, move the shift lever

into the P (Park, for automatic

transaxle vehicle) position or

neutral (for manual transaxle

vehicle, apply the parking

brake, place the ignition

switch in the OFF position.

• Block the tires (front and

back) to prevent the vehicle

from moving.

Remove loose clothing or jew-

elry that can become entan-

gled in moving parts.

(Continued)

• If you must run the engine

during maintenance, do so

out doors or in an area with

plenty of ventilation.

• Keep flames, sparks, or smok-

ing materials away from the

battery and fuel-related parts.

Maintenance

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.

• Check for low or under-inflated

tires

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of

the exhaust or any smell of

exhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice if there is any

increased steering effort or loose-

ness in the steering wheel, or

change in its straight-ahead posi-

tion.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly

turns slightly or “pulls” to one side

when traveling on smooth, level

road.

• When stopping, listen and check

for unusual sounds, pulling to one

side, increased brake pedal travel

or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the

operation of your transaxle occurs,

check the transaxle fluid level.

• Check the automatic transaxle P

(Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your

vehicle (water dripping from the air

conditioning system during or after

use is normal).

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn

signals and hazard warning flash-

ers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all

tires including the spare for tires

that are worn, show uneven wear,

or are damaged.

• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.

WARNING

Be careful when checking your

engine coolant level when the

engine is hot.This may result in

coolant being blown out of the

opening and cause serious

burns and other injuries.

Maintenance

At least twice a year:

(i.e., every Spring and Fall):

• Check radiator, heater and air con-

ditioning hoses for leaks or dam-

age.

• Check windshield washer spray

and wiper operation. Clean wiper

blades with clean cloth dampened

with washer fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.

• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.

• Check the seat belts for wear and

function.

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate door hinges and hood

hinges.

• Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches.

• Lubricate door rubber weather

strips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake/clutch fluid level.

Follow Normal Maintenance

Schedule if the vehicle is usually

operated where none of the following

conditions apply. If any of the follow-

ing conditions apply, you must follow

the Maintenance Under Severe

Usage Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions or

sandy areas.

• Extensive use of brakes.

• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are used.

• Driving on rough or muddy roads.

• Driving in mountainous areas.

• Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation.

• Driving for a prolonged period in

cold temperatures and/or extreme-

ly humid climates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy

city traffic during hot weather

above 90°F (32°C).

For additional information or assis-

tance see your authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

SERVICES

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep

receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the fre-

quency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for

this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow

restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem, etc. replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of

maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available

from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Maintenance

107

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)

15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

711

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

❑ Inspect fuel filter *

❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *

❑ Inspect parking brake

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

(Continued)

Maintenance

127

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

(Continued)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)

713

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)

Maintenance

147

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

❑ Inspect fuel filter *

❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *

❑ Inspect parking brake

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Inspect drive belts *

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

(Continued)

❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

715

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)

75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

❑ Inspect drive belts *

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

(Continued)

Maintenance

167

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

(Continued)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

717

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

❑ Inspect fuel filter *

❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *

❑ Inspect parking brake

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Inspect drive belts *

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

(Continued)

❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

Maintenance

187

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads (if equipped)

❑ Inspect rear brake drums/linings (if equipped)

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect drive belts *

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)

(Continued)

719

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

(Continued)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)

Maintenance

207

Maintenance

207

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

❑ Inspect fuel filter *

❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *

❑ Inspect parking brake

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Inspect drive belts *

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

(Continued)

❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)

❑ Replace coolant

(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months after

every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

721

Maintenance

721

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)

135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect drive belts *

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)

(Continued)

Maintenance

227

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

(Continued)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(142,500 miles

(228,000 km) or 228 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

723

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

No check, No service required

❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months

❑ Rotate tire

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect vacuum hose

❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball

joint, upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid

❑ Inspect fuel filter *

❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *

❑ Inspect parking brake

❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

❑ Inspect drive belts *

(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months

after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

(Continued)

❑ Replace climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

❑ Replace air cleaner filter

❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)

❑ Replace coolant

(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months after

every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)

❑ Add fuel additive *

(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or

replace.

Maintenance

247

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer

to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM

MAINTENANCE

OPERATION

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

DRIVING

CONDITION

Engine oil and filter R Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months

A, B, C, D, E, F, G,

H, I, J, K

Air cleaner filter R More frequently C, E

Spark plugs R More frequently A, B, H, I, K

Automatic transaxle fluid R Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) A, C, E, F, G, I

Manual transaxle fluid R Every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) A, C, E, F, G, I

Front brake disc/pads, calipers I More frequently C, D, G, H

Rear brake disc/pads I More frequently C, D, G, F

725

Maintenance

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A-Repeatedly driving short distances of less than 5 miles

(8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km)

in freezing temperature

B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-

tances

C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-

spread roads

D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in

very cold weather

E-Driving in sandy areas

F -Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)

G-Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

H-Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

I -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle

towing

J -Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)

K-Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

MAINTENANCE ITEM

MAINTENANCE

OPERATION

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

DRIVING

CONDITION

Parking brake I More frequently C, D, G, H

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/

lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball

joint

I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I

Drive shafts and boots I Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months C, D, E, F, G, H, I

Climate control air filter (for evaporator

and blower unit)

R More frequently C, E

Maintenance

267

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be

changed at the intervals specified in

the maintenance schedule. If the car

is being driven in severe conditions,

more frequent oil and filter changes

are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of

cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil

saturation and replace if necessary.

Drive belts should be checked peri-

odically for proper tension and

adjusted as necessary.

Fuel filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at

which the vehicle may be driven,

damage the emission system and

cause multiple issues such as hard

starting. If an excessive amount of

foreign matter accumulates in the

fuel tank, the filter may require

replacement more frequently. After

installing a new filter, run the engine

for several minutes, and check for

leaks at the connections. Fuel filters

should be installed by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and

connections for leakage and dam-

age. Have an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer replace any damaged or leak-

ing parts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap

should be inspected at those inter-

vals specified in the maintenance

schedule. Make sure a new vapor

hose or fuel filler cap is correctly

replaced.

727

Maintenance

Vacuum crankcase ventilation

hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-

dence of heat and/or mechanical

damage. Hard and brittle rubber,

cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and

excessive swelling indicate deterio-

ration. Particular attention should be

paid to examine those hose surfaces

nearest to high heat sources, such

as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure

that the hoses do not come in con-

tact with any heat source, sharp

edges or moving component which

might cause heat damage or

mechanical wear. Inspect all hose

connections, such as clamps and

couplings, to make sure they are

secure, and that no leaks are pres-

ent. Hoses should be replaced

immediately if there is any evidence

of deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

A genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter

is recommended when the filter is

replaced.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs

of the correct heat range.

Cooling system

Check cooling system components,

such as radiator, coolant reservoir,

hoses and connections for leakage

and damage. Replace any damaged

parts.

Engine coolant

The coolant should be changed at

the intervals specified in the mainte-

nance schedule.

Maintenance

287

Automatic transaxle fluid

(if equipped)

Automatic transaxle fluid should not

be checked under normal usage

conditions. But in severe conditions,

the fluid should be changed at an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer in

accordance to the scheduled mainte-

nance at the beginning of this chap-

ter.

✽✽

NOTICE

Automatic transaxle fluid color is

basically red.

As the vehicle is driven, the auto-

matic transaxle fluid will begin to

look darker. This is a normal condi-

tion and you should not judge the

need to replace the fluid based upon

the changed color.

Manual transaxle fluid

(if equipped)

Inspect the manual transaxle fluid

according to the maintenance sched-

ule.

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation,

chafing, cracks, deterioration and

any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-

ed or damaged parts immediately.

Brake/clutch fluid

Check brake/clutch fluid level in the

brake/clutch fluid reservoir. The level

should be between the MIN and the

MAX marks on the side of the reser-

voir. Use only hydraulic brake/clutch

fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4

specification.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified fluid

could result in transaxle mal-

function and failure. Use only the

specified automatic transaxle

fluid (refer to “Recommended

Lubricants and Capacities” in

chapter 8).

729

Maintenance

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system

including the parking brake pedal

and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers

and rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear,

discs for run out and wear, and

calipers for fluid leakage.

Exhaust pipe and muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,

muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-

rioration, or damage. Start the

engine and listen carefully for any

exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-

nections or replace parts as neces-

sary.

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections

for looseness or damage. Retighten

to the specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and the

engine off, check for excessive free-

play in the steering wheel. Check the

linkage for bends or damage. Check

the dust boots and ball joints for

deterioration, cracks, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and

clamps for cracks, deterioration, or

damage. Replace any damaged

parts and, if necessary, repack the

grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and

connections for leakage and dam-

age.

Maintenance

307

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level

1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer’s

precautions.

2. Be sure the vehicle is on level

ground in P (Park) with the parking

brake set and the wheels blocked.

3. Turn the engine on and allow the

engine to reach normal operating

temperature.

4. Turn the engine off and wait about

five minutes for the oil to return to

the oil pan.

5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,

and re-insert it fully.

6. Pull the dipstick out again and

check the level. The level should

be between F and L.

7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil

to bring the level to F.

✽✽

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your engine:

• Do not overfill with engine oil.

Add oil in small quantities and

recheck level to ensure engine is

not overfilled.

• Do not spill engine oil when

adding or changing engine oil. Use

a funnel to help prevent oil from

being spilled on engine compo-

nents. Wipe off spilled oil immedi-

ately

OJK072002

731

Maintenance

✽✽

NOTICE

Use only the specified engine oil

(refer to “Recommended Lubricants

and Capacities” in chapter 8).

Checking the engine oil and

filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

according to the Maintenance

Schedule at the beginning of this

chapter.

WARNING - CALIFORNIA

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Engine oil contains chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer, birth defects

and reproductive harm. Used

engine oil may cause irritation

or cancer of the skin if left in

contact with the skin for pro-

longed periods of time. Always

protect your skin by washing

your hands thoroughly with

soap and warm water as soon

as possible after handling used

oil.

OMD070003N

Maintenance

327

ENGINE COOLANT

The high-pressure cooling system

has a reservoir filled with year-round

antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is

filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level at least once a year, at

the beginning of the winter season

and before traveling to a colder cli-

mate.

Checking the engine coolant

level

WARNING

Never remove the

radiator cap or the

drain plug while the

engine and radiator

are hot. Hot coolant

and steam may blow out under

pressure, causing serious

injury.

(Continued)

OMD070005N-1

(Continued)

Turn the engine off and wait

until the engine cools down.

Use extreme care when remov-

ing the radiator cap. Wrap a

thick towel around it, and turn it

counterclockwise slowly to the

first stop. Step back while the

pressure is released from the

cooling system. When you are

sure all the pressure has been

released, press down on the

cap, using a thick towel, and

continue turning counterclock-

wise to remove it.

WARNING

The electric motor for

the cooling fan may

continue to operate

or start up when the

engine is not running

and can cause serious injury.

Keep hands, clothing and tools

away from the rotating fan

blades of the cooling fan.

733

Maintenance

The electric motor for the cooling fan

is controlled by engine coolant tem-

perature, refrigerant pressure and

vehicle speed. As the engine coolant

temperature decreases, the electric

motor will automatically shut off. This

is a normal condition. If your vehicle

is equipped with GDI, the electric

motor for the cooling fan may begin

to operate at any time and continue

to operate until you disconnect the

negative battery cable.

Check the condition and connections

of all cooling system hoses and

heater hoses. Replace any swollen

or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled

between the F and the L marks on

the side of the coolant reservoir

when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

distilled (deionized) water to bring

the level to the F mark, but do not

overfill. If frequent additions are

required, we recommend that you

see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

for a cooling system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only

deionized water, distilled water or

soft water for your vehicle and

never mix hard water in the coolant

filled at the factory.

• An improper coolant mixture can

result in severe malfunction or

engine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must be

protected by an ethylene-glycol-

based coolant to prevent corrosion

and freezing.

• Do not use alcohol or methanol

coolant or mix them with the spec-

ified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less

than 35% antifreeze, which would

reduce the effectiveness of the

solution.

OMD070004N

Maintenance

347

For mixing percentage, refer to the

following table:

✽✽

NOTICE

If in doubt about the mix ratio, a

50% water and 50% antifreeze mix

is the easiest to mix together as it

will be the same quantity of each. It

is suitable to use for most tempera-

ture ranges of -31°F and higher.

Changing engine coolant

Have coolant changed by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer according to

the Maintenance Schedule at the

beginning of this chapter.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to engine

parts, put a thick towel around

the radiator cap before refilling

the coolant to prevent the

coolant from overflowing into

engine parts, such as the gener-

ator.

WARNING

• Do not use engine coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Engine coolant can severely

obscure visibility when

sprayed on the windshield

and may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an acci-

dent.

• Engine coolant may also

cause damage to paint and

body trim.

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze Water

5°F (-15°C) 35 65

-13°F (-25°C) 40 60

-31°F (-35°C) 50 50

-49°F (-45°C) 60 40

735

Maintenance

BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID

Checking the brake/clutch fluid

level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir

periodically. The fluid level should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap

and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean

the area around the reservoir cap

thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch

fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add the specified

brake/clutch fluid to the MAX level.

The level will fall with accumulated

mileage.

This is a normal condition associated

with the wear of the brake linings. If

the fluid level is excessively low, have

the brake/clutch system checked by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

Use only the specified brake/clutch

fluid (refer to “Recommended

Lubricants and Capacities” in chap-

ter 8).

WARNING

If the brake/clutch system

requires frequent additions of

fluid this could indicate a leak in

the brake/clutch system. Have

the vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Do not allow brake/clutch fluid

to come in contact with your

eyes. If brake/clutch fluid comes

in contact with your eyes, flush

your eyes with clean water for at

least 15 minutes and get imme-

diate medical attention.

CAUTION

• Do not allow brake/clutch fluid

to contact the vehicle’s body

paint, as paint damage will

result.

• brake/clutch fluid, which has

been exposed to open air for

an extended time should

NEVER be used as its quality

cannot be guaranteed. It

should be disposed of proper-

ly.

• Do use the wrong kind of

brake/clutch fluid. A few drops

of mineral based oil, such as

engine oil, in your brake/

clutch system can damage

brake/clutch system parts.

OMD070006N

Maintenance

367

WASHER FLUID

Checking the washer fluid

level

Check the fluid level in the washer

fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-

sary. Plain water may be used if

washer fluid is not available.

However, use washer solvent with

antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-

mates to prevent freezing.

Checking the parking brake

Check the stroke of the parking

brake by counting the number of

“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it

from the released position. Also, the

parking brake alone should securely

hold the vehicle on a fairly steep

grade. If the stroke is more or less

than specified, have the parking

brake adjusted by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 6 clicks at a force of 44

lbs (20 kg, 196 N)

PARKING BRAKE

OMD070007N

OMD050014

CAUTION

To prevent serious injury or

death, take the following safety

precautions when using washer

fluid:

• Do not use engine coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

Engine coolant can severely

obscure visibility when

sprayed on the windshield

and may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an acci-

dent or damage to paint and

body trim.

• Do not allow sparks or flame

to contact the washer fluid or

the washer fluid reservoir.

Washer fluid may contain

alcohol and can be flammable.

• Do not drink washer fluid and

avoid contact with skin.

Washer fluid is poisonous to

humans and animals.

• Keep washer fluid away from

children and animals.

737

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

Filter replacement

The air cleaner filter can be cleaned

for inspection using compressed air.

Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,

as water will damage the filter. If

soiled, the air cleaner filter must be

replaced.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover

attaching clips and open the cover.

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

3. Replace the air cleaner filter.

4. Lock the cover with the cover

attaching clips.

OMD070010

OMD070011 OMD070012

Maintenance

387

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule

✽✽

NOTICE

If the vehicle is operated in extreme-

ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the

element more often than the usual

recommended intervals (refer to

“Maintenance Under Severe Usage

Conditions” in this chapter).

CAUTION

• Do not drive with the air clean-

er filter removed. This will

result in excessive engine

wear.

• When removing the air cleaner

filter, be careful that dust or

dirt does not enter the air

intake, or damage may result.

• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts,

use of non-genuine parts

could damage the air flow sen-

sor.

739

Maintenance

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR CLEANER

Filter inspection

The climate control air filter should

be replaced according to the

Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle

is operated in severely air-polluted

cities or on dusty rough roads for a

long period, it should be inspected

more frequently and replaced earlier.

When you replace the climate control

air filter, replace it performing the fol-

lowing procedure, and be careful to

avoid damaging other components.

1. With the glove box open, remove

the stoppers on both sides to allow

the glove box to hang freely on the

hinges.

2. Remove the support rod.

3. Remove the climate control air fil-

ter case by pulling out both sides

of the cover.

OMD070013 OMD070015

Maintenance

407

4. Replace the climate control air fil-

ter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse order

of disassembly.

✽✽

NOTICE

When replacing the climate control

air filter install it properly.

Otherwise, the system may produce

noise and the effectiveness of the fil-

ter may be reduced.

OVG079016

741

Maintenance

WIPER BLADES

Blade inspection

Contamination of either the wind-

shield or the wiper blades with for-

eign matter can reduce the effective-

ness of the windshield wipers.

Common sources of contamination

are insects, tree sap, and hot wax

treatments used by some commer-

cial car washes. If the blades are not

wiping properly, clean both the win-

dow and the blades with a clean

cloth dampened with washer fluid.

✽✽

NOTICE

Commercial hot waxes applied by

automatic car washes have been

known to make the windshield diffi-

cult to clean.

Blade replacement

■■

Type A

1. Raise the wiper arm and slightly

rotate the wiper blade assembly to

expose the plastic locking clip.

1JBA5122

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to

fall against the windshield,

since it may chip or crack the

windshield.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, arms or other compo-

nents, do not:

• Use gasoline, kerosene, paint

thinner, or other solvents on

or near them.

• Attempt to move the wipers

manually.

• Use non-specified wiper

blades.

1LDA5023

Maintenance

427

2. Press the clip (1) and slide the

blade assembly downward (2).

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-

shield.

■■

Type B

1. Raise the wiper arm.

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip (1).

Then pull down the blade assem-

bly (2) and remove it.

3. Install the new blade assembly in

the reverse order of removal.

4. Return the wiper arm on the wind-

shield.

1JBA7037

1JBA7038

OHM078059

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to

fall against the windshield,

since it may chip or crack the

windshield.

OYF079061

OYF079062

743

Maintenance

BATTERY

Jump starting can be dangerous if

done incorrectly. Follow the jump

starting procedure in this section to

avoid serious injury or damage to

your vehicle. If in doubt about how to

properly jump start your vehicle, we

strongly recommend that you have a

service technician or towing service

do it for you.

WARNING

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders,

always follow these precautions

when working near or handling

the battery:

Always read and follow

instructions carefully

when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection

designed to protect the

eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks,

or smoking materials

away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always

present in battery cells,

is highly combustible,

and may explode if ignit-

ed.

Keep batteries out of

reach of children.

(Continued)

OMD070016

(Continued)

Batteries contain sulfu-

ric acid which is highly

corrosive. Do not allow

acid to contact your

eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush

your eyes with clean water for at

least 15 minutes and get imme-

diate medical attention. If acid

gets on your skin, thoroughly

wash the area. If you feel pain or

a burning sensation, get med-

ical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressure

on the case may cause battery

acid to leak. Lift with a battery

carrier or with your hands on

opposite corners.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle if your battery is

frozen.

(Continued)

Maintenance

447

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mount-

ed.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated with

petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled acid from the bat-

tery immediately with a solution of

water and baking soda.

(Continued)

• NEVER attempt to recharge

the battery when the vehicle’s

battery cables are connected

to the battery.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these compo-

nents with the engine running

or when the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

WARNING - CALIFORNIA

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, and

related accessories contain

lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer, birth

defects and reproductive harm.

Batteries also contain other

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer.

Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

• When you do not use the vehi-

cle for a long time in a low

temperature area, disconnect

the battery and keep it

indoors.

• Always charge the battery

fully to prevent battery case

damage in low temperature

areas.

745

Maintenance

Battery recharging

By battery charger

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,

calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged

in a short time (because, for exam-

ple, the headlights or interior lights

were left on while the vehicle was

not in use), recharge it by slow

charging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges

because of high electric load while

the vehicle is being used, recharge

it at 20-30A for two hours.

WARNING

Always follow these instruc-

tions when recharging your

vehicle’s battery to avoid the

risk of SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH from explosions or acid

burns:

• Before performing mainte-

nance or recharging the bat-

tery, turn off all accessories

and place the ignition switch

in the LOCK/OFF position.

• Keep all flames, sparks, or

smoking materials away from

the battery.

• Always work outdoors or in an

area with plenty of ventilation.

• Wear eye protection when

checking the battery during

charging.

• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in

a well ventilated area.

(Continued)

• Watch the battery during

charging, and stop or reduce

the charging rate if the battery

cells begin boiling violently.

• The negative battery cable

must be removed first and

installed last when the battery

is disconnected. Disconnect

the battery charger in the fol-

lowing order:

(1) Turn off the battery charg-

er main switch.

(2) Unhook the negative

clamp from the negative

battery terminal.

(3) Unhook the positive clamp

from the positive battery

terminal.

• Always use a genuine

HYUNDAI approved battery

when you replace the battery.

Maintenance

467

By jump starting

After a jump start from a good bat-

tery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 min-

utes before it is shutoff. The vehicle

may not restart if you shut it off

before the battery had a chance to

adequately recharge. See “Jump

Starting” in chapter 6 for more infor-

mation on jump starting procedures.

✽✽

NOTICE

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to

the environment and human

health. Dispose the battery

according to your local

law(s) or regulation.

Reset features

Some items need to be reset after

the battery has been discharged or

the battery has been disconnected.

See chapter 4 for:

• Auto up/down window

• Sunroof

• Trip computer

• Climate control system

• Clock

• Audio system

747

Maintenance

TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care

For proper maintenance, safety, and

maximum fuel economy, you must

always maintain recommended tire

inflation pressures and stay within

the load limits and weight distribution

recommended for your vehicle.

WARNING

Tire failure may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident. To reduce risk of

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH,

take the following precautions:

• Inspect your tires monthly for

proper inflation as well as

wear and damage.

• The recommended cold tire

pressure for your vehicle can

be found in this manual and

on the tire label located on the

driver’s side center pillar.

Always use a tire pressure

gauge to measure tire pres-

sure. Tires with too much or

too little pressure wear

unevenly causing poor han-

dling.

• Check the pressure of the

spare (if equipped) every time

you check the pressure of the

other tires on your vehicle.

(Continued)

• Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are

damaged. Worn tires can

cause loss of braking effec-

tiveness, steering) control, or

traction.

• ALWAYS replace tires with the

same size as each tire that

was originally supplied with

this vehicle. Using tires and

wheels other than the recom-

mended sizes could cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics, poor vehicle control, or

negatively affect your vehi-

cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) resulting in a serious

accident.

Maintenance

487

All specifications (sizes and pres-

sures) can be found on a label

attached to the driver’s side center

pillar

Recommended cold tire infla-

tion pressures

All tire pressures (including the

spare) should be checked when the

tires are cold. “Cold tires” means the

vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours or driven less than

one mile (1.6 km).

Warm tires normally exceed recom-

mended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6

psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air

from warm tires to adjust the pres-

sure or the tires will be under-inflat-

ed. For recommended inflation pres-

sure, refer to “Tire and Wheels” in

chapter 8.

OMD060012N

WARNING

Recommended pressures must

be maintained for the best ride,

vehicle handling, and minimum

tire wear.

Over-inflation or under-inflation

can reduce tire life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tire failure that

could result in loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

Severe under-inflation can lead

to severe heat build-up, causing

blowouts, tread separation and

other tire failures that can result

in the loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident. This

risk is much higher on hot days

and when driving for long peri-

ods at high speeds.

749

Maintenance

Check tire inflation pressure

Check your tires, including the spare

tire, once a month or more.

How to check

Use a good quality tire pressure

gauge to check tire pressure. You

can not tell if your tires are properly

inflated simply by looking at them.

Radial tires may look properly inflat-

ed when they are under-inflated.

Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve stem.Press the tire gauge firm-

ly onto the valve to get a pressure

measurement. If the cold tire inflation

pressure matches the recommended

pressure on the tire and loading

information label, no further adjust-

ment is necessary. If the pressure is

low, add air until you reach the rec-

ommended pressure. Make sure to

put the valve caps back on the valve

stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or

moisture could get into the valve

core and cause air leakage. If a valve

cap is missing, install a new one as

soon as possible.

If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the

center of the tire valve. Recheck the

tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be

sure to put the valve caps back on

the valve stems. Without the valve

cap, dirt or moisture could get into

the valve core and cause air leakage.

If a valve cap is missing, install a new

one as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Under-inflation results in exces-

sive wear, poor handling and

reduced fuel economy. Wheel

deformation is also possible.

Keep your tire pressures at the

proper levels. If a tire frequently

needs refilling, have it checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er.

Over-inflation produces a harsh

ride, excessive wear at the cen-

ter of the tire tread, and a

greater possibility of damage

from road hazards.

Maintenance

507

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI

recommends that the tires be rotated

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or

sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for

correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage. Abnormal wear is

usually caused by incorrect tire pres-

sure, improper wheel alignment, out-

of-balance wheels, severe braking or

severe cornering. Look for bumps or

bulges in the tread or side of tire.

Replace the tire if you find either of

these conditions. Replace the tire if

fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,

be sure to bring the front and rear tire

pressures to specification and check

lug nut tightness (proper torque is

65-79 lb.ft [9-11 kg.m]).

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tires are rotated.

✽✽

NOTICE

Rotate radial tires that have an

asymmetric tread pattern only from

front to rear and not from right to

left.

OBH078040

■ Without a spare tire

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare

tire for tire rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-

stances. This may cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics that may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident.

751

Maintenance

Wheel alignment and tire bal-

ance

The wheels on your vehicle were

aligned and balanced carefully at the

factory to give you the longest tire life

and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to

have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire

wear or your vehicle pulling one way

or the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating

when driving on a smooth road, your

wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear

indicator will appear as a solid band

across the tread. This shows there is

less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread

left on the tire. Replace the tire when

this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear

across the entire tread before replac-

ing the tire.

CAUTION

Improper wheel weights can

damage your vehicle’s alu-

minum wheels. Use only

approved wheel weights.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator

WARNING

To reduce the risk of DEATH or

SERIOUS INJURY:

Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are dam-

aged. Worn tires can cause loss

of braking effectiveness, steer-

ing control, and traction.

Always replace tires with the

same size as each tire that was

originally supplied with this

vehicle. Using tires and wheels

other than the recommended

sizes could cause unusual han-

dling characteristics, poor vehi-

cle control, or negatively affect

your vehicle’s Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) resulting in a

serious accident.

Tires degrade over time, even

when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining

tread, HYUNDAI recommends

that tires be replaced after six

(6) years of normal service.

(Continued)

Maintenance

527

Compact spare tire replacement

A compact spare tire has a shorter

tread life than a regular size tire.

Replace it when you can see the

tread wear indicator bars on the tire.

The replacement compact spare tire

should be the same size and design

tire as the one provided with your

new vehicle and should be mounted

on the same compact spare tire

wheel. The compact spare tire is not

designed to be mounted on a regular

size wheel, and the compact spare

tire wheel is not designed for mount-

ing a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for

any reason, make sure the new

wheels are equivalent to the original

factory units in diameter, rim width

and offset.

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you

drive on worn tires, tires that are

improperly inflated or on slippery

road surfaces. Tires should be

replaced when tread wear indicators

appear. To reduce the possibility of

losing control, slow down whenever

there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

(Continued)

Heat caused by hot climates or

frequent high loading condi-

tions can accelerate the aging

process. Failure to follow this

warning may cause sudden tire

failure, which could lead to a

loss of vehicle control resulting

in an accident.

WARNING

The original tire should be

repaired or replaced as soon as

possible to avoid failure of the

spare and loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.The

compact spare tire is for emer-

gency use only. Do not operate

your vehicle over 50 mph (80

km/h) when using the compact

spare tire.

753

Maintenance

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct

wheel alignment helps to decrease

tire wear. If you find a tire is worn

unevenly, have your dealer check the

wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed,

make sure they are balanced. This

will increase vehicle ride comfort and

tire life. Additionally, a tire should

always be rebalanced if it is removed

from the wheel.

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies and

describes the fundamental charac-

teristics of the tire and also provides

the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

2.Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire

size designation. You will need this

information when selecting replace-

ment tires for your car. The following

explains what the letters and num-

bers in the tire size designation

mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tire size designa-

tor could vary depending on your

vehicle.)

P195/65R15 94H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tires

marked with the prefix “P’’ are

intended for use on passenger

cars or light trucks; however, not

all tires have this marking).

195 - Tire width in millimeters.

65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of its

width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

15 - Rim diameter in inches.

94 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximum

load the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the

speed rating chart in this section

for additional information.

I030B04JM

5,6

Maintenance

547

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-

tant information that you need if you

ever have to replace one. The follow-

ing explains what the letters and

numbers in the wheel size designa-

tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.0JX15

6.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

15 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-

ferent speed ratings currently being

used for passenger car tires. The

speed rating is part of the tire size

designation on the sidewall of the

tire. This symbol corresponds to that

tire's designed maximum safe oper-

ating speed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire

Identification Number)

Any tires that are over six years old,

based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tire) should be

replaced by new ones. You can find

the manufacturing date on the tire

sidewall (possibly on the inside of the

wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of num-

bers on a tire consisting of numbers

and English letters. The manufactur-

ing date is designated by the last four

digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a

plant code number, tire size and

tread pattern and the last four num-

bers indicate week and year manu-

factured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 represents

that the tire was produced in the 16th

week of 2014.

S 112 mph (180 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

Maximum Speed

Speed

Rating

Symbol

755

Maintenance

4.Tire ply composition and mate-

rial

The number of layers or plies of rub-

ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply con-

struction; the letter "D“ means diago-

nal or bias ply construction; and the

letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-

struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tire and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation

pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,

always use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall

between tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width.

For example:

TREAD wear 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified govern-

ment test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one-and-a-

half times (1½) as well on the gov-

ernment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the

sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or

optional equipment on your vehicle

may vary with respect to grade.

Maintenance

567

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spec-

ified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perform-

ance.

Temperature - A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B and C representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. Grade C

responds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher

levels of performance on the labora-

tory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, over-inflation,

or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination,

can cause heat build-up and

possible sudden tire failure.

This may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

757

Maintenance

Tire terminology and defini-

tions

Air Pressure

The amount of air inside the tire

pressing outward on the tire. Air

pressure is expressed in pounds per

square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight

This means the combined weight of

optional accessories. Some exam-

ples of optional accessories are

automatic transaxle, power seats,

and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio

The relationship of a tire's height to

its width.

Belt

A rubber coated layer of cords that is

located between the plies and the

tread. Cords may be made from steel

or other reinforcing materials.

Bead

The tire bead contains steel wires

wrapped by steel cords that hold the

tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire

A pneumatic tire in which the plies

are laid at alternate angles less than

90 degrees to the centerline of the

tread.

Cold Tire Pressure

The amount of air pressure in a tire,

measured in pounds per square inch

(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire

has built up heat from driving.

Curb Weight

This means the weight of a motor

vehicle with standard and optional

equipment including the maximum

capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but

without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings

A code molded into the sidewall of a

tire signifying that the tire is in com-

pliance with the U.S. Department of

Transportation motor vehicle safety

standards. The DOT code includes

the Tire Identification Number (TIN),

an alphanumeric designator which

can also identify the tire manufactur-

er, production plant, brand and date

of production.

Maintenance

587

GVWR

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT

Gross Axle Weight Rating for the

Front Axle.

GAWR RR

Gross Axle Weight Rating for the

Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall

The side of an asymmetrical tire, that

must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa)

The metric unit for air pressure.

Load Index

An assigned number ranging from 1

to 279 that corresponds to the load

carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum air pressure to which

a cold tire may be inflated. The max-

imum air pressure is molded onto the

sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating

The load rating for a tire at the maxi-

mum permissible inflation pressure

for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight

The sum of curb weight; accessory

weight; vehicle capacity weight; and

production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight

The number of occupants a vehicle

is designed to seat multiplied by 150

pounds (68 kg).

Occupant Distribution

Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall

An asymmetrical tire has a particular

side that faces outward when mount-

ed on a vehicle. The outward facing

sidewall bears white lettering or

bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same moldings on

the inner facing sidewall.

759

Maintenance

Passenger (P-Metric) tire

A tire used on passenger cars and

some light duty trucks and multipur-

pose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-

ed tire inflation pressure as shown

on the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of

the tread.

Rim

A metal support for a tire and upon

which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall

The portion of a tire between the

tread and the bead.

Speed Rating

An alphanumeric code assigned to a

tire indicating the maximum speed at

which a tire can operate.

Traction

The friction between the tire and the

road surface.The amount of grip pro-

vided.

Tread

The portion of a tire that comes into

contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators

Narrow bands, sometimes called

"wear bars," that show across the

tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of

tread remains.

UTQGS

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards is a tire information sys-

tem that provides consumers with

ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-

ture and treadwear. Ratings are

determined by tire manufacturers

using government testing proce-

dures. The ratings are molded into

the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight

The number of designated seating

positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68

kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage

load.

Maintenance

607

Vehicle Maximum Load on the

Tire

Load on an individual tire due to curb

and accessory weight plus maximum

occupant and cargo weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal occu-

pant weight and dividing by 2.

Vehicle Placard

A label permanently attached to a

vehicle showing the original equip-

ment tire size and recommended

inflation pressure.

All season tires

HYUNDAI specifies all season tires

on some models to provide good

performance for use all year round,

including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All season tires are identified

by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud

and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow

tires have better snow traction than

all season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on

some models to provide superior

performance on dry roads. Summer

tire performance is substantially

reduced in snow and ice. Summer

tires do not have the tire traction rat-

ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire

side wall. If you plan to operate your

vehicle in snowy or icy conditions,

HYUNDAI recommends the use of

snow tires or all season tires on all

four wheels.

Snow tires

If you equip your car with snow tires,

they should be the same size and

have the same load capacity as the

original tires. Snow tires should be

installed on all four wheels; other-

wise, poor handling may result. Snow

tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)

more air pressure than the pressure

recommended for the standard tires

on the tire label on the driver's side of

the center pillar, or up to the maxi-

mum pressure shown on the tire

sidewall, whichever is less. Do not

drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)

when your vehicle is equipped with

snow tires.

761

Maintenance

Radial-ply tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved

tread life, road hazard resistance and

smoother high speed ride. The radi-

al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of

belted construction, and are selected

to complement the ride and handling

characteristics of your vehicle.

Radial-ply tires have the same load

carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias

belted tires of the same size, and use

the same recommended inflation

pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires

with bias-ply or bias belted tires is

not recommended. Any combina-

tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias

belted tires when used on the same

vehicle will seriously deteriorate

vehicle handling. The best rule to fol-

low is: Identical pairs of radial-ply

tires should always be used as a set

for the front tires and a set for the

rear tires.

Longer wearing tires can be more

susceptible to irregular tread wear. It

is very important to follow the tire

rotation interval in this chapter to

achieve the tread life potential of

these tires. Cuts and punctures in

radial-ply tires are repairable only in

the tread area, because of sidewall

flexing. Consult your tire dealer for

radial-ply tire repairs.

Low aspect ratio tires

Low aspect ratio tires, the aspect

ratio is lower than 50, are provided

for sporty looks.

Because low aspect ratio tires are

optimized for handling and braking, it

may be more uncomfortable to ride

in and there is more noise compare

with normal tires.

WARNING

Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-

stances.This may cause unusu-

al handling characteristics that

may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

Maintenance

627

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize tire

damage with your own eyes.

But if there is the slightest

hint of tire damage, have the

tire checked or replaced

because the tire damage may

cause air leakage from the

tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driv-

ing on a rough road, off road,

pothole, manhole, or curb

stone, it will not be covered by

the warranty.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of the low

aspect ratio tire is shorter than

the normal, the wheel and tire of

the low aspect ratio tire is easi-

er to be damaged. So, follow the

instructions below.

- When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiously

because tires and wheels may

be damaged. And after driving,

inspect tires and wheels.

- When passing over a pothole,

speed bump, manhole, or curb

stone, drive slowly so that the

tires and wheels are not dam-

aged.

- If the tire is impacted, we rec-

ommend that you inspect the

tire condition or contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

- To prevent damage to the tire,

inspect the tire condition and

pressure every 2,000 miles

(3,000km).

763

Maintenance

FUSES

A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-

tected from electrical overload dam-

age by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,

one located in the driver’s side panel

bolster, the other in the engine com-

partment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-

sories, or controls do not work, check

the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse

has blown, the element inside the

fuse will be melted or broken.

If the electrical system does not

work, first check the driver’s side

fuse panel. Before replacing a blown

fuse, disconnect the negative battery

cable. Always replace a blown fuse

with one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this

indicates an electrical problem. Avoid

using the system involved and imme-

diately consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

✽✽

NOTICE

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade

type for lower amperage rating, car-

tridge type, and multi fuse for high-

er amperage ratings.

OLMB073029

Normal

■ Blade type

■ Cartridge type

■ Multi fuse

Blown

Normal Blown

WARNING

NEVER replace a fuse with any-

thing but another fuse of the

same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly a

fire.

• Do not install a wire or alu-

minum foil instead of the

proper fuse - even as a tem-

porary repair. It may cause

extensive wiring damage and

possibly a fire.

Maintenance

647

Instrument panel fuse replace-

ment

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Turn all other switches OFF.

3. Open the fuse panel cover.

4. Refer to the label on the inside of

the fuse panel cover to locate the

suspected fuse location

5. Pull the suspected fuse straight

out. Use the removal tool provided

in the engine compartment fuses

panel.

6. Remove and check the suspected

fuse; replace it if it is blown. Spare

fuses are provided in the instru-

ment panel fuse panels (or in the

engine compartment fuse panel).

7. Push in a new fuse of the same

rating, and make sure it fits tightly

in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Do not use a screwdriver or any

other metal object to remove

fuses because it may cause a

short circuit and damage the

system.

OMD070017

OMD070018

765

Maintenance

In an emergency, if you do not have

a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same

rating from a circuit you may not

need for operating the vehicle, such

as the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical

components do not work and the

fuses are OK, check the fuse panel

in the engine compartment. If a fuse

is blown, it must be replaced.

Memory fuse

Always, put the fuse switch at the ON

position.

If you move the switch to the OFF

position, some items such as the

audio and digital clock must be reset

and the remote key (or smart key)

may not work properly.

OMD070019

CAUTION

Always place the fuse switch in

the ON position while driving

the vehicle.

Maintenance

667

Engine compartment panel

fuse replacement

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Turn all other switches OFF.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tap and pulling up.

4. Remove and check the suspected

fuse; replace it if it is blown. To

remove or insert the fuse, use the

fuse puller in the engine compart-

ment fuse panel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same

rating, and make sure it fits tightly

in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Main fuse

If the main fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tap and pulling it up.

4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-

ture above.

5. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.

6. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽✽

NOTICE

If the main fuse is blown, consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OMD070020

OMD070021

767

Maintenance

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tap and pulling up.

4. Remove the bolts shown in the

picture above.

5. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.

6. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽✽

NOTICE

If the multi fuse is blown, consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OMD070022

Maintenance

687

Fuse/relay panel description

Instrument panel fuse panel

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,

you can find the fuse/relay label

describing fuse/relay name and

capacity.

✽✽

NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in

this manual may be applicable to

your vehicle. It is accurate at the

time of printing. When you inspect

the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer

to the fuse panel label.

OMD070023

OMD074063N

769

Maintenance

Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component

START 7.5A

W/O Smart Key : ICM Relay Box(Burglar Alarm Relay), With Smart Key : A/T - Transaxle Range Switch,

M/T - ECM, E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Start 1 Relay), Smart Key Control Module

A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Passenger Weight Classification Sensor

A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster

CLUSTER 7.5A ISG LDC (Audio), Cluster (ISG)

C/LIGHTER 15A Cigarette Lighter

BCM 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, BCM

A/CON SWITCH 7.5A A/C Control Module

MODULE 2 7.5A Electro Chromic Mirror, ESC Off Switch

MDPS 10A EPS Control Module

MODULE 4 7.5A Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH (IN/OUT), A/C Control Module(Auto A/C), ATM Lever Indicator

IG1 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Fuse - TCU 1, B/UP LP, ECU 3, ABS 3)

PDM 3 7.5A Smart Key Control Module

POWER OUTLET FRT 20A Power Outlet

MODULE 6 10A AMP, Power Outside Mirror Switch, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Digital Clock

Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)

Maintenance

707

Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component

HTD MIRR 10A Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module

MODULE 3 7.5A

Audio, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Digital Clock, BCM, Instrument Cluster,

Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module

BRAKE SWITCH 10A -

SPARE 15A -

SUNROOF 15A Sunroof

SPARE 15A -

BLOWER 10A Manual A/C - A/C Control Module, ECM/PCM, Blower Resistor

INTERIOR LAMP 10A

Luggage Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp,

Ignition Key Ill. & Door Warning Switch(W/O Smart Key)

TRUNK 10A Trunk Relay

MODULE 1 7.5A Sport Mode Switch(A/T), Key Solenoid(W/O Smart Key)

SPARE 15A -

S/HEATER RR 15A Rear Seat Warmer Switch LH/RH

MODULE 7 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, BCM

MULTIMEDIA 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit

771

Maintenance

Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component

P/WDW RH 25A P/WDW RH Relay

PDM 2 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Start Stop Button Switch

SPARE 10A -

WIPER FRT 25A

ICM Relay Box(Rain Sensor Relay), Multifunction Switch, Wiper Motor, E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Wiper

Relay)

MODULE 5 7.5A Cluster Ionizer(Auto A/C), Rain Sensor, Sunroof

SPARE 7.5A -

AMP 25A AMP

PDM 1 25A Smart Key Control Module

SPARE 20A -

A/CON 7.5A A/C Control Module, E/R Fuse & Relay Box(Blower Relay)

MEMORY 10A

Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, BCM, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Instrument Cluster,

Data Link Connector, Smart Junction Box Upgrade Connector, Electro Chromic Mirror,

A/C Control Module, Digital Clock

P/WDW LH 25A P/WDW LH Relay, Driver Safety Power Window Module

DR LOCK 20A Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box(Two Turn Relay)

P/SEAT DRV 30A Driver Seat Manual Switch

Maintenance

727

Engine compartment fuse panel

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,

you can find the fuse/relay label

describing fuse/relay name and

capacity.

✽✽

NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in

this manual may be applicable to

your vehicle. It is accurate at the

time of printing. When you inspect

the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer

to the fuse panel label.

OMD070024

OMD074067A

773

Maintenance

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

MULTI

FUSE

MDPS 80A EPS Control Module

B+1 60A Smart Junction Box(ARISU 1 (4CH), IPS 1, FUSE - P/WDW LH, P/WDW RH, TRUNK, AMP 1)

C/FAN 40A C/FAN Lo Relay, C/FAN Hi Relay

ABS 1 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

RR HTD 40A RR HTD Relay

BLOWER 40A Blower Relay

SPARE 40A -

B+2 60A

Smart Junction Box(Turn Signal Lamp Sound Relay, ARISU 2 (4CH), IPS (1CH),

IPS (2CH), FUSE - P/SEAT DRV, SUNROOF)

FUSE

B/UP LAMP 10A

Electro Chromic Mirror, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Rear Combination Lamp (In) LH/RH, M/T -

Back-Up Lamp Switch, BCM, Instrument Cluster

TCU 1 15A M/T - Vehicle Speed Sensor, A/T - Transaxle Range Switch

ABS 3 10A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

ECU 3 10A Stop Lamp Switch, M/T - ECM, A/T - PCM

WIPER 10A Rain Sensor, M/T - ECM, A/T - PCM

B+3 50A Smart Junction Box (Leak Current Autocut Device, FUSE - MODULE 1, PDM 1, PDM 2, DR LOCK)

EMS 40A EMS Box(Engine Control Relay, FUSE - ECU 4, A/CON, F/PUMP)

Maintenance

747

Description Fuse rating Protected component

FUSE

ISG INVERTER 50A Oil Pump Inverter

STOP LP 15A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module

S/HEATER FRT 20A Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module

HORN 15A Horn Relay

IG 2 40A

W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, Start 1 Relay,

With Smart Key : PDM 4 (IG2) Relay, Start 1 Relay

ABS 2 30A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

IG 1 40A W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, With Smart Key : PDM 3 (IG1) Relay, PDM 2 (ACC) Relay

F/PUMP 15A F/PUMP Relay

ECU 4 15A PCM (A/T), ECM (M/T)

A/CON 10A A/C COMP Relay

INJECTOR 10A Injector #1 / #2 / #3 / #4, A/C COMP Relay, F/PUMP Relay

ECU 2 10A PCM (A/T), ECM (M/T)

IGN COIL 1 20A Ignition Coil #1 / #2 / #3 / #4, Condenser

ECU 1 20A -

SENSOR 2 10A Immobilizer Module, Camshaft Position Sensor #1 / #2

775

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected component

FUSE

SENSOR 1 10A

Oxygen Sensor (UP/DOWN), Canister Close Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Oil Control

Valve #1 / #2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, C/FAN LO Relay, C/FAN HI Relay

SPARE 10A -

SPARE 15A -

SPARE 20A -

Maintenance

767

LIGHT BULBS

Consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer to replace most vehicle light

bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle

light bulbs because other parts of the

vehicle must be removed before you

can get to the bulb. This is especially

true for removing the headlight

assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlight

assembly can result in damage to

the vehicle.

✽✽

NOTICE

After heavy driving, rain or wash-

ing, headlight and taillight lenses

could appear frosty. This condition

is caused by the temperature differ-

ence between the lamp inside and

the outside temperature. This is sim-

ilar to the condensation on your win-

dows inside your vehicle during the

rain and doesn’t indicate a problem

with your vehicle. If the water leaks

into the lamp bulb circuitry, have

your vehicle checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Headlight, parking light, turn

signal light, side marker and

front fog light bulb replace-

ment

WARNING

• Prior to replacing a light,

depress the foot brake, move

the shift lever into P (Park)

apply the parking brake, place

the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF position, and take

the key with you when leaving

the vehicle to avoid sudden

movement of the vehicle and

to prevent possible electric

shock.

• Be aware the bulbs may be

hot and may burn your fin-

gers.

OMD074101N

■ Type A

OMD074102N

■ Type B

777

Maintenance

(1) Turn signal light

(2) Headlight (High)

(3) Headlight (Low)

(4) Parking (Position) light

(5) Side marker

(6) Fog light*

* : if equipped

Halogen bulb

• Always handle them carefully, and

avoid scratches and abrasions. If

the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with

liquids.

• Never touch the glass with bare

hands. Residual oil may cause the

bulb to overheat and burst when lit.

• A bulb should be operated only

when installed in a headlamp.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediately

and carefully dispose of it.

OMD070053N

WARNING

• Handle halogen bulbs with

care. Halogen bulbs contain

pressurized gas that will pro-

duce flying pieces of glass

that could cause injuries if

broken.

• Wear eye protection when

changing a bulb. Allow the

bulb to cool down before han-

dling it.

OMD074026K

■ Type C

Maintenance

787

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Loosen the screws with a screw-

driver.

4. Pull the headlight assembly out to

the front of the vehicle.

5. Disconnect the power connec-

tor(s) from the back of the head-

light assembly.

Headlight bulb (low, high)

6. Remove the headlight bulb cover

by turning it counterclockwise.

7. Disconnect the headlight bulb

socket-connector.

8. Unsnap the headlight bulb retain-

ing wire by depressing the end

and pushing it upward.

9. Remove the bulb from the head-

light assembly.

10. Install a new headlight bulb and

snap the headlight bulb retaining

wire into position by aligning the

wire with the groove on the bulb.

11. Connect the headlight bulb sock-

et-connector.

12. Install the headlight bulb cover by

turning it clockwise.

OMD074028

Low

High

OMD074027

779

Maintenance

Turn signal light

Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous

page.

6. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

7. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket

8. Insert a new bulb into the socket

and rotating it until it locks into

place.

9. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly.

Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

10.Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

Parking (Position) light bulbs

If the LED light does not operate,

have the vehicle checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Front side marker

Follow steps 1 to 5 from the previous

page.

6. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

7. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pulling out the bulb.

8. Insert a new bulb.

OMD074029

Turn signal

OMD074112

Side marker

Maintenance

807

9. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly.

Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

10. Reinstall the light assembly to

the body of the vehicle.

Fog light bulbs

1. Remove the front bumper under

cover.

2. Reach your hand into the back of

the front bumper.

3. Disconnect the power connector

from the socket.

4. Remove the bulb-socket from the

housing by turning the socket

counter clockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the housing.

5. Install the new bulb-socket into the

housing by aligning the tabs on

the socket with the slots in the

housing. Push the socket into the

housing and turn the socket clock-

wise.

6. Connect the power connector to

the socket.

7. Reinstall the front bumper under

cover.

Side repeater light replace-

ment

If the LED light does not operate,

have the vehicle checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OMD070030

781

Maintenance

Rear combination light bulb

replacement

(1) Stop/Tail light

(2) Turn signal light

(3) Back-up light

(4) Tail light

Outside light

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the service cover by

pulling out the service cover.

3. Loosen the assembly retaining

nuts.

4. Remove the rear combination light

assembly from the body of the

vehicle.

OMD074071

OMD074031

■ Type A

■ Type B

OMD070032

OMD070033

OMD070034

Maintenance

827

Stop/Tail light and turn signal light

5. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

6. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

8. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly.

Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

Stop/Tail light (Type B)

If the LED light does not operate,

have the vehicle checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Side marker

5. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

6. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

7. Inset a new bulb by insetring it into

the socket.

8. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly.

Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

OMD074111

OMD074110

■ Type A

■ Type B

Turn signal

Side marker

Stop/Tail

Turn signal

Side marker

783

Maintenance

Inside light

1.Open the trunk.

2.Loosen the retaining screw of the

trunk lid cover and then remove the

cover.

3.Disconnect the connector and then

remove the nuts by turning the nuts

counter clockwise.

4.Take the light assembly out.

5. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

6. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

OMD070037

OMD070038C

OMD074040

OMD074108

■ Type A

■ Type B

Back-up

Tail

Back-up

Maintenance

847

7.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket.

8.Install the light assembly to the

trunk.

9.Reinstall the nuts and connector

and then the trunk lid cover by

pushing in the screw.

Stop/Tail light (Type B)

If the LED light does not operate,

have the vehicle checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

High mounted stop light

replacement

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the socket by turning it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots.

3. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

5. Install the socket in the assembly

by aligning the tabs on the socket

with the slots in the assembly.

Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

OMD070041

OMD070042

785

Maintenance

License plate light bulb

replacement

1. Remove the cover by pressing it

as direction of the arrows.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall in the reverse order.

Interior light bulb replacement

OMD070046

■ Luggage lamp ■ Map lamp

■ Vanity mirror lamp

■ Room lamp

OMD070044/OMD070043 OMD070045/OTD079035

Maintenance

867

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,

gently pry the lens from the interi-

or lamp housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

lamp housing notches and snap

the lens into place.

WARNING

Use care not to dirty or damage

lenses, lens tabs, and plastic

housings.

787

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label

directions when using any chemical

cleaner or polish. Read all warning

and caution statements that appear

on the label.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish

from rust and deterioration, wash it

thoroughly and frequently at least

once a month with lukewarm or cold

water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road

driving, you should wash it after each

off-road trip. Pay special attention to

the removal of any accumulation of

salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign

materials. Make sure the drain holes

in the lower edges of the doors and

rocker panels are kept clear and

clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar

deposits can damage your vehicle’s

finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain

water may not completely remove all

these deposits. A mild soap, safe for

use on painted surfaces, should be

used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-

oughly with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-

ish.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test

the brakes while driving slowly

to see if they have been affected

by water before getting on the

road. If braking performance is

impaired, dry the brakes by

applying them lightly while

maintaining a slow forward

speed.

CAUTION

• Do not use strong soap, chem-

ical detergents or hot water,

and do not wash the vehicle in

direct sunlight or when the

body of the vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the

side windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure

water. Water may leak through

the windows and wet the inte-

rior.

• To prevent damage to the

plastic parts, do not clean with

chemical solvents or strong

detergents.

Maintenance

887

Waxing

A good coat of wax is a barrier

between your paint and contaminate.

Keeping a good coat of wax on your

vehicle will help protect it.

Wax the vehicle when water will no

longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle

before waxing. Use a good quality

liquid or paste wax, and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all

metal trim to protect it and to main-

tain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-

als with a spot remover will usually

strip the wax from the finish. Be sure

to re-wax these areas even if the rest

of the vehicle does not yet need wax-

ing.

CAUTION

• Wiping dust or dirt off the

body with a dry cloth will

scratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abra-

sive cleaners, or strong deter-

gents containing highly alka-

line or caustic agents on

chrome-plated or anodized

aluminum parts. This may

result in damage to the pro-

tective coating and cause dis-

coloration or paint deteriora-

tion.

CAUTION

• Water washing in the engine

compartment including high

pressure water washing may

cause the failure of electrical

circuits located in the engine

compartment.

• Never allow water or other liq-

uids to come in contact with

electrical/electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as

this may damage them.

OJB037800

789

Maintenance

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repaired

promptly. Exposed metal will quickly

rust and may develop into a major

repair expense.

✽✽

NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and

requires any metal repair or

replacement, be sure the body shop

applies anti-corrosion materials to

the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper or

other sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-

metal parts from corrosion, apply a

coating of wax or chrome preser-

vative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal

areas, cover the bright metal parts

with a heavier coating of wax or

preservative. If necessary, coat the

parts with non-corrosive petroleum

jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may

collect on the underbody. If these

materials are not removed, acceler-

ated rusting can occur on underbody

parts such as the fuel lines, frame,

floor pan and exhaust system, even

though they have been treated with

rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-

body and wheel openings with luke-

warm or cold water once a month,

after off-road driving and at the end

of each winter. Pay special attention

to these areas because it is difficult

to see all the mud and dirt. It will do

more harm than good to wet down

the road grime without removing it.

The lower edges of doors, rocker

panels, and frame members have

drain holes that should not be

allowed to clog with dirt; trapped

water in these areas can cause rust-

ing.

Maintenance

907

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated

with a clear protective finish.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corro-

sion

By using the most advanced design

and construction practices to combat

corrosion, HYUNDAI produces cars

of the highest quality. However, this is

only part of the job. To achieve the

long-term corrosion resistance your

vehicle can deliver, the owner's

cooperation and assistance is also

required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corro-

sion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath

the vehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective

coatings by stones, gravel, abra-

sion or minor scrapes and dents

which leave unprotected metal

exposed to corrosion.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test

the brakes while driving slowly

to see if they have been affected

by water. If braking performance

is impaired, dry the brakes by

applying them lightly while

maintaining a slow forward

speed.

CAUTION

• Do not use abrasive cleaner,

polishing compound, solvent,

or wire brushes on aluminum

wheels.

• Clean the wheel when it has

cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neu-

tral detergent, and rinse thor-

oughly with water. Also, clean

the wheels after driving on

salted roads.

• Do not wash the wheels with

high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any cleaners con-

taining acid or alkaline or acid

detergents.

791

Maintenance

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehi-

cle is regularly exposed to corrosive

materials, corrosion protection is

particularly important. Some of the

common causes of accelerated cor-

rosion are road salts, dust control

chemicals, ocean air and industrial

pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in

which corrosion is most likely to

occur. For example, corrosion is

accelerated by high humidity, partic-

ularly when temperatures are just

above freezing. In such conditions,

the corrosive material is kept in con-

tact with the car surfaces by moisture

that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive

because it is slow to dry and holds

moisture in contact with the vehicle.

Although the mud appears to be dry,

it can still retain the moisture and

promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also acceler-

ate corrosion of parts that are not

properly ventilated so the moisture

can be dispersed. For all these rea-

sons, it is particularly important to

keep your vehicle clean and free of

mud or accumulations of other mate-

rials. This applies not only to the vis-

ible surfaces but particularly to the

underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

Keep your car clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is

to keep your vehicle clean and free

of corrosive materials. Attention to

the underside of the vehicle is partic-

ularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area

— where road salts are used, near

the ocean, areas with industrial

pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you

should take extra care to prevent

corrosion. In winter, hose off the

underside of your vehicle at least

once a month and be sure to clean

the underside thoroughly when

winter is over.

Maintenance

927

• When cleaning underneath the

vehicle, pay particular attention to

the components under the fenders

and other areas that are hidden

from view. Do a thorough job; just

dampening the accumulated mud

rather than washing it away will

accelerate corrosion rather than

prevent it. Water under high pres-

sure and steam are particularly

effective in removing accumulated

mud and corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,

rocker panels and frame members,

be sure that drain holes are kept

open so that moisture can escape

and not be trapped inside to accel-

erate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poor-

ly ventilated garage. This creates a

favorable environment for corrosion.

This is particularly true if you wash

your vehicle in the garage or drive it

into the garage when it is still wet or

covered with snow, ice or mud. Even

a heated garage can contribute to

corrosion unless it is well ventilated

so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish

should be covered with "touch-up"

paint as soon as possible to reduce

the possibility of corrosion. If bare

metal is showing through, the atten-

tion of a qualified body and paint

shop is recommended.

Bird droppings are highly corrosive

and may damage painted surfaces in

just a few hours. Always remove bird

droppings as soon as possible.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as

perfume and cosmetic oil, from con-

tacting the interior parts because

they may cause damage or discol-

oration. If they do contact the interior

parts, wipe them off immediately.

See the instructions for the proper

way to clean vinyl.

CAUTION

• Never allow water or other liq-

uids to come in contact with

electrical/electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as

this may damage them.

• When cleaning leather prod-

ucts (steering wheel, seats

etc.), use neutral detergents

or low alcohol content solu-

tions. If you use high alcohol

content solutions or acid/alka-

line detergents, the color of

the leather may fade or the

surface may get stripped off.

793

Maintenance

Cleaning the upholstery and inte-

rior trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from

vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum

cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a

vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-

ric with a whisk broom or vacuum

cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-

tion recommended for upholstery or

carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-

diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If

fresh spots do not receive immediate

attention, the fabric can be stained

and its color can be affected. Also, its

fire-resistant properties can be

reduced if the material is not proper-

ly maintained.

Cleaning the seat belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild

soap solution recommended for

cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow

the instructions provided with the

soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the

webbing because this may weaken

the seat belt.

Cleaning the interior window

glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the

vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-

ered with an oily, greasy or waxy

film), they should be cleaned with

glass cleaner. Follow the directions

on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION

Using anything but recommend-

ed cleaners and procedures

may affect the fabric's appear-

ance and fire-resistant proper-

ties.

CAUTION

Do not scrape or scratch the

inside of the rear window. This

may result in damage to the rear

window defroster grid.

Maintenance

947

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty

information contained in the Owner’s

Handbook & Warranty Information

booklet in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an

emission control system to meet all

applicable emission regulations.

There are three emission control

systems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control sys-

tem

(2) Evaporative emission control sys-

tem

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function

of the emission control systems, it is

recommended that you have your

vehicle inspected and maintained by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in

accordance with the maintenance

schedule in this manual.

1. Crankcase emission control

system

The positive crankcase ventilation

system is employed to prevent air

pollution caused by blow-by gases

being emitted from the crankcase.

This system supplies fresh filtered air

to the crankcase through the air

intake hose. Inside the crankcase,

the fresh air mixes with blow-by

gases, which then pass through the

PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission con-

trol system including

Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery (ORVR)

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel

vapors from escaping into the atmos-

phere. The ORVR system is

designed to allow the vapors from

the fuel tank to be loaded into a can-

ister while refueling at the gas sta-

tion, preventing the escape of fuel

vapors into the atmosphere.

WARNING

• The exhaust system and cat-

alytic converter are very hot

during and immediately after

the engine has been running.

To avoid SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH.

• Do not park, idle, or drive the

vehicle over or near flamma-

ble objects, such as grass,

vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.

A hot exhaust system can

ignite flammable items under

your vehicle.

• Keep away from the exhaust

system and catalytic convert-

er or you may get burned.

Also, Do not remove the heat

sink around the exhaust sys-

tem, do not seal the bottom of

the vehicle, and do not coat

the vehicle for corrosion con-

trol. It may present a fire risk

under certain conditions.

795

Maintenance

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel

tank are absorbed and stored in the

onboard canister.When the engine is

running, the fuel vapors absorbed in

the canister are drawn into the surge

tank through the purge control sole-

noid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve

(PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is

controlled by the Engine Control

Module (ECM); when the engine

coolant temperature is low during

idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-

orated fuel is not taken into the

engine. After the engine warms-up

during ordinary driving, the PCSV

opens to introduce evaporated fuel to

the engine.

3. Exhaust emission control

system

The Exhaust Emission Control

System is a highly effective system

which controls exhaust emissions

while maintaining good vehicle per-

formance.

When the engine starts or fails to

start, excessive attempts to restart

the engine may cause damage to the

emission system.

Vehicle modifications

• This vehicle should not be modi-

fied. Modification of your vehicle

could affect its performance, safety

or durability and may even violate

governmental safety and emis-

sions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance

problems resulting from any modifi-

cation may not be covered under

warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle to

operate abnormally, wire damage,

battery discharge and fire. For your

safety, do not use unauthorized

electronic devices.

Engine exhaust (carbon monox-

ide) precautions

• Carbon monoxide can be present

with other exhaust fumes. If you

smell exhaust fumes of any kind in

your vehicle, drive with all the win-

dows fully open. Have your vehicle

checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING

Engine exhaust gases contain

carbon monoxide (CO). Though

colorless and odorless, it is

dangerous and could be lethal if

inhaled. Follow the instructions

on this page to avoid CO poi-

soning.

Maintenance

967

• Do not operate the engine in con-

fined or closed areas (such as

garages) any more than what is

necessary to move the vehicle in or

out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an

open area for more than a short

time with the engine running,

adjust the ventilation system (as

needed) to draw outside air into the

vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped

vehicle for any extended time with

the engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to

start, excessive attempts to restart

the engine may cause damage to

the emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalyt-

ic converters (if equipped)

WARNING

• The exhaust system and cat-

alytic converter are very hot

during and immediately after

the engine has been running.

To avoid SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH.

• Do not park, idle, or drive the

vehicle over or near flamma-

ble objects, such as grass,

vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.

A hot exhaust system can

ignite flammable items under

your vehicle.

• Keep away from the exhaust

system and catalytic convert-

er or you may get burned.

Also, Do not remove the heat

sink around the exhaust sys-

tem, do not seal the bottom of

the vehicle, and do not coat

the vehicle for corrosion con-

trol. It may present a fire risk

under certain conditions.

WARNING - CALIFORNIA

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide vari-

ety of automobile components

and parts, including compo-

nents found in the interior fur-

nishings in a vehicle, contain or

emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects and repro-

ductive harm. In addition, cer-

tain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain or emit chem-

icals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproduc-

tive harm.

797

Maintenance

Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-

alytic converter emission control

device.

To prevent damage to the catalytic

converter and to your vehicle, take

the following precautions:

(Continued)

• Do not modify or tamper with

any part of the engine or emis-

sion control system. All

inspections and adjustments

must be made by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Avoid driving with extremely

low fuel level. If you run out of

gasoline, it could cause the

engine to misfire and result in

excessive loading of the cat-

alytic converter.

CAUTION

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for

gasoline engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle

when there are signs of

engine malfunction, such as

misfire or a noticeable loss of

performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the

engine. Examples of misuse

are coasting with the engine

off and descending steep

grades in gear with the engine

off.

• Do not operate the engine at

high idle speed for extended

periods (5 minutes or more).

(Continued)

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE

Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:

Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries,

must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).

798

Maintenance

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Capacity/Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 8-4

• Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Consumer information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Reporting safety defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

BULB WATTAGE

* : if equipped

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb Type

Headlights

(Low)

Standard 55 H11

Projection 60 9005L+*

Headlights (High) 55 H7 LL

Front turn signal lights/

Position lights

28/8/LED P28/8W LED

Side repeater lights LED -

Front fog lights* 27 GE881

Stop/tail lights (outside) 28/8 or LED 2357 or LED

Tail light (inside) 5 W5W

Rear turn signal lights (outside) 27 1156NA

Back-up lights (outside) 16 W16W

High mounted stop light 21 W21W

License plate lights 5 W5W

Map lamps 8 FESTTON 8W

Room lamps 8 FESTTON 8W

Trunk lamp 5 FESTTON 5W

DIMENSIONS

: with R15 tire

: with R16 tire

: with R17 tire

Item in (mm)

Overall length 178.3 (4550)

Overall width 69.9 (1775)

Overall height 56.5 (1430)

Front tread

61.5 (1563)*

/ 61.0 (1549)*

61.1 (1551)*

Rear tread

62.0 (1576)*

/ 61.5 (1562)*

61.6 (1564)*

Wheelbase 106.3 (2700)

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

TIRES AND WHEELS

Normal load : Up to 3 persons

If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, you will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit

Inflation pressure

psi (kPa)

Front Rear Front Rear

P195/65 R15 6.0J×15 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230)

P205/55 R16 6.5J×16 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230)

P215/45 R17 7.0J×17 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230)

60 60 60 60

T125/80D15 4.0T×15

(420) (420) (420) (420)

Full size tire

Compact

spare tire*

(if equipped)

Wheel lug nut torque

lb•ft (kg•m, N•m)

65~79

(9~11, 88~107)

Item

Tire

size

Wheel size

Normal load

Maximum load

CAUTION

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.

CAPACITY/WEIGHT

Item Manual transaxle Automatic transaxle

Gross vehicle weight

lbs. (kg)

3836 (1739) 3880 (1759)

Luggage volume

cu ft (l)

14.8 (420) 14.8 (420)

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.

The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

Lubricant

Volume Classification

Engine oil *

(drain and refill)

Recommends

4.23 US qt. (4.0 l)

API Service SM*

, ILSAC GF-4 or above

Manual transaxle fluid

2.01 US qt. (1.9 l)

API GL-4, SAE 75W/85

Automatic transaxle fluid

7.71 US qt. (7.3 l)

MICHANG ATF SP-4, SK ATF SP-4

NOCA ATF SP-4, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-4 or other

brands meeting the above specification approved by

Hyundai Motor Co.,

Coolant

Manual

transaxle

6.34 US qt. (6.0 l)

Mixture of antifreeze and water

(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)

Automatic

transaxle

6.23 US qt. (5.9 l)

Brake fluid

0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l)

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel

12.68 US gal. (48 l)

Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-

omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure

in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

Recommended SAE viscosity

number

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has

an effect on fuel economy and cold

weather operating (engine start and

engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi-

ty engine oils can provide better fuel

economy and cold weather perform-

ance, however, higher viscosity

engine oils are required for satisfac-

tory lubrication in hot weather.

Using oils of any viscosity other than

those recommended could result in

engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the

range of temperature your vehicle

will be operated in before the next oil

change. Proceed to select the rec-

ommended oil viscosity from the

chart.

CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area

around any filler plug, drain

plug, or dipstick before check-

ing or draining any lubricant.

This is especially important in

dusty or sandy areas and when

the vehicle is used on unpaved

roads. Cleaning the plug and

dipstick areas will prevent dirt

and grit from entering the

engine and other mechanisms

that could be damaged.

. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of

a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if

the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper

engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Engine Oil *

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30

°C

(°F)

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the number used in register-

ing your car and in all legal matters

pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor

under the passenger seat. To check

the number, open the cover.

The VIN is also on a plate attached

to the top of the dashboard. The

number on the plate can easily be

seen through the windshield from

outside.

The vehicle certification label

attached on the driver’s side center

pillar gives the Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

OBH088005N

■ VIN label

OMD080001

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL

OMD080002

OMDS082002

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

The tires supplied on your new vehi-

cle are chosen to provide the best

performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's

side center pillar gives the tire pres-

sures recommended for your car.

The engine number is stamped on

the engine block as shown in the

drawing.

The refrigerant label provides infor-

mation such as refrigerant type and

amount.

The label is located on the underside

of the hood.

OMD060012N

ENGINE NUMBER REFRIGERANT LABEL

(IF EQUIPPED)

TIRE SPECIFICATION AND

PRESSURE LABEL

OGD082009

OMD070054N

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

Eastern Region:

Connecticut, Delaware,

Maine, Massachusetts, New

Hampshire, New Jersey, New York,

Pennsylvania, Rhode Island,

Vermont.

Eastern Region

1122 Cranbury South River Road

Jamesburg, NJ 08831

(800) 633-5151

Southern Region:

Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North

Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia,

West Virginia.

Southern Region

3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway

Suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066

(800) 633-5151

South Central Region:

Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana,

Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma,

Tennessee, Texas.

South Central Region

1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400

Coppell, TX 75019

(800) 633-5151

Central Region:

Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky,

Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,

North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,

Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.

Central Region

1705 Sequoia Drive Aurora, Illinois

60506

(800) 633-5151

Western Region:

Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California,

Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada,

Oregon, Utah, Washington,

Wyoming.

Western Region

10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box

20850 Fountain Valley, California

92728-0850

(800) 633-5151

CONSUMER INFORMATION

This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.Your HYUNDAI dealer will help answer any questions

you may have as you read this information.

HYUNDAI motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particularly

the information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your near-

est HYUNDAI Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:

Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI

MOTOR AMERICA.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group

of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual prob-

lems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov;

or write to: Administrator, NHTSA

1200 New Jersey Ave, SE,

West Building Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Index

Accessing your vehicle ....................................................4-3

Immobilizer System ....................................................4-12

Remote key....................................................................4-3

Remote key precautions ................................................4-5

Smart key ......................................................................4-7

Smart key precautions ................................................4-11

Active ECO system ........................................................5-41

Air bag warning labels....................................................3-67

Air bags ..........................................................................3-45

Additional safety precautions......................................3-66

Air bag collision sensors ............................................3-61

Air bag deployment conditions ..................................3-62

Air bag non-deployment conditions............................3-63

Air bag warning labels ................................................3-67

Curtain air bags ..........................................................3-49

Do not install a child restraint on the front

passenger seat............................................................3-60

Driver’s air bag............................................................3-47

Occupant Classification System (OCS) ......................3-55

Passenger's front air bag..............................................3-47

Side (impact) air bags..................................................3-48

SRS Care ....................................................................3-65

SRS components and functions ..................................3-50

What to expect after an air bag inflates ......................3-54

Where are the air bags? ..............................................3-47

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision ................3-60

Air cleaner ......................................................................7-37

Air conditioning system

Automatic climate control system ..............................4-95

Manual climate control system ..................................4-85

Antenna ........................................................................4-100

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ......................................5-32

Appearance care..............................................................7-87

Exterior care ................................................................7-87

Interior care ................................................................7-92

Armrest (Rear seats) ......................................................3-14

Audio remote control....................................................4-101

Audio system ................................................................4-100

Antenna......................................................................4-100

Audio remote control ................................................4-101

Caring for disc ..........................................................4-105

CD player ..................................................................4-115

How vehicle audio works ........................................4-103

Auto defogging system ................................................4-108

Auto door lock/unlock features ......................................4-18

Auto light position ..........................................................4-73

Automatic climate control system ..................................4-94

Air conditioning ........................................................4-100

Air conditioning refrigerant label..............................4-104

Air intake control ........................................................4-99

Automatic heating and air conditioning......................4-95

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant

and compressor lubricant ........................................4-104

Fan speed control ......................................................4-100

Index

Manual heating and air conditioning ..........................4-96

Mode selection ............................................................4-96

OFF mode..................................................................4-101

Temperature control ....................................................4-97

Automatic transaxle ........................................................5-22

Good driving practices ................................................5-27

Ignition key interlock system ......................................5-27

Parking ........................................................................5-27

Shift lock system ........................................................5-25

Shift-lock release ........................................................5-26

Sports mode ................................................................5-24

Automatic turn off function............................................4-78

Aux, USB and iPod ......................................................3-102

Battery ............................................................................7-43

Battery recharging ......................................................7-45

Battery saver function ....................................................4-77

Before driving ..................................................................5-3

Blind zone mirror............................................................4-49

Blue Link

center ..........................................................4-42

Brake system ..................................................................5-29

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ....................................5-32

Disc brakes wear indicator ..........................................5-30

Electronic stability control (ESC) ..............................5-34

Good braking practices................................................5-39

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ................................5-39

Parking brake ..............................................................5-30

Power brakes ..............................................................5-29

Vehicle stability management (VSM) ........................5-38

Brake/clutch fluid ..........................................................7-35

Bulb replacement ............................................................7-76

Front side marker ........................................................7-79

Front turn signal light..................................................7-79

High mounted stop light..............................................7-84

Interior light ................................................................7-85

License plate light ......................................................7-85

Rear combination light ................................................7-81

Side repeater light ......................................................7-80

Bulb wattage ....................................................................8-2

Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button..................5-9

Index

Capacities (Lubricants) ....................................................3-4

Capacity/Weight................................................................8-3

Care

Exterior care ................................................................7-87

Interior care ................................................................7-92

Tire care ......................................................................7-47

CD player ....................................................................4-115

Center console storage ..................................................4-110

Central door lock switch ................................................4-17

Certification label ............................................................8-6

Chains

Tire chains ..................................................................5-53

Changing a Tire with TPMS ..........................................6-14

Check tire inflation pressure ..........................................7-49

Child restraint system (CRS)..........................................3-34

Booster seats................................................................3-37

Forward-facing child restraints ..................................3-37

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................3-37

Lower Anchors and Tether for Children (LATCH)

System ......................................................................3-38

Rear-facing child seats ................................................3-36

Securing a child restraint seat with “Tether Anchor”

system........................................................................3-41

Securing a child restraint with the LATCH anchors

system........................................................................3-40

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................3-35

Child-safety rear door lock ............................................4-19

Climate control air filter ................................................4-92

Climate control air filter (replacement)..........................7-39

Clock ............................................................................4-113

Clothes hanger ..............................................................4-117

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ................4-51

Compact spare tire replacement ....................................7-52

Consumer information ....................................................8-8

Coolant............................................................................7-32

Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ..................................7-32

Crankcase emission control system................................7-94

Cruise control system ....................................................5-43

Cup holder ....................................................................4-115

Curtain air bags ..............................................................3-49

Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel

illumination ..................................................................4-52

Dashboard, see instrument cluster ..................................4-51

Day/night rearview mirror ..............................................4-42

Daytime running light ....................................................4-78

Defogging (Windshield) ..............................................4-105

Defroster (Rear window) ................................................4-83

Defrosting (Windshield) ..............................................4-105

Dimensions ......................................................................8-2

Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination ..4-52

Displays, see instrument cluster ....................................4-51

Index

Door locks ......................................................................4-14

Auto door lock/unlock features ..................................4-18

Central door lock switch ............................................4-17

Child-safety rear door lock..........................................4-19

Door lock button..........................................................4-16

Impact sensing door unlock system ............................4-18

Remote key..................................................................4-14

Smart key ....................................................................4-15

Speed sensing door lock system..................................4-18

Drinks holders, see cup holders ....................................4-115

Driver selectable steering mode ....................................4-39

Driver’s air bag ..............................................................3-47

Driving assist system

Active ECO system ....................................................5-41

Driving at night ..............................................................5-49

Driving in flooded areas ................................................5-51

Driving in the rain ..........................................................5-50

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with compass and

HomeLink

system ......................................................4-43

Electric power steering (EPS) ........................................4-38

Electronic stability control (ESC) ..................................5-34

Emergency towing ..........................................................6-29

Emission control system ................................................7-94

Crankcase emission control system ............................7-94

Evaporative emission control system..........................7-94

Exhaust emission control system ................................7-95

Engine compartment..................................................2-6, 7-2

Engine compartment panel fuse ....................................7-66

Engine coolant ................................................................7-32

Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................4-54

Engine number..................................................................8-7

Engine oil........................................................................7-30

Engine Start/Stop button ..................................................5-9

Evaporative emission control system ............................7-94

Exhaust emission control system....................................7-95

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ................7-26

Exterior care....................................................................7-87

Exterior lights ................................................................4-72

Exterior overview

Front ..............................................................................2-2

Rear................................................................................2-3

Index

Flat tire

Changing tires..............................................................6-16

Jack and tools ..............................................................6-15

Spare tire......................................................................6-15

Tire Mobility Kit ........................................................6-22

Floor mat anchor(s) ......................................................4-118

Fluid

Brake/clutch fluid ........................................................7-35

Washer fluid ................................................................7-36

Fog light (front) ..............................................................4-76

Front lamps ....................................................................4-79

Front seat ..........................................................................3-6

Fuel filler door ................................................................4-31

Fuel Gauge......................................................................4-54

Fuel requirements ............................................................1-3

Fuses ..............................................................................7-63

Engine compartment panel fuse ..................................7-66

Fuse/relay panel description........................................7-68

Instrument panel fuse ..................................................7-64

Main fuse ....................................................................7-66

Memory fuse................................................................7-65

Multi fuse ....................................................................7-67

Gauges ............................................................................4-53

Glove box ......................................................................4-111

Hazard warning flasher ....................................................6-2

Hazardous driving conditions ........................................5-48

Headlight bulb replacement............................................7-76

Headlight escort function................................................4-77

Headlight position ..........................................................4-73

Headrest ..........................................................................3-15

Heater

Automatic climate control system ..............................4-95

Manual climate control system ..................................4-85

Height adjustment ..........................................................3-23

High beam operation ......................................................4-74

High mounted stop light replacement ............................7-84

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-39

Hood................................................................................4-29

Horn ................................................................................4-41

How to use this manual ....................................................1-2

How vehicle audio works ............................................4-103

F G

Index

If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly ........6-4

If the engine overheats......................................................6-8

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing ..................6-3

If the engine stalls while driving ......................................6-3

If the engine turns over normally but doesn’t start ..........6-4

If the engine will not start ................................................6-4

If you have a flat tire ......................................................6-15

If you have a flat tire while driving..................................6-3

Ignition key interlock system ........................................5-27

Ignition switch ..................................................................5-5

Engine Start/Stop button................................................5-9

Key ignition switch ......................................................5-5

Immobilizer system ........................................................4-12

Impact sensing door unlock system................................4-18

Improtant safety precautions ............................................3-2

Air bag hazards..............................................................3-2

Always wear your seat belt ..........................................3-2

Control your speed ........................................................3-3

Driver distraction ..........................................................3-2

Keep your vehicle in safe condition..............................3-3

Restrain all children ......................................................3-2

In case of emergency while driving..................................6-3

Inside rearview mirror ....................................................4-42

Instrument cluster ..........................................................4-51

ECO ON/OFF mode....................................................4-59

Gauges ........................................................................4-53

Instrument panel illumination ....................................4-45

Manual transaxle shift indicator..................................4-59

Transaxle shift indicator ..............................................4-56

Trip computer ..............................................................4-93

Warnings and indicators ..............................................4-60

Instrument panel fuse......................................................7-64

Instrument panel overview ..............................................2-5

Interior care ....................................................................7-92

Interior features ............................................................4-113

Aux, USB and iPod ..................................................4-102

Clock..........................................................................4-113

Clothes hanger ..........................................................4-117

Cup holder ................................................................4-115

Floor mat anchor(s) ..................................................4-118

Luggage net (holder) ................................................4-119

Outside temperature ..................................................4-114

Power outlet ..............................................................4-116

Sunvisor ....................................................................4-116

Interior lights ..................................................................4-78

Interior overview ..............................................................2-4

Index

Jack and tools..................................................................6-15

Jump starting ....................................................................6-5

Label

Refrigerant label ............................................................8-7

Jack label ....................................................................6-21

Tire sidewall labeling ..................................................7-53

Tire specification and pressure label ............................8-7

Vehicle certification label..............................................8-6

Light................................................................................4-72

Auto light position ......................................................4-73

Automatic turn off function ........................................4-78

Battery saver function ................................................4-77

Daytime running light ................................................4-78

Exterior lights ..............................................................4-72

Front fog light..............................................................4-76

Front lamps..................................................................4-79

Headlight escort function ............................................4-77

Headlight position ......................................................4-73

High beam operation ..................................................4-74

Lighting control ..........................................................4-72

Map lamp ....................................................................4-79

One-touch lane change function..................................4-76

Parking light position ..................................................4-72

Rear room lamp ..........................................................4-80

Room lamp ..................................................................4-36

Trunk lamp ..................................................................4-80

Turn signals ................................................................4-75

Vanity mirror lamp ......................................................4-80

Light bulbs ......................................................................7-76

Lubricants and capacities..................................................8-4

Luggage net (holder) ....................................................4-119

Main fuse ........................................................................7-66

Maintenance

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............7-26

Maintenance services ....................................................7-3

Maintenance under severe usage conditions ..............7-24

Normal maintenance service ........................................7-9

Owner maintenance ......................................................7-6

Scheduled maintenance service ....................................7-8

Tire maintenance ........................................................7-53

Maintenance services........................................................7-3

Manual climate control system ......................................4-84

Air conditioning ..........................................................4-90

Air Conditioning refrigerant label ..............................4-93

Air intake control ........................................................4-88

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant

and compressor lubricant ..........................................4-93

Climate control air filter..............................................4-92

Index

Fan speed control ........................................................4-89

Heating and air conditioning ......................................4-85

MAX A/C-Level..........................................................4-87

Mode selection ............................................................4-86

Temperature control ....................................................4-87

Manual transaxle ............................................................5-18

Downshifting ..............................................................5-19

Good driving practices ................................................5-20

Using the clutch ..........................................................5-19

Map lamp ........................................................................4-79

Memory fuse ..................................................................7-65

Mirrors ............................................................................4-42

Blind zone mirror ........................................................4-49

Blue Link

center........................................................4-42

Day/night rearview mirror ..........................................4-42

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with compass and

HomeLink

system ..................................................4-43

Folding the outside rearview mirror............................4-50

Inside rearview mirror ................................................4-42

Outside rearview mirror ..............................................4-48

Outside rearview mirror remote control......................4-49

Moonroof, see sunroof....................................................4-34

Multi fuse........................................................................7-67

Occupant Classification System (OCS)..........................3-55

Odometer ........................................................................4-55

Oil (Engine) ....................................................................7-30

Outside rearview mirror..................................................4-48

Outside temperature ......................................................4-114

Owner maintenance ..........................................................7-6

Parking brake ........................................................5-30, 7-36

Parking light position......................................................4-72

Passenger's front air bag ................................................3-47

Power brakes ..................................................................5-29

Power outlet ..................................................................4-116

Power window lock switch ............................................4-27

Pre-tensioner seat belt ....................................................3-27

Index

Rear combination light replacement ..............................7-81

Rear seat..........................................................................3-12

Rearview camera ............................................................4-71

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ..................7-48

Recommended lubricants and capacities..........................8-4

Recommended SAE viscosity number..........................8-5

Refrigerant label ..............................................................8-7

Remote key ......................................................................4-3

Battery replacement ......................................................4-6

Removable towing hook ................................................6-29

Replacement light bulb ..................................................7-76

Reporting safety defects ..................................................8-9

Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-48

Room lamp......................................................................4-37

Rotation (Tire) ................................................................7-50

Scheduled maintenance service ........................................7-8

Seat belt warning light....................................................3-22

Seat belts ........................................................................3-21

Additional seat belt safety precautions ......................3-29

Care of seat belts ........................................................3-32

Do not lie down ..........................................................3-32

Emergency Fastening Device (EFD) ..........................3-27

Height adjustment........................................................3-23

Keep belts clean and dry ............................................3-32

One person per belt ....................................................3-31

Passenger’s 3-point system with combination

locking retractor ........................................................3-25

Periodic inspection ......................................................3-32

Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................3-27

Retractor Pre-tensioner................................................3-27

Seat belt restraint system ............................................3-23

Seat belt safety precautions ........................................3-21

Seat belt use and children............................................3-29

Seat belt warning light ................................................3-22

Seat Belt-Driver’s 3-point system with emergency

locking retractor ........................................................3-23

Transporting an injured person....................................3-31

When to replace seat belts ..........................................3-33

Seat warmers ..................................................................3-19

Seatback pocket ..............................................................3-11

R S

Index

Seats ..................................................................................3-4

Armrest (Rear seats)....................................................3-14

Headrest ......................................................................3-15

Manual adjustment (Front seats) ..................................3-7

Power adjustment (Front seats) ....................................3-8

Rear seats ....................................................................3-12

Safety precautions ........................................................3-5

Seat warmers ..............................................................3-19

Seatback pocket ..........................................................3-11

Shift lock system ............................................................5-25

Shift-lock release ............................................................5-26

Side (impact) air bags ....................................................3-48

Sliding armrest ..............................................................4-111

Smart key ..........................................................................4-7

Battery replacement ....................................................4-12

Smooth cornering............................................................5-49

Snow tires ......................................................................5-51

Spare tire

Compact spare tire replacement ..................................7-52

Special driving conditions ..............................................5-48

Driving at night ..........................................................5-49

Driving in flooded areas..............................................5-51

Driving in the rain ......................................................5-50

Hazardous driving conditions......................................5-48

Rocking the vehicle ....................................................5-48

Smooth cornering ........................................................5-49

Speed sensing door lock system ....................................4-18

Speedometer....................................................................4-53

Sports mode ....................................................................5-24

Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ..................6-4

Steering wheel ................................................................4-38

Driver selectable steering mode ..................................4-39

Electric power steering (EPS) ....................................4-38

Horn ............................................................................4-41

Tilt steering / Telescope steering ................................4-39

Steering wheel audio control ........................................4-101

Storage compartment ....................................................4-110

Center console storage ..............................................4-110

Glove box ..................................................................4-111

Sliding armrest ..........................................................4-111

Sunglass holder..........................................................4-112

Sunglass holder ............................................................4-112

Sunroof............................................................................4-34

Sunvisor ........................................................................4-116

Tachometer......................................................................4-53

Theft alarm system ........................................................4-20

Tilt steering / Telescope steering ....................................4-39

Tire chains ......................................................................5-53

Tire loading information label ........................................5-56

Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) ................................................6-22

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ......................6-10

Changing a Tire with TPMS ......................................6-14

Low tire pressure telltale ............................................6-11

TPMS malfunction indicator ......................................6-13

Tire rotation ....................................................................7-50

Tire specification and pressure label ................................8-7

Tires and wheels ............................................................7-47

All season tires ............................................................7-60

Check tire inflation pressure ......................................7-49

Compact spare tire replacement ..................................7-52

Low aspect ratio tires ..................................................7-61

Radial-ply tires ............................................................7-61

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ................7-48

Snow tires ....................................................................7-60

Specification ..................................................................8-3

Summer tires................................................................7-60

Tire care ......................................................................7-47

Tire maintenance ........................................................7-53

Tire replacement ..........................................................7-51

Tire rotation ................................................................7-50

Tire sidewall labeling ..................................................7-53

Tire terminology and definitions ................................7-57

Tire traction ................................................................7-52

Wheel alignment and tire balance ..............................7-51

Wheel replacement ......................................................7-52

Towing ............................................................................6-28

Trailer towing..................................................................5-61

Transaxle shift indicator ................................................4-56

Trip computer..................................................................4-56

Trunk ..............................................................................4-21

Emergency trunk safety release ..................................4-22

Trunk lamp......................................................................4-80

Turn signals ....................................................................4-75

Index

Vanity mirror lamp..........................................................4-80

Vehicle break-in process ..................................................1-5

Vehicle certification label ................................................8-6

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders..............1-6

Vehicle identification number (VIN)................................8-6

Vehicle load limit............................................................5-55

Certification label ........................................................5-60

Tire loading information label ....................................5-56

Vehicle stability management (VSM) ............................5-38

Warnings and indicators..................................................4-60

Washer fluid ....................................................................7-36

Wheel alignment and tire balance ..................................7-51

Wheel replacement ........................................................7-52

Windows ........................................................................4-24

Auto down window ....................................................4-26

Auto up/down window ................................................4-26

Automatic reversal ......................................................4-27

Power window lock switch ........................................4-27

To reset the power windows........................................4-26

Windshield defrosting and defogging ..........................4-105

Windshield washers ......................................................4-82

Windshield wipers ........................................................4-81

Winter driving ................................................................5-51

Snow tires ....................................................................5-51

Tire chains ..................................................................5-51

Wiper blades ..................................................................7-41

Wipers and washers ........................................................4-81

Windshield washers ....................................................4-82

Windshield wipers ......................................................4-81

V W

Hyundai Elantra 2015 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info